JP2021115009A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance interest in a game when executing a performance that uses vibration.SOLUTION: A game machine is set such that a specific interlocking performance is executable following a specific performance, such as movable body operation, image display, and music piece reproduction, in a ready-to-win performance of an SP ready-to-win A. In the specific interlocking performance, a particular vibration performance by one of vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 is executable. A vibration mode differs between a particular vibration performance by one of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 and a vibration performance by a vibration pattern in an operation part performance. Jackpot reliability in execution of the operation part performance is one of 50% or higher, 70% or higher, and 100% according to an operation part performance pattern. For a ready-to-win performance of an SP ready-to-win A, for example jackpot reliability is about 40%.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 12-2

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a technique of providing a vibrating means on a hitting ball launching handle has been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2007-38019

In the technique described in Patent Document 1, there is room for improvement in improving the interest of the production by vibration.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that enhances the interest of gaming when performing an effect by vibration.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention executes the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. The operating means (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) and can be operated by the player, and the operating means vibrate. As the vibration effect to be performed, a predetermined vibration effect (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration pattern included in the operation unit effect pattern) and a special vibration effect (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern) The effect of executing the variable display effect process in step S172 using the vibration control pattern of the operation unit effect control pattern and the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 (for example, the vibration control pattern). A light emitting effect capable of executing a light emitting effect (for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the light emitting color included in the operation unit effect pattern) that causes the operating means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect (such as the control CPU 120). An execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes an effect process during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) and a specific effect according to the progress of the game. Specific effect execution means (for example, variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) that can execute (for example, SP reach A reach effect, jackpot confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery, etc.) (Such as the effect control CPU 120 that executes the process), and the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed (the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher). For example, the jackpot reliability according to the operation unit effect pattern, etc.), the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect, and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed are controlled to the advantageous state. The ratio is different (for example, the emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern and the jackpot reliability according to the use of the operation unit effect pattern), and the vibration effect execution means executes the special vibration effect in association with the execution of the specific effect. It is possible (for example, execution of vibration effect during the period AKZ01 to AKZ05), the predetermined vibration effect and the special feature. The vibration mode is different from that of the special vibration effect (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44).
Moreover,
Step 100 IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control computer 100, as shown in FIG. 8-17, are state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. The part to be executed, as shown in FIG. 8-19, the part to execute step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the updating means (for example, the part where the numerical information can be updated based on the execution of the variable display). As shown in FIG. 8-13, the game control computer 100 includes a portion for executing step 100 IWS71), and the state control means has a specific value in which the numerical information updated by the update means corresponds to a special number of times. As a result, it is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, the portion in which step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100, FIG. 8-17. As shown, the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means executes the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. It is characterized in that the numerical information is updated depending on the case (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, the portion where step 100 IWS 71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect. Further, the relief of the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, even if the game state changes and the variable display of any identification information is executed, the numerical information is continuously updated, so that the player can be easily rescued and the motivation for the game is increased. Can be done.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the invention according to the following means A. Conventionally, there are known gaming machines that can be controlled to a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-95449. For example, in Patent Document 1, when a big hit (advantageous state) does not occur even if the number of special figure games executed in a normal gaming state (number of times of executing variable display) reaches 1000 times (special number of times) (special). (Conditions are satisfied), the game state is controlled to the probabilistic state, and the probability that a big hit is decided as a result of the special figure game is increased to about 1/100, and the big hit is likely to occur in the subsequent special figure games. It is stated that. Further, in Patent Document 1, when a big hit does not occur even if the number of times of the special figure game (the number of times of executing the variable display) reaches 1000 times in the normal game state, a time saving state is generated instead of the probability changing state. It is stated that it may be a thing.

However, with conventional gaming machines, it has been insufficient to consider the interests when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a special number or during the period before and after that.

Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine rich in interest.

(Means A) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-17). Based on the execution of step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control computer 100, the part in which step 100IWS537 is executed in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-19) and the variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a portion of the game control computer 100 for executing step 100 IWS71), and the state control means are updated by the update means. By setting the numerical information to a specific value corresponding to the special number of times the variable display is executed, it is possible to control the game to a special state when the special condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-13). The part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the computer 100 for game control, the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17), the updating means is the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on whether the variable display of the above is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, step 100 IWS 71 in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Steps to be executed), a predetermined suggestion effect execution means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-49) capable of executing a predetermined suggestion effect (for example, a notice effect) when the variable display is being executed, a step in the effect control CPU 120. 108 IWS 811 is executed) and a special notification effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-52 (C1) and (C2)) for notifying that the control of the special state is started based on the establishment of the special condition. Special notification that can execute (such as changing the background image, blacking out at the start of fluctuation as shown in FIG. 14-53 (B), blacking out at the end of fluctuation as shown in FIG. 14-54 (C), etc.) Production execution means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-23, performance The output control CPU 120 further includes (a portion where the output control CPU 120 executes step 100 IWS638), and the predetermined suggestion effect executing means has a common ratio of executing the predetermined suggestion effect in the period before the special condition is satisfied (for example, FIG. 14). As shown in −44, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A. See Figure 14-50).
According to such a configuration, the player can be surprised by suddenly executing the special notification effect, and the interest can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of stop symbol determination processing. It is a figure which shows the setting example about the setting suggestion effect execution decision table. It is a figure which shows the configuration example and setting example about setting suggestion pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the setting suggestion effect. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on a feature part 10SH. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on a feature part 10SH. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process which concerns on a feature part 10SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of a vibration effect and an example of a jackpot reliability. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution timing and the effect period of a vibration effect and a line-of-sight guidance effect. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the effect device about the feature part 48AK to 50AK. It is a figure which shows the setting example at the time of executing the operation part effect pattern and the specific interlocking effect. It is a figure which shows the setting content of a vibration pattern. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the effect by vibration and light emission. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the continuous effect pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the read-ahead notice setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the effect control pattern. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the timing which can execute the operation part effect. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part effect. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part effect. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part effect. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part effect. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part effect. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part effect. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the effect which makes a game effect lamp emit light. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the effect period which can execute a specific interlocking effect. It is a figure which shows the effect execution example when the reach effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the effect execution example when the reach effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the effect execution example when the reach effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the music reproduction execution example. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the feature part 108IW. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot probability and the time saving loss probability for each set value. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot probability and the time saving loss probability for each set value. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the time saving type determination table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the time saving type. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature part 108IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature part 108IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 108IW. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the external output signal. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing. It is a state transition diagram for demonstrating the state transition in the feature part 108IW. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of the effect control main processing in the feature part 108IW. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the customer waiting demonstration production control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the telop display execution lottery table and the telop mode determination lottery table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the concrete example of the effect mode of the telop display while waiting for a customer. It is a flowchart which shows the read-ahead notice setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the pre-reading notice effect execution decision table, the pre-reading notice effect type determination table, and the pre-read notice effect mode determination table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of each effect type of the look-ahead notice effect. It is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period and the execution period of the look-ahead notice effect in the time saving state via the jackpot and the time saving state via the relief. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the advance notice effect execution decision table and the advance notice effect mode determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. This is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode until the relief time shifts to shortening. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode until the relief time shifts to shortening. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode until the relief time shifts to shortening. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode until the relief time shifts to shortening. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the concrete example of the production mode of the time saving rushing appearance effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a specific example of the production mode of the countdown effect and the effect effect of Gase. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol process processing in the modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing in modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the next fluctuation postponement processing in modification 1. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the execution timing of the effect at the time of executing the variation display which shortens the relief time in the modification 1. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating modification 2-4 of the method of selecting the fluctuation pattern in the time saving state based on the relief time saving. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process in Example 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process in Example 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the advance notice effect execution decision table and the advance notice effect mode determination table in Example 2. FIG. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the execution timing of the effect at the time of executing the variation display which shortens the relief time in Example 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode until shifting to the relief time shortening in Example 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode until shifting to the relief time shortening in the modification 1 of the second embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode until shifting to the relief time shortening in the modification 2 of the second embodiment.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game, decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbols are displayed. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening that is always maintained in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to the one provided with an electric tulip type accessory.

A general winning opening 10 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the lower left and right sides of the game area), which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. The ordinary symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

A normal symbol display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the hitting ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. On the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as a jackpot winning probability and a ball output rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ream ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the first prize opening and the second prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. Of the total number of prize balls, the number of prize balls by winning the second starting prize opening (Denchu) and the number of prize balls by winning the first and second major winning openings (attackers) occupy. It is a ratio. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player on the ball striking operation handle. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the normal symbol (the normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and open upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls are obtained, or a jackpot type in which almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in the time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in the probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in the normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on or off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability change symbol becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, the power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which a conductor pattern is formed and electric components can be mounted, but also electric components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, electric power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as a main board 11 and an effect control board 12 by a power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage to a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). (A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The reset signal, power cutoff signal, and clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting the control circuit of the game control microcomputer 100 or the like into an operation stop state, and can be output by using any of the power supply monitoring circuit, the watchdog timer built-in IC, and the system reset IC. All you need is. The power off signal is turned off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and is turned on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage is below the predetermined value continues for the power interruption reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CG ROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, and the like may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery conditions can be satisfied.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the recovery process (step S4) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. By the recovery process in step S4, the work area is set based on the stored contents of the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the symbol can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the setting change process (step S7) is executed after the initialization process (step S6) is executed. The initialization process of step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled so that the lost symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the display corresponding to the game stopped state different from the lost symbol is displayed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the setting change state, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed. After that, based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the amusement park or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is stored. Turns off. When the setting change state is terminated, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in the game stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch is on, the step is performed together with the initialization process in step S6. The setting change process of S7 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. If the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and interrupts are permitted (step S10). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change state, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the start winning prize determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold memories, the read-ahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Be told. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is set using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to start the execution of the round in the big hit game state and open the big winning opening based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a jackpot game state when the maximum number of executions is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a configuration in which the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability and the ball output rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. .. If the jackpot winning probability changes according to the set value, the ball output rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 7A shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 7B shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. A configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of the figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is in the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) are displayed as a special figure of "big hit". Assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high-probability state such as a probabilistic state in which the probabilistic change control is performed, there is a probability that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be controlled to the jackpot game state as compared with the low-probability state such as the normal state or the time-saving state. It gets higher.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, it is determined that the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. A value has been assigned. In the display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" is the probability of being determined to be controlled to the small hit game state regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that they have the same value as the judgment table. It should be noted that the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" may be different according to the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit gaming state as "small hit" may be the same probability.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure and the display result judgment table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and while only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, the set value 2 to the set value 6 In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure and the display result judgment table for the second special figure, when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judgment. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit", so that only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

The set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the small hit are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small while the probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (in order to execute a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (to control the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratios of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 8 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 9, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when receiving an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the set contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to "" and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation was a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of the feature part related to the setting suggestion effect)
Hereinafter, the feature portion related to the setting suggestion effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In this feature unit, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a predetermined ratio during execution of the variable display.

FIG. 10-1 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of the effect control process process as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process, the stop symbol determination process is executed (step S201). In the stop symbol determination process, a combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbol, such as the final stop symbol in the variable display of the decorative symbol, is determined. Following the stop symbol determination process, the advance notice effect determination process is executed (step S202). The advance notice effect determination process makes it possible to determine the advance notice effect included in the advantageous suggestion effect.

After the advance notice effect determination process is executed, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of prepared patterns (step S203). The effect control pattern may include an effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates, a notice effect control pattern, and other control patterns for controlling various effect executions. For example, in response to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern specification command, one of a plurality of prepared special figure fluctuation effect control patterns is selected and set as the usage pattern. Further, one of a plurality of prepared advance notice effect control patterns may be selected and set as a use pattern in accordance with the determination result by the advance notice effect determination process in step S202. It should be noted that the effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates and the advance notice effect control pattern are not limited to those in which separate effect control patterns are set, but one effect control pattern corresponding to the combination of execution settings of each effect is set. There may be.

When the effect control pattern is determined in step S203, for example, the initial stage of the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area (effect control timer setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 122 corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. Set the value (step S204). In addition, a setting is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to start the fluctuation of the decorative pattern or the like (step S205). At this time, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in step S203 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123, or the like. The variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

Subsequently, the hold display update setting at the start of the variable display is performed (step S206). For example, in the hold display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display part (display part at the left end) corresponding to the hold number "1" is erased (digested), and the other hold numbers "2" to "2" are deleted. The hold display in the display area corresponding to "4" or the like is moved (shifted) one by one to the left. As a result, the hold display is shifted. In the active display unit provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the active display corresponding to the erased (digested) hold display may be performed in the hold display area. If the variable display is immediately started based on the occurrence of the first start prize or the second start prize when the number of pending memories is "0", the active display area is not updated without updating the hold display. Settings may be made to update the active display in. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S207), and then the variable display start setting process ends.

FIG. 10-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S201 of the variable display start setting process as the stop symbol determination process. In the stop symbol determination process, it is determined whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is executed (step S221). Whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is executed can be determined based on, for example, the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

If the reach effect of the super reach is not executed (step S221; No), the final stop symbol at the time of non-reach or normal reach is determined (step S222), and the stop symbol determination process is ended. At the time of non-reach, the variable display result becomes "missing". At the time of normal reach, there are cases where the variable display result is "big hit" and cases where the variable display result is "missing". When the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol. The final stop symbol at the time of non-reach is determined to be a different (mismatched) decorative symbol in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. At the time of normal reach when the variable display result becomes "missing", the final stop symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of reach loss. The final stop symbol at the time of reach loss is determined so that the same (matching) decorative symbol is used in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. At the time of normal reach when the variable display result becomes "big hit", the fixed decorative symbol of the big hit combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of big hit. The final stop symbol at the time of a big hit is determined to be the same (matching) decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right".

When the reach effect of the super reach is executed (step S221; Yes), the final stop symbol at the time of super reach is determined (step S223). At the time of super reach, there are cases where the variable display result is "big hit" and cases where the variable display result is "missing". At the time of super reach when the variable display result becomes "missing", the final stop symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of reach loss. At the time of a big hit where the variable display result is a "big hit", the final stop symbol of the big hit combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of the big hit.

At the time of super reach, the same (matching) decorative symbols in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R are displayed regardless of whether the variable display result is "big hit" or "missing". It is stopped and displayed as a fixed decorative pattern. The left and right decorative symbols that make up such a reach loss combination and a jackpot combination are also called reach symbols. The decorative symbol that can be determined as the reach symbol may include a plurality of types of decorative symbols, for example, seven types of decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers 1 to 7. The decorative pattern corresponding to the numbers may be only an effect image showing the numbers, or may be an effect image showing various characters in addition to the numbers. The reach symbol is determined to be one of a plurality of decorative symbols by referring to a reach symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random value for determining the reach symbol. You can do it like this. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the reach symbol may be updatable by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

In the reach symbol determination table, the number of determination values assigned to the decorative symbols to be the reach symbols may differ depending on whether the variable display result is "miss" or "big hit". For example, when the variable display result is "missing", the determination ratio of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 1 is the highest, and the number 2, the number 3, the number 4, the number 5, the number 6 are the highest. As a result, the determination rate of the decorative pattern becomes lower, and the determination rate of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 becomes the lowest. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit", the determination ratio of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 1 is the lowest, and the number 2, the number 3, the number 4, the number 5, the number 6 As the number becomes, the determination ratio of the decorative symbol becomes higher, and the determination ratio of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 becomes the highest. In such a setting of the determination ratio, when the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as the reach symbol, the variable display result becomes "big hit" and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit gaming state is the highest, and 6 As the number becomes the number of, 5 number, 4 number, 3 number, and 2 number, the variable display result when stopped and displayed as a reach symbol becomes "big hit", and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is low. Therefore, when the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 1 is stopped and displayed as the reach symbol, the variable display result becomes "big hit", and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is the lowest. In the reach symbol determination table, the number of determination values assigned to the decorative symbols to be the reach symbols may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is "miss" or "big hit". The number of determined judgment values assigned to each decorative symbol to be a reach symbol may be different, or the number of assigned determination values may be the same regardless of the decorative symbol to be a reach symbol. Depending on the jackpot type, the determination ratio of the decorative symbol to be the reach symbol may be different.

Following step S223, it is determined whether or not the determined reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 (step S224). At this time, if the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7 (step S224; No), the stop symbol determination process is terminated. When the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 (step S224; Yes), the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined according to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed (step S225). Whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed is determined by referring to the setting suggestion effect execution decision table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect. You can do it. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion effect execution may be updatable by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. The presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be either "no effect" that does not execute the setting suggestion effect or "with effect" that executes the setting suggestion effect.

Based on the determination result in step S225, it is determined whether or not it is determined that "with effect" for executing the setting suggestion effect is determined (step S226). When it is determined that "no effect" is not executed (step S226; No), the stop symbol determination process is terminated. When it is determined that "with effect" (step S226; Yes), the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (step S227). The effect control CPU 120 may receive the set value notification command transmitted from the main board 11 side when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, and store the notified set value in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. As a result, in step S227, the set value stored in the RAM 122 may be specified.

Following step S227, the setting suggestion pattern is determined (step S228), and then the stop symbol determination process is terminated. The setting suggestion pattern can be selected from a plurality of setting suggestion patterns by referring to a setting suggestion pattern determination table stored in advance in ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random value for determining the setting suggestion pattern. It should be decided. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion pattern may be updated by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

FIG. 10-3 shows a setting example relating to the setting suggestion effect execution decision table. For example, the ROM 121 stores in advance the table data constituting the determination table TA01 shown in FIG. 10-3 as the setting suggestion effect execution determination table. In step S225 of the stop symbol determination process, the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined by referring to the determination table TA01 or the like. In the determination table TA01, the number of determination values assigned to the presence / absence of the setting suggestion effect differs depending on whether the variable display result is “miss” or “big hit”. For example, when the variable display result is "big hit", the determination rate of "with effect" for executing the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the variable display result is "miss". In such a setting of the determination ratio, when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the variable display result becomes a "big hit" and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is higher than when the setting suggestion effect is not executed. In the setting suggestion effect execution decision table, the number of judgment values assigned to the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is "miss" or "big hit". ..

FIG. 10-4 (A) shows a configuration example of the setting suggestion pattern. In this embodiment, four patterns RE-0 to RE3 are provided as a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. The suggestion contents of these setting suggestion patterns differ depending on whether or not the symbol display color is changed and the display color when the symbol display color is changed. The symbol display color is a display color of a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed as a reach symbol, and can be changed to a suggestion display color including copper, silver, and gold in addition to red, which is a normal display color. The pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color, and suggests that the degree of expectation, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, is low. The pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper color, and suggests confirmation that the set value is 2 or more. The pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver, suggesting that the player has a high degree of expectation, which is an advantageous setting value. The pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold, and suggests confirmation that it is 6, which is the highest set value. As described above, in the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol, it is possible to suggest the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to whether or not the symbol display color has changed and the symbol display color after the change.

FIG. 10-4 (B) shows a setting example relating to the setting suggestion pattern determination table. For example, the ROM 121 stores in advance the table data constituting the determination table TA11 shown in FIG. 10-4 (B) as the setting suggestion pattern determination table. In step S228 of the stop symbol determination process, the setting suggestion pattern is determined by referring to the determination table TA11 or the like. In the determination table TA11, there is a portion in which the number of determination values assigned to the determination result of the setting suggestion pattern differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

When the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed, the reach symbol becomes a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, so that the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is high. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-0, the expectation level which is an advantageous setting value for the player is low, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-1, the set value is 2 or more. It is confirmed that there is. Further, when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-2, the expectation is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-3, the setting value is the highest. It is confirmed that it is 6. As described above, when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach mode, the reach symbol includes a symbol display mode that suggests control of the jackpot gaming state such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7, and a symbol display mode of 7. It includes a symbol display mode that suggests control of a jackpot gaming state such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number and suggests a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the reach symbol is displayed in the normal display color to give a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state, and then the symbol display color is changed. The suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state will be continuously provided, and the suggestions regarding the set value will be provided.

The setting suggestion effect can be executed so that the effect mode differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined in the pattern RE-1, so that the symbol display color is not changed to copper. In this way, as a symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, the symbol display color Is different whether or not is changed to copper color. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 6, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined in the pattern RE-3, so that the symbol display color is not changed to gold. In this way, the symbol display color is gold as a symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine is 6. Whether or not it is changed to is different.

The setting suggestion effect was stopped and displayed as a reach symbol in place of the one that changes the symbol display color, which is the display color of the decorative symbol that was stopped and displayed as the reach symbol, or in addition to the one that changes the symbol display color. Any aspect of the reach aspect, such as the shape or pattern of the decorative pattern, may be changed. Alternatively, display of a background image, an outer frame image, or any other effect image, output of sound by the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting of a decorative light emitter such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, operation of a movable member for effect, and the like. The production mode by any production device, such as a combination of a part or all of them, may be changed. For the setting suggestion effect and other arbitrary effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1, arbitrary data related to the effect control, arbitrary data not related to the effect control, or data obtained by combining these are predetermined for executing the effect. It may be feasible if it satisfies one or more conditional expressions. The effect of changing the pattern display color is also called a change effect.

The plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include a pattern that can be determined only when the jackpot gaming state is controlled, and a pattern that can be determined even when the jackpot gaming state is not controlled. For example, pattern RE-0 and pattern RE-1 can be determined at a predetermined ratio even when the variable display result is "missing", whereas pattern RE-2 and pattern RE-3 are variable display. It may be possible to determine at a predetermined ratio only when the result is "big hit", and it may not be possible to determine when the variable display result is "missing". In this case, the pattern RE-2 is determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, whereas the pattern RE-3 is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value.

FIG. 10-5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process as the effect process during variable display. In the variable display during effect processing, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern, has elapsed, based on, for example, the timer value of the effect control process timer (step S241). When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S241; No), control is performed to execute various effects as the variable display progresses. The effect control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the effect control pattern determined in step S203 of the variable display start setting process. This command is transmitted to the display control unit 123, the voice control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. As a result, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on, off, and blinked. It suffices that various effects can be performed by a predetermined effect device by operating a movable member for effect such as the movable body 32, or by combining a part or all of them.

In the variable display during effect processing, it is determined whether or not it is the advance notice effect period (step S242). In the case of the advance notice effect period (step S242; Yes), the control for executing the advance notice effect is performed (step S243). When it is not the advance notice effect period (step S242; No), or after the control of step S243 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the reach effect period (step S244). In the case of the reach effect period (step S244; Yes), the control to execute the reach effect is performed (step S245). When the decorative symbol to be the reach symbol is stopped and displayed by the control of step S245 and then the reach effect after the symbol display color is changed is executed, the control of the jackpot game state is suggested and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is used. Can make suggestions regarding set values.

When it is not the reach effect period (step S244; No), or after the control of step S245 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the change effect period (step S246). The change effect period may be predetermined as an execution period of the effect of changing the symbol display color when the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed. In the case of the change effect period (step S246; Yes), the control to execute the change effect is performed (step S247). When it is not the change effect period (step S246; No), or after the control in step S247 is performed, for example, the decorative pattern can be changed based on the setting in the effect control pattern determined in response to the variation pattern. After performing control for executing the effect during the variable display including the display operation (step S248), the effect process during the variable display is terminated.

The change effect period may be set to a different time length depending on the effect mode of the change effect. For example, in the case of pattern RE-0, the change effect period is set to the shortest first period, and in the case of pattern RE-1, the change effect period is set to the second period longer than the first period, and the pattern RE- In the case of 2, the change effect period may be set to the third period, which is longer than the second period, and in the case of pattern RE-3, the change effect period may be set to the longest fourth period. Generally, when an effect (advantageous effect) for notifying an advantage is executed, a player takes an image or a video of the effect with a mobile terminal owned by the player and shoots it on an SNS (Social). There is a tendency to post on websites that require membership registration such as Networking Service) and Internet video supply sites. However, if the execution period of such an advantageous effect is short, there arises a problem that an appropriate shooting time cannot be secured. On the other hand, for productions that are often performed even when they are disadvantageous (disadvantageous productions), since they do not motivate the shooting motivation, if the execution period of the disadvantageous productions is long, the player will rather feel uncomfortable. There is a problem. Therefore, the execution period of the advantageous effect is lengthened to secure the shooting time, and the execution period of the unfavorable effect is shorter than that of the advantageous effect to reduce discomfort. As a result, when an effect that is advantageous to the player is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking it, and it is possible to secure a shooting time. In addition, by securing the shooting time, the shot images and moving images can be published by the player on the Internet, and the public interest in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be increased. In addition, in many cases, by disclosing the images taken by which pachinko game machine 1 in which game field, the game field was advertised by the players from the game field side. become. In this way, by securing the shooting time when the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suggested, a synergistic effect is brought about not only to the player but also to the game hall side.

When the variable display time has elapsed (step S241; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S249). If the symbol confirmation command is not received (step S249; No), the effect processing during variable display is terminated and the process waits. If the predetermined time elapses without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, the predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to normally receive the symbol confirmation command. You may do so. When a symbol confirmation command is received (step S249; Yes), control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (confirmed decorative symbol) that is the display result in the variable display of the decorative symbol (step S250). Subsequently, a predetermined fixed time is set as the waiting time for receiving the jackpot start designation command (step S251). Further, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3", which is a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S252), the variable display effect process is terminated.

FIG. 10-6 shows an execution example of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 10-6 (A) shows an effect execution example HD101 in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach mode and the reach is established. When the decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers 7 are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the "left" and "right", the reach is established and the reach effect of the normal reach is executed. FIG. 10-6 (B) shows an effect execution example HD102, which is a reach development in which the reach effect of the normal reach shifts to the reach effect of the super reach. On the display screen of the image display device 5, the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed, and the effect image in the reach effect of the super reach is displayed. FIG. 10-6 (C) shows an effect execution example HD103 in which a change effect that is a setting suggestion effect is executed. The effect display corresponding to the change effect is displayed by superimposing it on the reach symbol that is stopped and displayed. In addition, by displaying an effect image for notifying a message such as "change the symbol display color !!", it is suggested to change the symbol display color.

FIG. 10-6 (D1) shows an effect execution example HD111 in which the symbol display color does not change due to the pattern RE-0. FIG. 10-6 (D2) shows an effect execution example HD112 in which the pattern display color is changed to copper color by the pattern RE-1. FIG. 10-6 (D3) shows an effect execution example HD113 in which the symbol display color is changed to silver by the pattern RE-2. FIG. 10-6 (D4) shows an effect execution example HD113 in which the symbol display color is changed to gold by the pattern RE-3. In the effect execution example HD111, the display color of the reach pattern is not changed by the pattern RE-0, and is not changed as the normal display color of red. In this way, the failure effect (gase effect) in which the symbol display color is not changed is executed, suggesting that the expectation level, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, is low. In the effect execution example HD112, the display color of the reach pattern is changed to copper by the pattern RE-1, which suggests that the set value is 2 or more. In the effect execution example HD113, the display color of the reach pattern is changed to silver by the pattern RE-2, which suggests that the expectation is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player. In the effect execution example HD114, the display color of the reach pattern is changed to gold by the pattern RE-3, which suggests the determination of 6, which is the highest set value.

In addition to the change effect that can change the display color of the reach pattern, the setting suggestion effect suggests the jackpot expectation by any effect such as a pseudo-continuous effect or a look-ahead notice effect, and the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. May be able to make suggestions about. During the execution of the variable display, it may be possible to give a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 after giving a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state. When executing an arbitrary effect, after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed, and the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed and pachinko. It may include the case of giving a suggestion regarding the set value of the gaming machine 1. When performing an arbitrary effect, after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, the suggestion ends, and the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed, and the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is related. It may include the case of making a suggestion.

The suggestion regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the suggestion of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may suggest, for example, whether or not the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. .. For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include patterns having different determination ratios depending on whether or not the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. When the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, the suggestion is made by the effect mode of the pattern determined at a high rate so that the player can recognize that the set value has been changed. Can be diversified to improve the enjoyment of pachinko.

While the variable display is being executed, the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state may be given, while the suggestion regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not be given. After that, when the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit", the pachinko gaming machine is accompanied by the execution of the big hit start effect (fanfare effect) and the big hit medium effect (effect corresponding to the first round and the second round, etc.). You may make a suggestion about the setting value of 1. In some cases, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be suggested without suggesting the control of the jackpot gaming state.

Instead of some or all of the suggestions for controlling the jackpot gaming state, or with some or all of the suggestions for controlling the jackpot gaming state, make suggestions for controlling a state that is different from the jackpot gaming state for the player. It may be a thing. For example, it may be a suggestion about a probability change state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state. In addition, as an advantageous state, a state in which an arbitrary game value advantageous to the player is given may be suggested according to whether or not it is controlled.

(Explanation of feature 10SH)
Next, the feature portion 10SH of this embodiment will be described.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 10SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. For example, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 10SH includes an operating means that can be operated by the player. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 10SH includes a vibration effect executing means capable of executing a vibration effect in which the operating means vibrates. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 10SH includes a line-of-sight guidance effect executing means capable of executing a line-of-sight guidance effect that guides the player's line of sight to the operating means. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a line-of-sight guidance effect that guides the player's line of sight to the push button 31B.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 10SH is expected to be controlled in an advantageous state when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has higher jackpot reliability when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed.

The vibration effect executing means according to the feature unit 10SH can execute the vibration effect at the first timing and the second timing after the first timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 has a timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, a timing T2 at which the reach is established, and a normal reach after the timing T1 and the timing T2. The vibration effect can be executed at any of the timing T3 during which the reach effect is being executed and the timing T4 during which the reach effect of the super reach is being executed.

The vibration effect executing means according to the feature unit 10SH can execute the vibration effect in a common manner regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 has the push button 31B regardless of whether the timing is one of the timing T1 and the timing T2 or the timing of the timing T3 and the timing T4. The vibration effect can be performed in a manner in which the vibration time and the emission color are common.

The line-of-sight guidance effect executing means according to the feature unit 10SH does not execute the line-of-sight guidance effect at the first timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the line-of-sight guidance effect at the timing T1 and the timing T2.

The line-of-sight guidance effect executing means according to the feature unit 10SH can execute the line-of-sight guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the line-of-sight guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the timing T3 and the timing T4.

The vibration effect executing means according to the feature unit 10SH can execute the vibration effect when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect while the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 10SH includes a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect different from the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach effect of the super reach.

The vibration effect executing means according to the feature unit 10SH can execute the vibration effect when the specific effect is being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect when the reach effect of the super reach is being executed.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 10SH includes a display means for displaying. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an image display device 5 that displays various effects images.

The display of the line-of-sight guidance effect related to the feature unit 10SH has a lower priority than the display of predetermined information, and has a higher priority than the display of information different from the predetermined information. For example, the effect image of the line-of-sight guidance effect has a lower priority than the always small symbol, the number of hold display, and various error notifications, and has a higher priority than the hold display, the active display, the background image, and the decorative symbol.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 11-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature portion 10SH, and shows the layout of the main members.

The push button 31B is formed of a translucent member, and a game effect lamp 9B for a game effect is provided inside the push button 31B. According to such a configuration, the push button 31B can be made to emit light by turning on the game effect lamp 9B.

Further, the push button 31B is configured to be vibrable by driving the vibration motor 131. The vibration motor 131 is composed of, for example, an eccentric motor in which a weight having a biased center of gravity is provided on the motor shaft, and is provided inside or at a position close to the push button 31B. In addition, in order to make the vibration mode of the push button 31B various, a plurality of vibration motors 131 may be provided.

Game effect lamps 9L and 9R for game effects are provided at predetermined positions of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The game effect lamp 9L is provided on the left side of the push button 31B, and extends left and right from the center of the pachinko gaming machine 1 toward the outside. Similarly, the game effect lamp 9R is provided on the right side of the push button 31B, and extends left and right from the center of the pachinko gaming machine 1 toward the outside. The game effect lamps 9L and 9R have a plurality of LEDs built in along the extending direction of the game effect lamps 9L and 9R.

(Board configuration)
FIG. 11-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature portion 10SH.

The display control unit 123 supplies a lamp signal to the lamp control board 14 in order to turn on / off the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R in synchronization with the display of the effect image. The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, 9R, drives the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, 9R based on the lamp signal, and has a game effect in a manner specified by the lamp signal. Turn on / off the lamps 9B, 9L, 9R. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp. The lighting / extinguishing control of the lamp may be executed by the effect control CPU 120.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a motor control board 130. The display control unit 123 supplies the motor signal to the motor control board 130 in order to drive the vibration motor 131 in synchronization with the display of the effect image. The motor control board 130 is equipped with various circuits for driving the vibration motor 131, and drives the vibration motor 131 in a manner specified by the motor signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the vibration motor 131. The vibration motor 131 may be controlled by the effect control CPU 120.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 11-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process related to the feature unit 10SH. The effect control CPU 120 executes the process shown in FIG. 11-3 in the variable display start setting process of FIG.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol based on the variable display variation pattern to be executed from now on and the display result of the variable display to be executed from now on (step 10SHS1). The variation pattern and the display result are transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display, and are specified by the effect control command analyzed by the command analysis process. The final stop symbol is prepared in advance in the ROM 121 according to the combination of the variation pattern and the display result, and is determined by lottery or the like. Here, the lottery refers to a determination method using a random number value and a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121. As the random number value, one of the effect random numbers updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random number update process is used.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the vibration effect is executed and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when the vibration effect is executed (step 10SHS2). The vibration effect is an effect in which the push button 31B vibrates. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute a vibration effect that is not linked to the advance notice effect. In the process of step 10SHS2, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the vibration effect is executed and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when the vibration effect is executed by drawing a random number value and a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121. decide.

In the table referred to in the lottery of step 10SHS2, when the vibration effect is executed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the vibration effect is not executed, and when the vibration effect is executed, the jackpot reliability is higher according to the execution pattern of the vibration effect. The determination value to be compared with the random value may be assigned to the determination result of the presence / absence of the vibration effect and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when the vibration effect is executed.

Here, the jackpot reliability of a certain effect A is, for example, (probability that effect A is executed when the display result is "big hit") x (probability that the display result is "big hit") / {(display result). Probability that effect A is executed when is a "big hit") x (probability that the display result is a "big hit") + (probability that effect A is executed when the display result is not a "big hit") x ( Probability that the display result will not be a "big hit")}.

Therefore, in the table referred to in the lottery of step 10SHS2, the vibration effect of each execution pattern is performed when the display result becomes "big hit" so that the jackpot reliability corresponding to the execution pattern of the vibration effect becomes a predetermined value. It suffices to specify the probability of execution and the probability that the vibration effect of each execution pattern is executed when the display result does not become a "big hit".

(Contents of vibration production and jackpot reliability)
FIG. 11-4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the vibration effect and the reliability of the jackpot. In the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment, the execution patterns SE1 to the execution patterns SE1 to the combination of the execution timing of the vibration effect, the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect, and the emission color of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect. It is possible to execute a plurality of types of vibration effects of SE10.

The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect at any of the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and the timing T2 at which the reach is established. That is, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration effect at the timing T2 when the reach is established. Further, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at the timing T2 when the reach is established, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration effect at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution patterns SE1 to SE3 as the vibration effect at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Further, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution pattern SE4 as the vibration effect at the timing T2 when the reach is established.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment has a timing T3 that is executing a normal reach reach effect and a timing T4 that is executing a super reach reach effect after the timing T1 and the timing T2. The vibration effect can be executed at any of the timings. That is, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration effect at the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed. Further, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration effect at the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution patterns SE5 to SE7 as the vibration effect at the timing T3 during the execution of the reach effect of the normal reach. Further, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution patterns SE8 to SE10 as the vibration effect at the timing T4 during which the reach effect of the super reach is being executed.

According to such a configuration, the vibration effect may be executed when the reach effect of the super reach is executed, so that the interest can be improved.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment is the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the timing T3 during the normal reach reach effect, or the super reach reach effect. Regardless of the timing T4, the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit white light, and the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted. It is possible to carry out a vibration effect in which the light is emitted in red. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution patterns SE1, SE5, and SE8 as a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit white light. Is. Further, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution patterns SE2, SE6, and SE9 as a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit red light. Is.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment vibrates the push button 31B for 3 seconds and causes the push button 31B to emit rainbow colors regardless of the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed. Vibration production can be performed. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment executes the vibration effect of the execution patterns SE3, SE4, SE7, and SE10 as a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit rainbow colors. It is possible.

Then, in this embodiment, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds as compared with the case where the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit white light is executed. The jackpot reliability is higher when the vibration effect in which the push button 31B emits light in red is executed. Further, in this embodiment, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit rainbow colors is 100%, and the display result is "big hit". Is definitely notified.

According to such a configuration, when the push button 31B vibrates, it is possible to pay attention to what color the push button 31B emits light and how many seconds the push button 31B vibrates.

Further, in this embodiment, when the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 1.5 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit white light is executed, and when the push button 31B is vibrated and pushed for 3 seconds. When the vibration effect in which the button 31B emits light in red is executed, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the execution timing of the vibration effect. For example, even in the case of the vibration effect of the same aspect, when the normal reach reach effect is executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, it is executed more than when it is executed at the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed. The jackpot reliability is high. Further, even in the vibration effect of the same aspect, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed at the timing T4 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, it is executed at the timing T4 when the reach effect of the super reach is being executed. , The jackpot reliability is high.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation that the vibration effect is executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Further, when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined reach mode when the vibration effect is not executed at the timing T1, the reach effect of the super reach is performed instead of the timing T3 during which the reach effect of the normal reach is being executed. It is possible to increase the expectation that the vibration effect is executed at the timing T4 during execution. Then, when the vibration effect is not actually executed at the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed, the expectation that the vibration effect is executed at the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed is further increased. be able to.

The jackpot reliability of the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing T3 during which the reach effect of the normal reach is being executed may be higher than the reliability of the normal reach. Further, when a plurality of types of normal reach reach effects can be executed and the jackpot reliability differs depending on the type of normal reach reach effects, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effects that can be executed at the timing T3 during the normal reach reach effects is , It suffices if it is higher than the jackpot reliability of the reach effect of the normal reach being executed at that time, or higher than the jackpot reliability of the reach effect of any kind of normal reach.

Similarly, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing T4 during which the reach effect of the super reach is being executed may be higher than the reliability of the super reach. Further, when a plurality of types of super reach reach effects can be executed and the jackpot reliability differs depending on the type of super reach reach effect, the jackpot of the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed. The reliability may be higher than the jackpot reliability of the reach effect of the super reach being executed at that time, or higher than the jackpot reliability of the reach effect of any kind of super reach.

According to such a configuration, the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing T3 during the normal reach reach effect and the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing T4 during the super reach reach effect can be regarded as a chance-up effect. can do.

Further, in this embodiment, when the vibration effect is executed at the timing T2 when the reach is established, the push button 31B is always vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit rainbow-colored vibration effect. It is definitely notified that the display result will be a "big hit".

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation that the vibration effect is executed at the timing T2 when the reach is established, not at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Then, when the vibration effect is not actually executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the expectation that the vibration effect is executed at the timing T2 when the reach is established can be further increased.

As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to change the expectation that the vibration effect is executed in a complicated manner as the variable display of the decorative pattern progresses.

Further, the probability that the vibration effect of the mode in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit rainbow colors is sufficiently low as compared with the probability that the vibration effect of the other mode is executed. By prescribing it, it is possible to enhance the interest when it is definitely notified that the display result will be a "big hit".

Further, in this embodiment, when the push button 31B is vibrated as a vibration effect, the push button 31B is always made to emit light.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to visually recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating, and it is possible to increase the chance of recognizing that the push button 31B is vibrating.

Returning to the description of FIG. 11-3, after that, according to the determination result of step 10SHS2, the effect control CPU 120 performs the timing T3 during the normal reach reach effect and the super reach reach effect in the variable display this time. It is determined whether or not to execute the vibration effect at any of the timing T4 during execution (step 10SHS3).

Then, when the vibration effect is executed at any of the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed and the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed (step 10SHS3; Yes), the effect is produced. The control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect (step 10SHS4). The line-of-sight guidance effect is an effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the push button 31B. In the process of step 10SHS4, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect by a random number value and a lottery using a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121. In the table referred to in the process of step 10SHS4, the determination ratio of the presence / absence of the line-of-sight guidance effect is set regardless of which mode of the vibration effect is executed. That is, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of the line-of-sight guidance effect at the same ratio regardless of which mode the vibration effect is.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the vibration effect is executed at any of the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed and the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed. In addition, it is possible to perform a line-of-sight guidance effect.

According to such a configuration, the push button 31B can be focused on before the vibration effect is executed, so that the interest of the vibration effect can be sufficiently enhanced.

On the other hand, when the vibration effect is executed at any of the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and the timing T2 at which the reach is established, the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed.

Here, when the display result is derived and displayed, the relief effect may be executed after the display result of "off" is displayed, and the true display result may be derived and displayed. Therefore, when the display result of the previous variable display is derived and displayed and the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started even though the variable display of this time is started, There is a possibility of giving a misunderstanding as if the relief effect was executed in the previous variable display. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, it is possible to prevent such a misunderstanding.

Further, if the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed at the timing T2 when the reach is established, it may not be possible to properly recognize that the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol has become the predetermined reach mode. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the timing T2 when the reach is established, it is possible to appropriately recognize that the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol has become the predetermined reach mode. ..

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 11-3, when the vibration effect is not executed at any of the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed and the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed ( After executing the process of step 10SHS3; No) or step 10SHS4, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute other effects such as reach effect, the mode of the effect to be executed, and the like (step 10SHS5). Specifically, the presence or absence of execution of various effects such as advance notice effects and the mode thereof are determined by lottery. At this time, by making the decision ratio in the lottery different according to the display result of this time, the fluctuation pattern of this time, etc., the jackpot reliability is made different depending on whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and its mode. Further, when the current pattern specifies the reach, it is determined that the reach effect specified by the fluctuation pattern is executed.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the start timing of the effect determined to be executed (10SHS6). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer value corresponding to the special figure variation time corresponding to the current variation pattern as an initial value in the effect control process timer, and the type and mode of the effect determined to be executed. The effect specific data that specifies the effect and the execution timing specific timer value that indicates the effect execution timing by comparing with the timer value of the effect control process timer are stored in the timer value storage area of the RAM 122 in association with each other. When there are a plurality of effects determined to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect specific data and the execution timing specific timer value in the timer value storage area for each effect.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 supplies the display control unit 123 with an instruction to start execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol that derives the determined final stop symbol and the mode specified by the variation pattern this time (10SHS7). Upon receiving the instruction, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern. At this time, the display of the variable display compatible display may be updated.

After that, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "2" (step 10SHS8), the variable display start setting process ends.

(Execution timing and production period of vibration production and line-of-sight guidance production)
FIG. 11-5 is a diagram showing an example of the execution timing and the effect period of the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect. As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect at any of the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and the timing T2 at which the reach is established. Further, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at any of the timing T3 during the normal reach reach effect and the timing T4 during the super reach reach effect. It is possible.

Further, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at any of the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed and the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed. In that case, the line-of-sight guidance effect can be executed before that.

When the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment executes the line-of-sight guidance effect before executing the vibration effect at the timing T3 during the normal reach reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 starts the line-of-sight guidance effect 4 seconds before the timing T3. , When the timing T3 is reached, the vibration effect is started. Similarly, when the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment executes the line-of-sight guidance effect before executing the vibration effect at the timing T4 during which the reach effect of the super reach is being executed, the line-of-sight guidance is performed 4 seconds before the timing T4. The production is started, and the vibration production is started when the timing T4 is reached. The production period of the line-of-sight guidance effect of this embodiment is 5 seconds. Therefore, the vibration effect is executed while the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed for the first second.

According to such a configuration, a sense of unity between the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect is generated, so that the effect can be enhanced.

(Example of production operation)
11-6 and 11-7 are diagrams showing an example of the production operation of the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect. In this effect operation example, an example in which the vibration effect is executed at the timing T4 during which the reach effect of the super reach is being executed will be described.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute a plurality of types of super reach reach effects. The effect control CPU 120 displays a background image corresponding to the type of super reach in the reach effect of super reach. In this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (A), the background image 10SHY of the "mountain landscape" is displayed as the background image corresponding to the type of super reach.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 starts the reach effect of the super reach, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed when the reach is established is reduced and displayed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (A), the "left" reach decorative symbol 10SH5L is a reduced version of the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L when the reach is established. And, when the reach is established, the "right" reach decorative symbol 10SH5R, which is a reduced version of the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R, is displayed.

Further, in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, a small symbol display area 10SHK smaller than the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" is provided. In the small symbol display area 10SHK, the variable display of the small symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol. The effect image showing a small pattern is also called a broadcast information image. Therefore, in the small symbol display area 10SHK provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect image showing the small symbol to be the broadcast information image is variably displayed, and the effect image showing the confirmed small symbol to be the display result is displayed. Derived.

In this way, on the screen of the image display device 5, a variable display of a small symbol different from the decorative symbol is performed. During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation of the final decorative symbol that is the display result, the variable display of the small symbol is continuously performed in a certain display mode, and disappears from the screen or is obstructed. It is not shielded by. Therefore, the small symbol display area 10SHK is configured to be always visible, and the player can always visually recognize the variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 10SHK. The small symbol that is variably displayed in the small symbol display area 10SHK is also referred to as a constant small symbol or a small symbol for directing. In the small symbol display area 10SHK, for example, a plurality of decorative symbols that can be identified in a display mode in which a part or all of the decorative symbols are common to each of the plurality of types of decorative symbols, such as a symbol that indicates a number as well as a part that indicates a number in the decorative symbol. An effect image showing a type of small symbol may be variably displayed as a broadcast information image. The small symbol may be displayed only when the decorative symbol is hidden. For example, after the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in the reach mode, the variable display of the small symbol is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11-6 (A) instead of the variable display of the decorative symbol. It may be displayed in the lower left corner of.

A special symbol, a decorative symbol, and a fourth symbol following the normal symbol are provided, and the variable display of the fourth symbol may be performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol. In the variable display of the fourth symbol, for example, in the fourth symbol display area provided on or outside the screen of the image display device 5, display and non-display are repeated at regular time intervals with a specific display color. It is realized by continuing the display control. However, when compared with the display result in the variable display of the fourth symbol, the display result in the variable display of the small symbol may be displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to recognize.

Further, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are different from the display screen of the image display device 5, such as the right side of the gaming area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. 11-1. Is provided at a remote position. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player paying attention to the effect of the display on the image display device 5 to check the display state on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the variable display of the special symbol progresses. It may be difficult to recognize whether or not the display result is inside and whether or not the display result is derived. On the other hand, by performing variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 10SHK provided on the screen of the image display device 5 and deriving the display result, whether or not the variable display is in progress is determined. Whether or not the display result is derived can be displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to recognize.

Further, in this example, the hold display area 10SHH for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is held, and the active display area 10SH for displaying the active display corresponding to the variable display during execution. , Is displayed. When the reach effect of the super reach is being executed, the hold display area 10SHH and the active display area 10SH may not be displayed.

Further, a hold number display area 10SHHS is provided in the left corner of the screen of the image display device 5. In the hold number display area 10SHHS, as in the hold display area 10SHH, the hold number of the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special figure game is identifiablely displayed. The display mode is a mode in which arithmetic numbers are displayed.

Then, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the line-of-sight guidance effect 4 seconds before the timing T4 during which the reach effect of the super reach is being executed. The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, an effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the push button 31B by using a visual effect as the line-of-sight guidance effect.

In this example, the effect control CPU 120 first displays a character image 10SHC imitating a character holding a hammer and a button image 10SHB imitating a push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (B). do.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-6 (B) to 11-6, the effect control CPU 120 changes the mode of the character image 10SHC so that the character swings up the hammer. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 uses the LEDs built in the game effect lamps 9L and 9R as shown in FIGS. 11-6 (B) to 11-6 (D) in accordance with the action of the character swinging up the hammer. Light the light so that the light spot moves from the inside to the outside.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 changes the mode of the character image 10SHC so that the character swings down the hammer as shown in FIGS. 11-7 (E) and 11-7 (F). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 uses the LEDs built in the game effect lamps 9L and 9R as shown in FIGS. 11-7 (E) and 11-7 (F) in accordance with the action of the character swinging down the hammer. Light the light so that the light spot moves from the outside to the inside.

After that, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (G), the effect control CPU 120 has a plurality of hammers that the character swings down hit the button image 10SHB and imitates a star from the button image 10SHB at the timing T4. The mode of various images is changed so that the effect image 10SHS of the "star" of the above is scattered. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (G), the effect control CPU 120 starts the vibration effect when the timing T4 is reached, vibrates the push button 31B, and is built in the push button 31B. The game effect lamps 9B and the game effect lamps 9L and 9R are turned on.

Then, one second after the timing T4, the effect control CPU 120 ends the line-of-sight guidance effect as shown in FIG. 11-7 (H). After that, when the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect elapses, the effect control CPU 120 ends the vibration effect, stops the vibration of the push button 31B, and has a game effect lamp built in the push button 31B. 9B and the game effect lamps 9L and 9R are turned off.

Here, the push button 31B is provided at a position away from the display screen of the image display device 5, such as below the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. 11-1. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player who is paying attention to the effect of the display on the image display device 5 to check the state of the push button 31B, and whether the push button 31B is vibrating or whether the push button 31B is lit. It may be difficult to recognize whether or not. On the other hand, by executing the line-of-sight guidance effect on the screen of the image display device 5 before the vibration effect is executed, the push button 31B can be focused on before the push button 31B vibrates, and the push button 31B can be pushed. The vibration of the button 31B can be suitably recognized, and the interest of the vibration effect can be sufficiently enhanced.

It should be noted that the priority of the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect is always set lower than that of the small symbol or the number of hold display. This priority setting can be realized by displaying the line-of-sight guidance effect on the layer on the back side of the layer that always displays the small symbol or the number of hold display among the plurality of layers.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (G), the effect image 10SHS of the "star" is displayed on the back side of the constant small symbol displayed in the small symbol display area 10SHK, and the line-of-sight guidance effect is produced. It can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of, always has a lower priority than the small symbol.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (G), the effect image 10SHS of "star" is displayed on the back side of the hold number display displayed in the hold number display area 10SHHS, and the line of sight. It can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of the guidance effect, has a lower priority than the hold number display.

On the other hand, the priority of the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect is set higher than that of the hold display, the active display, the background image, and the decorative pattern. This priority setting can be realized by displaying the line-of-sight guidance effect on the layer on the front side of the layer for displaying the background image or the decorative pattern among the plurality of layers.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 11-6 (B) to 11-7 (G), the character image 10SHC and the button image 10SHB are displayed on the front side of the background image 10SHY of the "mountain landscape". It can be said that the character image 10SHC and the button image 10SHB, which are the displays of the line-of-sight guidance effect, have higher priority than the background image 10SHY of the "mountain scenery".

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (D), the hammer of the character image 10SHC is displayed on the front side of the "left" reach decorative symbol 10SH5L and the "right" reach decorative symbol 10SH5R. It can be said that the character image 10SHC, which is a display of the line-of-sight guidance effect, has a higher priority than the "left" reach decorative symbol 10SH5L and the "right" reach decorative symbol 10SH5R.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (D), the effect image 10SHS of the "star" is displayed on the front side of the "left" reach decorative symbol 10SH5L and the "right" reach decorative symbol 10SH5R. Therefore, it can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect, has a higher priority than the reach decorative symbol 10SH5L of the "left" and the reach decorative symbol 10SH5R of the "right".

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (G), the effect image 10SHS of "star" is displayed on the front side of the hold display displayed in the hold display area 10SHH, and the line-of-sight guidance effect is produced. It can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of, has a higher priority than the hold display.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (G), the effect image 10SHS of the "star" is displayed on the front side of the active display displayed in the active display area 10SHA, and the line-of-sight guidance effect is produced. It can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of, has a higher priority than the active display.

According to such a configuration, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed, the visibility of the line-of-sight guidance effect can be made conspicuous while the visibility of the small symbol and the number of holdings display is suitably ensured at all times.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 11-6 (B) to 11-7 (G), when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed, the line-of-sight guidance effect is displayed and the line-of-sight guidance effect is displayed. The high-priority constant small symbols and the number of pending displays are displayed brightly, and the other displays are displayed darkly.

According to such a configuration, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed, the visibility of the line-of-sight guidance effect can be made more conspicuous while ensuring the visibility of the small symbol and the holding number display at all times. ..

(Modification example of feature part 10SH)
The invention according to the feature portion 10SH is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

For example, in the table referred to in the process of step 10SHS4 of FIG. 11-3, the determination ratio of the presence / absence of the line-of-sight guidance effect may be set according to which mode of the vibration effect is executed. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 is either a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit white light, or the push button 31B is pressed for 3 seconds. Depending on whether the vibration effect is such that the push button 31B is vibrated over a period of 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits light in red, or the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in rainbow color. The presence or absence of the line-of-sight guidance effect may be determined at different ratios. Here, when the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit red light is executed, it is easy to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect. Further, when the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 3 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit light in rainbow colors is executed, the line-of-sight guidance effect is always executed. That is, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, the execution rate of the vibration effect having higher jackpot reliability is higher than when it is not executed. According to such a configuration, by executing the line-of-sight guidance effect, it is possible to improve the expectation that the vibration effect with higher jackpot reliability is executed.

The effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing a vibration effect linked with the advance notice effect. In this case, as the vibration effect linked with the notice effect, there are a plurality of types depending on the combination of the interlocking notice effect, the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect, and the emission color of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect. It may be possible to carry out the vibration effect of. Depending on the operation mode of the movable body 32, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the bonus effect advance notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution. Then, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect linked with the highly reliable character advance notice effect. This vibration effect is an effect of vibrating the push button 31B in synchronization with the operation of the movable body 32 and causing the push button 31B to emit white light. In this case, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect may be higher than the jackpot reliability of the interlocking accessory notice effect. According to such a configuration, the vibration effect can be used as a chance-up effect in the character advance notice effect.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing a vibration effect linked with other highly reliable advance notice effects. This vibration effect is an effect of vibrating the push button 31B in synchronization with the image displayed in the notice effect and causing the push button 31B to emit white light. In this case, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect may be higher than the jackpot reliability of the interlocking notice effect. According to such a configuration, the vibration effect can be used as an effect of increasing the chance in the advance notice effect.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, after the definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived, the gaming ball passes through a specific area provided in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as a specific passing gate or a winning opening. By doing so, the jackpot gaming state may be started. In that case, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a round lottery effect that notifies the maximum number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state when a game ball that has passed through a specific area is detected. Then, the effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing a vibration effect linked with the round lottery effect. This vibration effect is an effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit white light when the upper limit number of rounds is notified in the round lottery effect, and is executed in the jackpot game state. Notify that the maximum number of rounds to be played is not the minimum number of rounds among a plurality of options. Alternatively, as a vibration effect, when the upper limit number of rounds is notified in the round lottery effect, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit rainbow-colored effect, thereby performing a big hit. It may be definitively notified that the maximum number of rounds executed in the game state is the maximum number of rounds among the plurality of options. With such a configuration, it is possible to raise attention to the vibration effect linked with the round lottery effect.

The effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing error notification processing. In the error notification process, when an error command notifying that an error has occurred is received from the main board 11 or when an error is detected in the effect control board 12, error notification corresponding to the error is executed. In the error notification process, when an error is detected, a process of displaying the error notification image corresponding to the error on the image display device 5 and a process of outputting the error notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R may be executed. The effect control CPU 120 can display an error notification image corresponding to the error on the image display device 5 while executing the line-of-sight guidance effect. In that case, the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect may have a lower priority than the display of the error notification image. According to such a configuration, the visibility of the error notification image can be suitably ensured even if the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed when the error notification image is displayed.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed and when the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed. For example, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, if the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is set to be longer than when the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed, the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed and the vibration effect is executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the time. Further, for example, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed, if the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is set to be longer than when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, even if the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed. , It is easy to recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different between a timing before the reference timing and a timing after the reference timing with reference to a certain timing. For example, the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is set to 1.5 seconds at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol, which is the timing before the timing T2, is started with the timing T2 at which the reach is established as a reference. , The timing T3 during the normal reach reach production, which is the timing after the timing T2, and the timing T4 during the super reach reach production are set to 3 seconds. The vibration time at the timing after the reference timing may be longer than the vibration time at the timing before the timing. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of the vibration effect when the vibration effect is executed after the reference timing.

Depending on the strength of the vibration of the push button 31B, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect may be different. For example, there are a case where the push button 31B is vibrated with a first strength and a case where the push button 31B is vibrated with a second strength larger than the first strength, and the push button 31B is vibrated with the second strength. When making the push button 31B vibrate with the first strength, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect may be higher than when the push button 31B is vibrated. With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the strength of vibration when the push button 31B vibrates.

The execution pattern of the vibration effect and the reliability of the jackpot may be common to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first model and the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second model different from the first model. According to such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the variation in the execution pattern and the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executed in each of the first model pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second model pachinko gaming machine 1. , It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

The vibration effect may be executed as a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the chances of performing the vibration effect.

In addition to this, when the vibration effect is executed as the look-ahead notice effect, the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect is the first mode and the second mode. , The jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution, which is the target of the look-ahead notice, may be different. For example, when the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect is a mode in which the push button 31B vibrates continuously for a predetermined time and a mode in which the vibration is repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined time. Make the jackpot reliability different in the variable display before execution, which is the target of the look-ahead notice. According to such a configuration, it is possible to raise attention to the vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect.

Alternatively, when the vibration effect is executed as the look-ahead notice effect, the execution timing of the vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect is a plurality of times capable of executing the vibration effect as the notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution. It may be possible to execute only at any one of the timings of. For example, the vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect can be executed only at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at a timing different from the timing at which the vibration effect as the look-ahead notice can be executed, the vibration effect is announced as a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution. Can be suitably recognized as having been executed.

When the vibration effect as the look-ahead advance notice effect is executed at the timing when the vibration effect as the advance notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution is executed, the big hit reliability in the variable display during execution is announced. The vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the advance notice effect may be different from the vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the look-ahead advance notice effect. For example, when the vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect can be executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution. The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect is 1.5 seconds. Alternatively, the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution is set to a mode in which the push button 31B continuously vibrates for a predetermined time, and the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect. The vibration mode of the above is a mode in which the vibration is repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined time. According to such a configuration, any of the cases where the vibration effect as the look-ahead advance notice effect can be executed at the timing when the vibration effect as the advance notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution can be executed. It is possible to easily recognize whether the vibration effect has been executed.

When the first model pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second model pachinko gaming machine 1 different from the first model share the same vibration effect execution pattern and jackpot reliability, they are executed at specific timings. Even if the mode of the vibration effect executed by the first model pachinko game machine 1 and the mode of the vibration effect executed by the second model pachinko game machine 1 are different, it is a big hit. The reliability may be common. For example, regarding the vibration effect executed at the timing T2 when the reach is established, the light emitting mode of the push button 31B in the specific effect executed by the first model pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second model pachinko gaming machine 1 Even if the light emitting mode of the push button 31B in the executed vibration effect is different, the jackpot reliability is 100%. According to such a configuration, even if the models of the pachinko gaming machines 1 are different, it is possible to increase the expectation that the vibration effect is executed at a specific timing.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be adjusted so as to match the image of the effect executed at that time, for example, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed. For example, at the timing T2 when the reach is established, when the notification effect for notifying that the reach is established is executed, the push button 31B is vibrated while the video of the notification effect is displayed. According to such a configuration, even when the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed, a sense of unity between the vibration effect and the effect being executed at that time is generated, so that the effect can be enhanced.

When the first model of pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second model of pachinko gaming machine 1, which is different from the first model, share the same execution pattern of vibration effect and jackpot reliability, vibration of the same execution pattern Regarding the production, only the lower limit of the jackpot reliability may be guaranteed. According to such a configuration, for example, when the vibration effect is executed as an effect of increasing the chance of another effect, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect can be flexibly adjusted in relation to the jackpot reliability of the other effect. While making adjustments, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

The vibration effect may be executed at a timing different from the timings T1 to T4. For example, the effect control CPU 120 has higher jackpot reliability than the reach mode after the decorative symbol of a predetermined reach combination that is not the jackpot combination is temporarily stopped and displayed after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach mode. It is possible to carry out a fanning effect that encourages the development of a reach mode. After the fanning effect is executed, there are cases where the reach mode has a high jackpot reliability and the display result is "missing" without developing into a reach mode with a high jackpot reliability. When developing into a reach mode with high jackpot reliability, the effect control CPU 120 executes a fanning success effect notifying that the reach mode with high jackpot reliability is developed as a result of the effect of the fanning effect. On the other hand, if the display result is "off" without developing into a reach mode with high jackpot reliability, the effect control CPU 120 notifies that the effect result of the fanning effect does not develop into a reach mode with high jackpot reliability. Perform a fanning failure production. In executing such a fanning effect, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect at the timing of executing the fanning success effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest when the fanning success production is executed.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing of executing the fanning success effect may be adjusted so as to match the image of the fanning success effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest when the fanning success production is executed.

The emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing of executing the fanning success effect is the vibration of the execution pattern with the lowest jackpot reliability among the vibration effects of multiple types of execution patterns that can be executed at other timings. The push button 31B in the production may be the same emission color as the emission color. According to such a configuration, when the fanning success effect is executed, the display result may be "off" even if it develops into a reach mode with high jackpot reliability, but the jackpot reliability is excessively increased. It is possible to suppress the increase.

Further, when the display result is a "big hit", the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect at the timing immediately before the fixed decorative symbol, which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. According to such a configuration, not only the interest at the timing immediately before the final decoration symbol is stopped and displayed can be improved, but also the expectation for the vibration effect itself is increased, and the vibration effect is executed at other timings as well. It is possible to improve the interest of the time.

When the first model of pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second model of pachinko gaming machine 1 different from the first model share the same vibration effect execution pattern and jackpot reliability, it is advantageous to the player. The emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect can be "rainbow color" even when the jackpot type is different from the jackpot type with the highest advantage among the multiple types of jackpots with different characteristics. do. According to such a configuration, when the emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect becomes "rainbow color", it is not misunderstood as if it is the "big hit" of the big hit type having the highest advantage. Can be.

When there are only two types of advantages for the player depending on the type of jackpot, it is possible not to provide an execution pattern in which the emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is "rainbow color". According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the push button 31B from becoming a "big hit" of a big hit type, which has a low advantage for the player, even though the push button 31B emits light in a "rainbow color" in the vibration effect. It is possible to prevent the expectation for the vibration effect from being impaired.

The effect control CPU 120 may guide the player's line of sight to the push button 31B by utilizing the auditory effect as the line-of-sight guidance effect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a specific sound effect when the vibration effect is being executed, and then gradually changes the specific sound effect from a small volume to a loud volume as a line-of-sight guidance effect. Output to change. According to such a configuration, a player who has difficulty in recognizing a line-of-sight guidance effect using a visual effect can be focused on the operation means before the operation means vibrates.

In the case where the winning probability of the jackpot changes according to the set value, even if the vibration effect of the same execution pattern is used, the first set value and the second set value different from the first set value are used. The jackpot reliability of the vibration effect of the execution pattern may be different from that at a certain time. For example, even if the vibration effect of the same execution pattern is set, when the set value is "6", the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect of the execution pattern may be higher than when the set value is "1". .. According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed and the display result becomes a "big hit", it is possible to raise the expectation that the set value has a high degree of advantage.

When the jackpot winning probability changes according to the set value, the push button 31B in the vibration effect depends on the first set value and the second set value different from the first set value. The vibration time and emission color may be different. According to such a configuration, the set value can be suggested by the vibration effect. For example, when it is a set value of any one of "1" to "3" and when it is a set value of any one of "4" to "6", the push button 31B in the vibration effect It suffices if the vibration time and the emission color are different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not the vibration effect is a high setting that may be the setting value "6" that is most advantageous to the player. Further, for example, the vibration time and the emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different depending on whether the set value is an odd number or an even number. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not the set value is an even number that may be the set value "6" that is most advantageous to the player by the vibration effect.

Even at the timing T2 when the reach is established, the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit white light, and the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is red. It may be possible to carry out a vibration effect in a mode of emitting light. According to such a configuration, even at the timing T2 when the reach is established, it is possible to pay attention not only to the execution of the vibration effect but also to the mode when the vibration effect is executed.

Even at the timing T2 when the reach is established, the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit white light, and the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is red. When the vibration effect of the mode of emitting light is enabled, the vibration effect is executed at any of the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and the timing T2 at which the reach is established. It may happen. In that case, even if the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit rainbow colors is not executed at any of the timings T1 and T2, the vibration at the timing T1 is performed. When the combination of the effect execution pattern and the vibration effect execution pattern at the timing T2 becomes a specific combination, it may be definitively notified that the display result will be a "big hit". According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit rainbow colors. Even if the vibration effect is not executed, not only can the expectation that the vibration effect is executed at the timing T2 when the reach is established can be increased, but also the attention to the mode of the vibration effect at the timing T2 can be further increased. ..

The vibration effect may be executed at any of the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed and the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed. In that case, even if the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit rainbow colors is not executed at any of the timings T3 and T4, the vibration at the timing T3 is performed. When the combination of the effect execution pattern and the vibration effect execution pattern at the timing T4 is a specific combination, it may be definitively notified that the display result will be a "big hit". According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at the timing T3 during the normal reach reach effect, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit rainbow-colored vibration. Even if the effect is not executed, it is possible not only to raise the expectation that the vibration effect is executed at the timing T4 during which the reach effect of the super reach is being executed, but also to pay more attention to the mode of the vibration effect at the timing T4. Can be enhanced.

The vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect of deterministically notifying that the display result is a "big hit" is a vibration effect of not deterministically notifying that the display result is a "big hit". The vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the above may be different. For example, in a vibration effect in which the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect of deterministically notifying that the display result is a "big hit" is not deterministically notified that the display result is a "big hit". The vibration time is longer than the vibration time of the push button 31B. Alternatively, while the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect of the mode in which the display result is not definitively notified that the display result is the "big hit" is monotonous, the display result is definitively notified that the display result is the "big hit". In the vibration effect of the above mode, the push button 31B is vibrated in accordance with a predetermined time signature. According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the vibration effect in the mode of deterministically notifying that the display result is a "big hit" is a special vibration effect.

When the vibration effect is executed at the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed or at the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed, the line-of-sight guidance effect may be executed without fail. According to such a configuration, the expectation that the display result will be a "big hit" due to the execution of the reach effect is suitably increased by preferably recognizing the vibration of the operating means. be able to.

When the vibration effect is executed at any of the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and the timing T2 at which the reach is established, the timing T3 during the normal reach reach effect and The vibration effect may be executed at any of the timing T4 during which the reach effect of the super reach is being executed. In that case, the vibration time and emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect executed at timing T3 and timing T4 are lower than the vibration time and emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect executed at timing T1 and timing T2. In other words, the timing T3 so that the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executed at the timing T3 and the timing T4 does not fall below the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executed at the timing T1 and the timing T2. Or, the execution pattern of the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing T4 may be limited. For example, when the vibration effect of the execution pattern SE2 is executed at the timing T1, the vibration effect of the execution pattern SE5 is executed at the timing T3, and the vibration effect of the execution pattern SE8 is executed at the timing T4. To limit. According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed a plurality of times in one variable display, the credibility of the jackpot reliability can be prevented from being lowered.

When the vibration effect linked to the notice effect can be executed, the mode of the vibration effect linked to the notice effect and the mode of the vibration effect not linked to the notice effect may be different. For example, in the vibration effect linked to the notice effect, the push button 31B is vibrated according to the beat of the music played in the interlocking notice effect. Further, for example, in the vibration effect linked to the character advance notice effect, the push button 31B is vibrated according to the sound effect when the character is operating. Further, for example, in the vibration effect linked to the notice effect, the push button 31B is made to emit light in a color different from the emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect not linked to the notice effect. According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed, it is possible to easily recognize whether the vibration effect is linked to the notice effect or not linked to the notice effect. ..

The present box production may be made feasible. In that case, when the present box is opened, a character having a hammer as shown in FIG. 11-6 (B) may pop out from the opened present box, and the line-of-sight guidance effect may be executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to raise the expectation that the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed and the vibration effect is executed due to the execution of the present box effect.

When the operation effect for operating the push button 31B can be executed, in this operation effect, in order to notify that the operation of the push button 31B is effective during the operation valid period in which the operation of the push button 31B is effective, The push button 31B may be turned on. In that case, the push button 31B in the vibration effect is turned on in a manner different from the lighting mode. For example, when the push button 31B is lit in the vibration effect, the lighting mode may be controlled so that the push button 31B is continuously lit in red for 3 seconds to vibrate the push button 31B. .. On the other hand, when the push button 31B is turned on in the operation effect, the push button 31B is switched between red light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (off) every 150 milliseconds during the operation valid period. It may be controlled so that the lighting mode is for suggestion. According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably notify that the operation of the push button 31B is effective. The operation lever of the stick controller 31A may be turned on in order to notify that the operation of the operation lever is effective during the lever operation effective period in which the operation of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A is effective. In this case, the lighting mode may be controlled so that the operating lever of the stick controller 31A emits light during the lever operation valid period to suggest lever operation. The lighting mode for suggesting lever operation may be the same lighting mode as the lighting mode for suggesting button operation, or may be a lighting mode different from the lighting mode for suggesting button operation.

For example, when the special figure game or the like is not executed, the push button 31B or the like is operated by the player, for example, the volume setting of the effect to be executed, the setting of the type of the output music or background, and the image display. Settings related to the effect, such as the brightness setting of the device 5, the brightness setting of various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9, and the like, may be changed. For example, it may be possible to select which effect setting to change from the menu screen, or a different operation is performed according to the change item desired by the player, and the setting corresponding to the operation is changed. You may do so. Further, the push button 31B may be turned on in order to notify that the setting related to the effect can be changed when the special figure game or the like is not executed. In that case, the push button 31B in the vibration effect is turned on, and the push button 31B in the operation effect is turned on in a mode different from the lighting mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably notify that the setting related to the effect can be changed.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 10SH)
In relation to the feature unit 10SH, there has been proposed a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and that can perform a vibration effect in which the operating means that can be operated by the player vibrates (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-051075 (see).

Generally, a player plays a game while looking at a display means on which a variable display or various effects are displayed. Therefore, when the operating means is not in the player's field of view, it may not be possible to recognize that the operating means is vibrating even if the vibration effect is executed. In that case, it is not possible to sufficiently enhance the interest of the vibration effect.

Therefore, in order to draw attention to the gaming means before the vibration effect is executed and sufficiently enhance the interest of the vibration effect, the gaming machine of the means 1 according to the feature portion 10SH can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player. It is a machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player, etc.), and an operating means that can be operated by the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a player. Is provided with a push button 31B capable of performing a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like), a vibration effect executing means capable of executing a vibration effect in which the operating means vibrates (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a push button 31B). The line-of-sight guidance effect executing means that can execute the line-of-sight guidance effect that guides the player's line of sight to the operating means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a player's It is possible to execute a line-of-sight guidance effect that guides the line of sight to the push button 31B, etc.), and the vibration effect is controlled to the advantageous state when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed. (For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot reliability is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed), and the vibration effect executing means is , The vibration effect can be executed at the first timing and the second timing after the first timing (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. , Timing T2 where reach is established, timing T3 during execution of normal reach reach effect and timing during execution of super reach reach effect after timing T1 and timing T2. The vibration effect can be executed at any of the timings of T4 and the like), regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, the vibration effect is produced in a common manner. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 is at any timing of timing T1 and timing T2, or at any timing of timing T3 and timing T4. However, the vibration effect can be executed in a manner in which the vibration time of the push button 31B and the emission color are common), and the line-of-sight guidance effect executing means does not execute the line-of-sight guidance effect at the first timing ( For example, production control The CPU 120 can execute the line-of-sight guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing (for example, for effect control). The CPU 120 is characterized in that the line-of-sight guidance effect can be executed before the vibration effect is executed at the timing T3 and the timing T4).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the operating means before the vibration effect is executed, and to sufficiently enhance the interest of the vibration effect.

The gaming machine of the means 2 according to the feature unit 10SH is the gaming machine of the means 1, and the vibration effect executing means can execute the vibration effect when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed (for example, effect control). The CPU 120 may perform the vibration effect while the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed).

According to such a configuration, a sense of unity between the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect is generated, so that the effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of the means 3 according to the feature unit 10SH is a specific effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific effect different from the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect in the game machine of the means 1 or the means 2. , The reach effect of super reach can be executed, etc.), and the vibration effect executing means can execute the vibration effect when the specific effect is being executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120). Is able to execute the vibration effect while the reach effect of the super reach is being executed).

According to such a configuration, the vibration effect may be executed when the specific effect is executed, so that the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 4 according to the feature unit 10SH is a display means for displaying in any of the gaming machines of the means 1 to the means 3 (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is an image display device 5 for displaying various effect images. The display of the line-of-sight guidance effect has a lower priority than the display of predetermined information and has a higher priority than the display of information different from the predetermined information (for example, an effect image of the line-of-sight guidance effect). Is always lower in priority than small symbols, hold number display, various error notifications, hold display, active display, background image, higher priority than decorative symbols, etc.).

According to such a configuration, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed, the visibility of the line-of-sight guidance effect can be made conspicuous while suitably ensuring the visibility of predetermined information.

The gaming machine of the means 5 according to the feature unit 10SH is any of the gaming machines of the means 1 to the means 4, and the vibration effect executing means has the vibration effect of the first aspect and the advantageous state over the first aspect. It is possible to execute the vibration effect of the second aspect, which suggests that the degree of expectation to be controlled is high (for example, the effect control CPU 120 vibrates the push button 31B for 1.5 seconds and push button 31B. It is possible to execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B emits light in white and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits light in red, and the push button 31B is caused to emit light for 1.5 seconds. When the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 3 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit red light is executed, as compared with the case of executing the vibration effect of vibrating and causing the push button 31B to emit light in white. When the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, the vibration effect of the second aspect is easier to execute than the vibration effect of the first aspect (for example, pachinko game). In the machine 1, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds rather than the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit white light. At the same time, it may be easier to perform a vibration effect in which the push button 31B emits light in red).

According to such a configuration, by executing the line-of-sight guidance effect, it is possible to improve the expectation that the vibration effect of the second aspect is executed.

(Explanation related to the association of feature parts)
Each configuration according to the feature portion 10SH may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions.

(Explanation of feature parts 48AK to 50AK)
FIG. 12-1 shows a configuration example of the effect device related to the feature portions 48AK to 50AK. In this configuration example, a movable body 32 for effect, which is a movable effect device, is provided in front of the lower end, which is a lower edge portion on the front side that overlaps with the display screen of the image display device 5. The movable body 32 may be connected to the operating motor via, for example, a link mechanism. By transmitting the power from the operation motor, the movable body 32 can be changed to an initial position and a position different from the initial position on the front side of the image display device 5. The movable body 32 may be capable of changing its position by power from, for example, a solenoid for operation or other general actuator.

The movable body 32 includes a frame portion and a window portion. The frame portion of the movable body 32 is configured by using a decorative member, and has a configuration capable of covering the display screen of the image display device 5 so that the player cannot see it. The window portion of the movable body 32 is formed by using transparent glass or synthetic resin or as a simple opening, and has a structure capable of being seen through so that the player can visually recognize the display screen of the image display device 5. ing.

The game effect lamp 9 may include a plurality of LEDs constituting the upper frame lamp 9C, a plurality of LEDs constituting the left frame lamp 9M, and a plurality of LEDs constituting the right frame lamp 9N. The upper frame lamp 9C is provided at a predetermined position above the gaming area in the gaming machine frame 3. The left frame lamp 9M is provided at a predetermined position on the left side of the gaming area in the gaming machine frame 3. The right frame lamp 9N is provided at a predetermined position on the right side of the gaming area in the gaming machine frame 3.

The game effect lamp 9 may include a plurality of LEDs constituting the lever lamp 9B1 and a plurality of LEDs constituting the button lamp 9B2. The lever lamp 9B1 is composed of a plurality of LEDs built in the operation rod (operation lever) of the stick controller 31A. The button lamp 9B2 is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided inside the push button 31B. The operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be partially or wholly formed of a translucent member. As a result, the operating lever of the stick controller 31A can be made to emit light by turning on the lever lamp 9B1. Further, when the button lamp 9B2 is turned on, the push button 31B can be made to emit light.

For example, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are integrally formed, and the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be vibrated by driving the vibration motor 131. The vibration motor 131 may be provided inside or at a position close to the push button 31B, may be built in the operation lever of the stick controller 31A, or may be provided at the root position of the operation lever. In order to diversify the vibration modes of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A, a plurality of vibration motors 131 may be provided.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, as a suggestion effect suggesting that the variable display result becomes a "big hit" at a predetermined ratio and is controlled to the big hit game state, it is possible to execute an operation unit effect including a light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect. In the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate in a vibration mode according to the vibration pattern by driving the vibration motor 131. In the light emitting effect included in the operation unit effect, the operating lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light by lighting the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. In the light emitting effect included in the operation unit effect, one of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 is lit to cause one of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light in accordance with the vibration effect. May be good. For example, by lighting only the button lamp 9B2, only the push button 31B may be made to emit light in accordance with the vibration effect.

FIG. 12-2 (A) shows a setting example of the operation unit effect pattern used to execute the operation unit effect. In this setting example, as a plurality of operation unit effect patterns, operation unit effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03, AKC11 to ACK13, AKC21, AKC22, AKC31, AKC32, and AKC41 are prepared in advance. The emission color, vibration pattern, jackpot reliability, and application are set according to each operation unit effect pattern. The emission color corresponding to the operation unit effect pattern indicates a light emission mode when the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light in the light emission effect included in the operation unit effect. The vibration pattern corresponding to the operation unit effect pattern indicates a vibration mode when the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate in the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect. The jackpot reliability corresponding to the operation unit effect pattern indicates the rate at which the variable display result becomes "big hit" and is controlled to the jackpot game state when the operation unit effect corresponding to the operation unit effect pattern is executed. Applications corresponding to the operation unit effect pattern indicate the timing at which the operation unit effect is executed for each operation unit effect pattern.

The operation unit effect can be executed at a plurality of timings accompanying the progress of the variable display, for example, when the pre-variation starts, when the target variation starts, when the reach is established, when the reach develops, and when the hit / miss notification is agitated. The start of the pre-variation is the timing corresponding to the start of the variable display executed before the variable display that is the target of the suggestion by the operation unit effect. The start of the target variation is the timing corresponding to the start of the variable display that is the target of the suggestion by the operation unit effect. When the reach is established, it is the timing corresponding to the case where the variable display is in the reach mode. The reach development is the timing corresponding to the case where the development production is executed along with the reach production of the super reach. The development effect is an effect that notifies that the reach effect of the super reach is executed (development of the reach) after the reach effect of the normal reach is executed. The hit / miss notification fanning is the timing corresponding to the fanning effect prior to the hit / miss notification effect that notifies whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" while the reach effect of the super reach is being executed.

In the setting example shown in FIG. 12-2 (A), a plurality of operation unit effect patterns that can be used to execute the operation unit effect according to a plurality of timings are prepared in advance. In addition, different operation unit effect patterns are set to be usable according to a plurality of timings at which the operation unit effect can be executed.

When the reach effect of the super reach is executed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when only the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and the reach effect of the super reach is not executed. Depending on whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is executed and the definite decorative symbol of the jackpot combination is derived, it is possible to notify whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled. As the reach effect of the super reach, for example, a plurality of reach effects including the SP reach A may be prepared in advance. Each reach effect may include an effect in which the effect modes are different from each other. Each reach effect may include an effect having a common effect mode to each other. The decision rate when the variable display result is "big hit" and the decision rate when the variable display result is not "big hit" are set so that the jackpot reliability according to each reach effect is obtained. Just do it. Depending on the variation pattern determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table using the random value for determining the variation pattern, the presence / absence of the reach effect, the presence / absence of the reach effect of the super reach, the effect mode in the reach effect, etc. It should be possible to set.

The operation unit effect is executed at a predetermined ratio according to whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit", regardless of the specific effect that can be executed according to the progress of the game including the variable display, such as the reach effect. It is possible to determine the presence or absence of. An operation unit effect that can be executed regardless of such a specific effect is also referred to as a single operation unit effect. On the other hand, there is a case where the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are made to emit light or vibrate in accordance with the specific effect. The effect of light emission or vibration associated with such a specific effect is also called a specific interlocking effect.

FIG. 12-2 (B) shows a setting example when executing the specific interlocking effect. In this setting example, when a specific interlocking effect is executed along with a plurality of specific effects such as movable body movement, image display, music reproduction, big hit confirmation notification, big hit type lottery CH1 and CH2 in the reach effect of SP reach A. The emission color and vibration pattern are set. The emission color in the specific effect is set according to the content of the specific effect, and it is sufficient that the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can emit light as a part of the specific effect. The vibration pattern in the specific interlocking effect is set according to the content of the specific effect, and it is sufficient that the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can be vibrated as a part of the specific effect. As described above, since the specific interlocking effect can be executed as a part of the specific effect, the jackpot reliability is the same as that of the specific effect, and the original jackpot reliability is not set. The vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in the specific interlocking effect is included in the special vibration effect that can be executed with the execution of the specific effect. The light emission of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B in the specific interlocking effect is included in the specific light emitting effect that can be executed with the execution of the specific effect.

The reach effect of SP reach A may be, for example, a jackpot reliability of about 40%. The jackpot type lottery CH1 may be a lottery effect that can be executed when the jackpot type is different from the first jackpot type in which the number of rounds is the minimum (for example, 4 rounds). The jackpot type lottery CH2 may be a lottery effect that can be executed when the number of rounds is the maximum (for example, 16 rounds) of the second jackpot type. The jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 may be a lottery effect related to the jackpot type according to the presence / absence of time saving control and probability variation control after the end of the jackpot game state and the end condition, and the jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 are notified in advance in the jackpot game state. It may be a lottery effect regarding the presence or absence of rank up and the amount of increase, which is the number of rounds increased from the number of rounds. As the jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2, when it becomes possible to control the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state based on the game ball that has won the V winning opening in the V winning attacker, the opening presence / absence and opening time of the V winning attacker , The number of times of opening, the end condition of the probability variation control, and the like, it may be possible to execute the lottery effect regarding the jackpot game state having different advantages. When it becomes possible to control from the small hit game state to the big hit game state based on the occurrence of the V prize due to the game ball entering the V prize attacker, the opening presence / absence, the opening time, the number of times of opening, or the opening number of the V winning attacker, or It may be possible to execute a lottery effect relating to a small hit game state or a big hit game state having different advantages depending on the number of rounds of the big hit game state controlled after the occurrence of the V winning.

Until the game state in which the V-winning attacker can be released is started, the vibration weak monitoring state is controlled, and then the V by the game ball entering the V-winning attacker from the start of the game state in which the V-winning attacker can be released. In the period until the winning is generated, the vibration strong monitoring state may be controlled, and the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be controlled so as not to vibrate. Then, when the V prize is generated, the vibration weak monitoring state is controlled, and the effect including the vibration of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B may be executed. The strong vibration monitoring state is a state in which a vibration error is easily detected, and the weak vibration monitoring state is a state in which it is more difficult to detect a vibration error than the strong vibration monitoring state. During the period when there is a high risk of fraud due to the player generating vibration, the vibration strength monitoring state is controlled. On the other hand, during a period in which there is little risk of fraud due to the player generating vibration, the vibration weak monitoring state is controlled. When a vibration error is detected, the alarm image is displayed, the alarm sound is output, the alarm lamp is lit, the alarm signal is output, or a part or a combination of all of them is controlled by the control of the effect control CPU 120. It suffices if the control for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality can be executed. When a vibration error is detected, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be stopped by controlling the CPU 103 in the gaming control microcomputer 100. As a result, it is possible to appropriately monitor the vibration and suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the notification of the vibration error due to the inappropriate abnormality determination or the stop state of the game.

FIG. 12-3 shows the setting contents of the vibration pattern. A plurality of vibration patterns are prepared in advance according to the vibration modes of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. FIG. 12-3 (A) shows vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03, AKV11, AKV12, AKV21, AKV22, and AKV31 used to execute the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect. FIG. 12-3 (B) shows vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 used to execute the special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect.

The vibration pattern AKV01 has a vibration mode in which the on period and the off period are alternately repeated three times every 300 milliseconds. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01 that can be executed at the start of the pre-variation. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from the start of the pre-variation. In the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes white.

The vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the on period continues for 1500 milliseconds. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC02 and AKC03 that can be executed at the start of the pre-variation. Further, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC11 that can be executed at the start of the target variation. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from the start of the pre-variation or the start of the target variation. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by AKC02, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes red. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by AKC03, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes rainbow color. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by the AKC11, the emission color in the light emission effect that causes the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes white.

The vibration pattern AKV03 is a vibration mode in which the on period continues for 3000 milliseconds. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC12 and AKC13 that can be executed at the start of the target variation. On the other hand, the operation unit effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from the start of the target variation. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by the AKC12, the emission color in the light emission effect that causes the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes red. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by the AKC13, the emission color in the light emission effect that causes the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes rainbow color.

In the vibration pattern AKV11, the vibration mode is set to the on-period vibration according to the effect AKR1 when the reach is established. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV11 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC21 that can be executed when the reach is established. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV11 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from that when the reach is established. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by the AKC21, the light emission color in the light emission effect that causes the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes pink.

In the vibration pattern AKV12, the vibration mode is set to the on-period vibration according to the effect AKR2 when the reach is established. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV12 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC22 that can be executed when the reach is established. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV12 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from that when the reach is established. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by the AKC22, the light emission color in the light emission effect that causes the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes orange.

As the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach is established, the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from that when the reach is established and the effect using a common vibration pattern may be executed. For example, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC21 that can be executed when the reach is established, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 may be executed. Further, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC22 that can be executed when the reach is established, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 may be able to be executed. In these cases, there will be a case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common between the operation unit effect executed when the reach is established and the operation unit effect executed at the start of the pre-variation or the start of the target variation. .. As described above, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the control load of the effect and the increase of the control data may be prevented by having the same vibration mode of the vibration effect.

The vibration pattern AKV21 has an on-period vibration mode that matches the effect AKS1 at the time of reach development. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV21 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC31 that can be executed at the time of reach development. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV21 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from that at the time of reach development. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by the AKC31, the emission color in the light emission effect that causes the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes white.

In the vibration pattern AKV22, the vibration mode during the on-period is set in accordance with the effect AKS2 at the time of reach development. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV22 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC32 that can be executed at the time of reach development. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV22 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from that at the time of reach development. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by the AKC32, the emission color in the light emission effect that causes the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B to emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes white.

As the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect at the time of reach development, the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from that at the time of reach development and the effect with a common vibration pattern may be executed. For example, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC31 that can be executed at the time of reach development, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 may be executed. Further, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC32 that can be executed at the time of reach development, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 may be able to be executed. In these cases, there will be a case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common between the operation unit effect executed at the time of reach development and the operation unit effect executed at the start of the pre-variation or the start of the target variation. .. As described above, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the control load of the effect and the increase of the control data may be prevented by having the same vibration mode of the vibration effect.

The vibration pattern AKV31 is a vibration mode in which the on period continues for 1500 milliseconds or more. For example, after the on-period continues for 1500 milliseconds, the vibration mode in which the on-period continues until the movement of the player who operates the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is detected in the effective detection period. It should be. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC41 that can be executed at the time of the hit / miss notification. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from that at the time of the hit / fail notification. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by the AKC41, the light emission color in the light emission effect that causes the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B to emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes gold.

When the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31 is executed, whether or not the effective detection period is provided may be different depending on the type of effect executed with the variable display, for example, the type of reach effect. good. When an effective detection period is provided, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are switched between golden light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (off) every 150 milliseconds. You may control it. If the effective detection period is not provided, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B may be controlled so as to emit light continuously in gold for a period of vibration. On the other hand, when an effective detection period is provided, it is suggested that the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B be switched between light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (off) of red, which is different from gold, every 150 milliseconds. It may be controlled so as to have a light emitting mode for the above. By executing the light emission effect of the light emission mode that switches between light emission and non-light emission every 150 milliseconds, it is effective to operate the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A while executing the vibration effect. , Can be suggested to the player. Alternatively, a plurality of lamp layers in which lamp control data can be set may be used, and the priority of light emission control may be different. For example, in the first lamp layer, as a light emitting mode for suggesting a normal operation, a light emitting mode in which the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are switched between red light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (off) every 150 milliseconds. Set the lamp control data. Lamp control data is set in the second lamp layer as a light emitting mode for suggesting a special operation so that the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A continuously emit gold light over an effective detection period of 5000 milliseconds. do. Then, the light emission control of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the lamp control data set in the second lamp layer is more than the light emission control of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the lamp control data set in the first lamp layer. Priority is given to execution. As a result, the light emitting mode for special operation suggestion may be controlled to preferentially become the light emitting mode for the light emitting effect rather than the light emitting mode for normal operation suggestion.

The plurality of reach effects that serve as super reach may include a strong SP reach having a relatively high jackpot reliability and a weak SP reach having a relatively low jackpot reliability. In the reach effect of the strong SP reach, the hit / fail notification effect is executed after the motion detection effect is executed by detecting the movement of the player which is the operation for the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. When the vibration effect corresponding to the reach effect of such a strong SP reach is executed, it is turned on until the player's operation to be operated on the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is detected during the effective detection period. The vibration mode may be such that the period continues. In the reach effect of the weak SP reach, the hit / fail notification effect is executed without executing the motion detection effect. When the vibration effect corresponding to the reach effect of such a weak SP reach is executed, the vibration mode may be set according to the vibration pattern AKV31 1500 milliseconds or more before the hit / fail notification effect. It should be noted that there may be cases where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different between the operation unit effect when the reach effect of the strong SP reach is executed and the operation effect when the reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed. For example, as a vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach effect of strong SP reach is executed, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are continuously vibrated for 5000 milliseconds, which is an effective detection period. It may be controlled to the vibration mode which becomes the period. Alternatively, as a vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach effect of strong SP reach is executed, the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is vibrated every 150 milliseconds during the effective detection period. The vibration mode may be controlled by switching between a period and an off period during which vibration is not performed. On the other hand, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed, the on period is such that the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are continuously vibrated for 2000 milliseconds. It may be controlled according to the vibration mode. A case may be provided in which the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different between the operation unit effect when the reach effect of the strong SP reach is executed and the operation effect when the reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed. For example, as a light emitting effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach effect of strong SP reach is executed, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A emit gold light every 150 milliseconds during the effective detection period. It may be controlled so that the light emitting mode is switched between (lighting) and non-light emitting (extinguishing). On the other hand, as a light emitting effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed, the stick controller 31A continuously vibrates the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A for 2000 milliseconds. The operation lever and the push button 31B may be controlled so as to emit light in gold.

The vibration pattern AKV41 is an on-period vibration mode linked to the movement of the movable body in the reach effect of the SP reach A. The vibration pattern AKV42 is an on-period vibration mode linked to the screen display in the reach effect of SP reach A. The vibration pattern AKV43 is an on-period vibration mode linked to music reproduction in the reach production of SP reach A. The vibration pattern AKV44 is a vibration mode in which the on period continues for 3000 milliseconds or more.

The vibration by the vibration pattern AKV41 is a special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect executed together with the movement of the movable body in the reach effect of the SP reach A. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the movement of the movable body in the reach effect of the SP reach A, the emission color in the specific light emission effect becomes blue due to the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. The vibration by the vibration pattern AKV42 is a special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect executed together with the image display in the reach effect of the SP reach A. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the image display in the reach effect of the SP reach A, the emission color in the specific light emission effect becomes gold due to the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. The vibration by the vibration pattern AKV43 is a special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect executed together with the music reproduction in the reach effect of SP reach A. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the music reproduction in the reach effect of the SP reach A, the emission color in the specific light emission effect changes from blue to gold through the red color due to the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A.

The vibration by the vibration pattern AKV44 is a special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect executed together with the jackpot confirmation notification, and a special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect executed together with the jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2. There are cases where it becomes. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the jackpot confirmation notification, the emission color in the specific emission effect becomes rainbow color due to the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the jackpot type lottery CH1, the emission color in the specific light emission effect becomes white due to the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the jackpot type lottery CH2, the emission color in the specific emission effect becomes rainbow color due to the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A.

FIG. 12-4 shows an execution example of the effect by vibrating and emitting light of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. Here, a plurality of production execution examples AKA01 to AKA07 are shown according to the emission colors of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. The lever lamp 9B1 provided on the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the button lamp 9B2 provided on the push button 31B have normal emission brightness set to be low in the normal emission state, and the emission color is different. It suffices to emit light so that it becomes white. Alternatively, in the normal light emitting state, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be set to non-light emitting so as not to emit light.

The effect execution example AKA01 is a case where the light emission effect of causing the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit white light is executed. When the operation unit effect by any one of the operation unit effect pattern AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 is executed, the emission color becomes white. The operation unit effect pattern AKC01 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the start of the pre-variation. The operation unit effect pattern AKC11 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the start of the target variation. Both the operation unit effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the time of reach development. Operation unit effect pattern The operation unit effect by AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 has a jackpot reliability of 50% or more. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01 includes a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC11 includes the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC31 includes the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV21. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC32 includes the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV22. Even when the jackpot type lottery CH1 is executed as a specific effect, the emission color becomes white.

The effect execution example AKA02 is a case where a light emission effect for causing the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit red light is executed. When the operation unit effect by any of the operation unit effect pattern AKC02 and AKC12 is executed, the emission color becomes red. The operation unit effect pattern AKC02 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the start of the pre-variation. The operation unit effect pattern AKC12 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the start of the target variation. Operation unit effect pattern The operation unit effect by AKC02 and AKC12 has a jackpot reliability of 70% or more. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC02 includes a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation unit effect by the operation unit pattern AKC12 includes a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03. Even when the music reproduction of SP Reach A is executed as a specific effect, the effect period in which the emission color becomes red is included.

The effect execution example AKA03 is a case where the light emission effect of causing the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light in rainbow colors is executed. When the operation unit effect by any of the operation unit effect pattern AKC03 and AKC13 is executed, the emission color becomes rainbow color. The operation unit effect pattern AKC03 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the start of the pre-variation. The operation unit effect pattern AKC13 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the start of the target variation. Operation unit effect pattern The operation unit effect by AKC03 and AKC13 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC03 includes the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC13 includes the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03. Even when the jackpot confirmation notification or the jackpot type lottery CH2 is executed as a specific effect, the emission color becomes rainbow color.

The effect execution example AKA04 is a case where the light emission effect of causing the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light in pink is executed. Operation unit effect pattern When the operation unit effect by the AKC21 is executed, the emission color becomes pink. The operation unit effect pattern AKC21 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the time of reach development. Operation unit effect pattern The operation unit effect by the AKC21 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC21 includes the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV11.

The effect execution example AKA05 is a case where the light emission effect of causing the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light in orange is executed. When the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC22 is executed, the emission color becomes orange. The operation unit effect pattern AKC22 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the time of reach development. Operation unit effect pattern The operation unit effect by the AKC22 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC22 includes the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV12.

The effect execution example AKV06 is a case where a light emission effect for causing the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit blue light is executed. The emission color does not turn blue when the operation unit effect is executed. When the movable body movement of SP reach A is executed as a specific effect, the emission color becomes blue. Further, when the music reproduction of SP Reach A is executed as a specific effect, the effect period in which the emission color becomes blue is included.

The effect execution example AKV07 is a case where a light emission effect is executed in which the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit gold light. Operation unit effect pattern When the operation unit effect by the AKC41 is executed, the emission color becomes gold. The operation unit effect pattern AKC41 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the time of the success / failure notification. Operation unit effect pattern The operation unit effect by the AKC41 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC41 includes a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31. When the image display of SP reach A is executed as a specific effect, the emission color becomes gold. Further, when the music reproduction of SP Reach A is executed as a specific effect, the effect period in which the emission color becomes gold is included.

As described above, the emission colors of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be different or common depending on the execution timing of the operation unit effect, the jackpot reliability, and the vibration mode in the vibration effect. In addition to the emission color, any emission mode such as emission time, number of emission (number of blinks), emission cycle (blinking cycle), and emission brightness can be set to the execution timing of the operation unit effect, jackpot reliability, and vibration in the vibration effect. Depending on the aspect, they may be different or may be common.

The operation unit effect can be executed as a pre-reading advance notice effect or a continuous advance notice effect when it is executed at the start of the pre-variation. The pre-reading notice effect suggests whether or not the variable display result becomes a "big hit" before the variable display to be suggested. The continuous notice effect continuously suggests whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" over a plurality of variable displays executed before the variable display to be suggested. The continuous advance notice effect can be executed by using the continuous effect pattern for each number of reserved memories. The number of reserved memories here may be the number of reserved special figures at the time of starting winning. As the continuous effect pattern for each number of reserved memories, a plurality of continuous effect patterns are prepared in advance according to the effect mode for each remaining number of times. The remaining number of times is deducted by 1 each time the special figure hold storage number at the time of starting winning is set and the variable display is executed. Then, when the variable display to be suggested is executed, the remaining number of times becomes "0".

FIG. 12-5 shows a setting example of a continuous effect pattern used to execute the continuous advance notice effect. For the continuous effect pattern, for example, using a random number value for determining the continuous effect pattern, the continuous effect pattern determination table according to the number of reserved memories is referred to, and a determination value matching the random value is assigned according to the judgment result at the time of winning. The decision may be made by determining the decision result.

FIG. 12-5 (A) shows continuous effect patterns AKD01 to AKD06 that can be used when the number of reserved storages is “2”. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD01, the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01 is executed when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation unit effect pattern AKC11 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". The club production is executed. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD02, the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01 is executed when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation unit effect pattern AKC12 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". The club production is executed. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD03, the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC02 is executed when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation unit effect pattern AKC12 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". The club production is executed. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD04, the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01 is executed when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation unit effect pattern AKC13 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". The club production is executed. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD05, the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC02 is executed when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation unit effect pattern AKC13 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". The club production is executed. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD06, the operation unit effect is executed by the operation unit effect pattern AKC03 when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation unit effect pattern AKC13 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". The club production is executed.

FIG. 12-5 (B) shows continuous effect patterns AKD11 to AKD16 that can be used when the number of reserved storages is “3”. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect patterns AKD11 to AKD16, when the remaining number of times is "2" or "1", the operation unit effect by any of the continuous effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 is executed, and the remaining number of times is "0". When is, the operation unit effect by any one of the continuous effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is executed.

FIG. 12-5 (C) shows continuous effect patterns AKD21 to AKD26 that can be used when the number of reserved storages is “4”. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect patterns AKD21 to AKD26, when the remaining number of times is any of "1" to "3", the operation unit effect by any of the continuous effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 is executed, and the remaining number of times is When it is "0", the operation unit effect by any one of the continuous effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is executed.

FIG. 12-6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process that can be executed in step S161 of FIG. 9 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 12-6, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pre-reading notice condition is satisfied (step AKS101). The pre-reading notice condition may be set in advance as a condition that enables the pre-reading notice effect, which is the continuous advance notice effect, to be executed. In step AKS101, it is determined whether or not the effect control command (start opening winning designation command, hold storage number notification command, winning determination result command) transmitted at the time of winning the start is received. If no command is received, it is determined that the read-ahead notice condition is not satisfied. When there is a command reception, the notification content by the received command is specified, and for example, the winning judgment result is specified as the notification content by the winning judgment result command.

The winning judgment result uses the game random numbers extracted at the time of starting winning to determine whether or not the variable display result is determined as a "big hit" and whether or not the fluctuation pattern is determined as a specific fluctuation pattern. , The result determined by the start winning determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process may be used. As the winning determination result, for example, one of a big hit, a super reach confirmation at the time of loss, a reach confirmation at the time of loss, and a general at the time of loss may be indicated. The jackpot winning determination result is a determination result corresponding to the case where the random number value for determining the display result is within the jackpot determination range and is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. The winning judgment result of the super reach confirmation at the time of loss is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where the jackpot game state is not controlled, and corresponds to the case where the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the super reach confirmation range at the time of loss. This is the judgment result. The winning judgment result of the reach confirmation at the time of loss is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where the jackpot game state is not controlled, and the judgment result corresponding to the case where the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the reach confirmation range at the time of loss. Is. When the general winning judgment result at the time of loss is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where the jackpot game state is not controlled, and the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is neither within the super reach confirmation range at the time of loss nor within the reach confirmation range. It is a judgment result corresponding to.

It suffices if the pre-reading notice condition can be satisfied when the judgment result at the time of winning is either a big hit or the super reach is confirmed at the time of loss. In addition, if the winning judgment result this time is either a big hit or the super reach is confirmed at the time of loss, and if all the judgment results at the time of winning up to the previous time corresponding to the hold memory are general at the time of losing, the pre-reading notice condition May be possible. If the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect, which is the continuous advance notice effect, is already set to start, the pre-reading advance notice condition may be restricted so as not to be satisfied.

If the pre-reading notice condition is not satisfied (step AKS101; No), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. When the pre-reading notice condition is satisfied (step AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice (step AKS102). For example, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for pre-reading advance notice execution decision and referring to a pre-reading notice execution decision table prepared in advance stored in ROM 121 according to a winning determination result, etc. Whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect may be determined as to whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect. In step AKS102, it is determined to be either "not executed" when the pre-reading notice effect is not executed or "executed" when the pre-reading notice effect is executed. It is determined whether or not the determination result at this time is determined to be "executed" (step AKS103).

If it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect is not executed (step AKS103; No), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. When it is determined that "execution is performed" to execute the pre-reading notice effect (step AKS103; Yes), the remaining number of times is set (step AKS104). In step AKS104, the number of reserved storages may be set as the remaining number of times. Subsequently, the continuous effect pattern is determined (step AKS105). For example, by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining a continuous effect pattern and referring to a continuous effect pattern determination table stored in advance in ROM 121 according to a winning determination result, the continuous effect pattern can be determined. Should be determined to be one of a plurality of patterns.

After the continuous effect pattern is determined in step AKS105, the pre-reading notice setting process is performed (step AKS106), and the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. In step AKS106, for example, the pre-reading advance notice flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (such as the effect control flag setting unit) may be set to the ON state.

In such a look-ahead notice setting process, when the winning judgment result is either a big hit or a super reach confirmation at the time of loss, the look-ahead notice condition in step AKS101 can be satisfied, and the look-ahead notice execution by step AKS102 is executed. It becomes possible to determine the presence / absence and the continuous production pattern by the step AKS105. Then, when the winning judgment result is a big hit, even if the winning judgment result is determined to be "executed" to execute the pre-reading notice effect by step AKS102 at a higher rate than the case where the super reach is confirmed at the time of loss. good. Further, in step AKS105, when the winning determination result is a big hit, the continuous effect pattern may be determined at a different ratio from the case where the winning determination result is the case where the super reach is confirmed at the time of loss. In this way, it suffices if the continuous advance notice effect, which is the look-ahead advance notice effect, can be executed based on the winning determination result, which is the look-ahead determination result.

FIG. 12-7 is a flowchart showing an example of a process that can be executed in step S171 of FIG. 9 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 12-7, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol or the like to be the final decorative symbol as the variable display result of the decorative symbol (step AKS201). The effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol based on the variable display contents such as the variable pattern indicated by the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. You just have to decide. The variation pattern specification command and the display result notification command are mainly generated by setting the transmission of the command at the start of variation of the special symbol when the variation pattern setting process is executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12. The variation pattern specification command is an effect control command that specifies a variation pattern determined as a usage pattern. The variable display result notification command is an effect control command that specifies a variable display result determined by using a random number value for determining a special figure display result. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and the variable display result include "non-reach (loss)", "reach (loss)", "non-probability (big hit)", and "probability (big hit)". All you need is.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not change to the reach state, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is displayed. It becomes "missing". When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state, the final decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is "loss". It becomes. When the variable display content is "non-probability change (big hit)", the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit", and the game state after the end of the big hit game state becomes the time saving state. When the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)", the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit", and the game state after the end of the big hit game state becomes the probable change state.

In step AKS201, for example, when the variable display content is "non-probability variation (big hit)", a combination of fixed decorative symbols aligned with the same even-numbered symbols is determined as the final stop symbol. Further, when the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)", it suffices if it is possible to determine the combination of the fixed decorative symbols aligned with the same odd-numbered symbols as the final stop symbol. When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", the combination of the fixed decorative symbols to be the reach-off combination is determined as the final stop symbol. When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the combination of the fixed decorative symbols to be the non-reach out-of-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol. When deciding the combination of the fixed decorative symbols, for example, by extracting numerical data which is a random value for determining the symbol and referring to the symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 according to the variable display content, the combination is determined. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined.

After determining the final stop symbol and the like, the operation unit effect is determined (step AKS202). In step AKS202, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is being executed. For example, when the pre-reading notice flag is on, it may be determined that the pre-reading notice effect is being executed. When the pre-reading advance notice effect is being executed, the remaining number of times may be subtracted by 1, and the operation unit effect pattern may be determined according to the remaining number of times after the subtraction and the continuous effect pattern. As the continuous effect pattern, the one determined in step AKS105 of the pre-reading advance notice setting process may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. When the remaining number of times after subtraction is "0", the pre-reading advance notice flag may be cleared to turn it off.

In step AKS202, when it is determined that the pre-reading advance notice effect is not being executed, the presence / absence of the operation unit effect corresponding to the current variable display and the operation unit effect pattern may be determined at a predetermined ratio. For example, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the effect of the operation unit is extracted, and the operation unit effect determination table stored in advance in the RAM 121 is referred to depending on whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit". It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the operation unit effect and the operation unit effect pattern used when executing the operation unit effect. The operation unit effect corresponding to this variable display can be executed when it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect is not being executed, and cannot be executed when it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect is being executed. .. Therefore, the operation unit effect corresponding to the variable display this time is limited so that it cannot be executed during the execution of the variable display within the range of the variable display in which the operation unit effect included in the pre-reading notice effect is executed. Is set.

In step AKS202, when the specific interlocking effect including the special vibration effect is executed along with the specific effect based on the fluctuation pattern, the execution of the operation unit effect may be restricted. For example, when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, the execution of the operation unit effect may be restricted by deciding not to execute the operation unit effect at any timing. In this case, in the range of the variable display in which the reach effect of the SP reach A is executed, a limit limit is provided so that all the operation unit effects cannot be executed while the variable display is being executed. Alternatively, when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, it is possible to decide to execute the operation unit effect at a predetermined ratio at the timing corresponding to the start of the target fluctuation or the establishment of the reach, while at the time of reach development or The execution of the operation unit effect may be restricted by deciding not to execute the operation unit effect at the timing corresponding to the hit / fail notification. In this case, in the range of the variable display in which the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, a limit limit is set so that some operation unit effects cannot be executed during the execution of the variable display. .. In addition, in the range of the variable display in which the specific effect is executed, a limit may be provided so that a part or all of the operation unit effect is difficult to be executed during the execution of the variable display. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 that determines the operation unit effect in step AKS202 can limit the execution of the operation unit effect including the vibration effect when the special vibration effect is executed.

In addition, in the case where the operation unit effect is determined by step AKS202, when a special effect different from the specific effect is executed based on the fluctuation pattern or the judgment result at the time of winning, the special effect is different from the case where the special effect is not executed. The determination ratio of the operation unit effect may be set so that a part or all of the operation unit effect can be easily executed during the execution of the variable display.

After determining the operation unit effect, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of prepared patterns (step AKS203). For example, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (variable display effect control patterns) in response to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, and sets it as a usage pattern. .. Further, the effect control CPU 120 may select one of a plurality of effect control patterns (operation unit effect control patterns) prepared in response to the operation unit effect determined by step AKS202 and set them as the use pattern. good. Further, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (effect control timer setting unit or the like) is set (step AKS204). Then, the variation of the decorative pattern or the like is started on the screen of the image display device 5 (step AKS205). At this time, for example, by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (variable display effect control pattern) determined in step AKS203 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, the image is displayed. The variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the display device 5.

After setting the variable start, the setting for updating the hold display and the like is made in response to the start of the variable display (step AKS206). After updating the hold display or the like, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step AKS207), and then the variable display start setting process ends.

FIG. 12-8 shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The effect control pattern includes a variable display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 12-8 (A) and an operation unit effect control pattern shown in FIG. 12-8 (B). The variable display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 12-8 (A) corresponds to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern specification command, and executes various effects from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Contains control data used to control. The operation unit effect control pattern shown in FIG. 12-8 (B) includes control data used for controlling the execution of the operation unit effect.

The variable display effect control pattern is composed of process data including, for example, an effect control process timer determination value, display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, vibration control data, end code, and the like. .. The effect control process timer judgment value is a value (judgment value) to be compared with the effect control process timer value, which is a stored value of the effect control process timer, and is a judgment value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation. Is preset. In addition, instead of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command was received from the main board 11, or a predetermined process was executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control CPU 120. Data indicating the switching timing of the effect control and the like may be set corresponding to the predetermined control contents and processing contents.

The display control data includes data indicating a display mode of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, such as data indicating a variation mode of each decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the display control data is data that specifies the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. The voice control data includes data showing a voice output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, such as data showing an output mode such as a sound effect linked to a variable display of a decorative pattern. That is, the voice control data is data that specifies the voice output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data of the variable display effect control pattern includes data indicating a light emitting drive mode during variable display of the decorative pattern for a light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 or a decorative LED. That is, the lamp control data of the variable display effect control pattern is data that specifies the light emitting mode of the light emitting body during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The operation detection control data includes an effective detection period for effectively detecting the player's operation, such as a tilting operation for the operation lever of the stick controller 31A, an instruction operation for the trigger button, or a pressing operation for the push button 31B, and each operation. Data that indicates the mode of the effect operation according to the motion detection of the player, such as data that specifies the control content of the effect operation when is effectively detected, is included. The vibration control data of the variable display effect control pattern includes, for example, data indicating the on period and the driving mode of the vibration motor 131 during the variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the vibration control data of the variable display effect control pattern is data that specifies the vibration mode of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A during the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variable pattern.

It should be noted that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, and the effect control pattern is configured to include a part of the control data according to the content of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be. Further, in the plurality of types of process data included in the effect control pattern, the types of control data constituting each process data may be different depending on the content of the effect operation executed at each timing. That is, some process data includes all of display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and vibration control data, and some process data includes some of these. You can. Further, various other control data such as movable body control data indicating the operation mode of the movable body 32 may be included.

In the variable display during effect processing in step S172 of the effect control process process, each time the effect control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, and if it matches, it is determined. Controls the effect operation according to the corresponding various control data. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 has the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp) according to the contents of the process data # 1 to process data # n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. 9. Control of a light emitting body such as a decorative LED, a vibration motor 131, a movable body 32, etc.) is advanced. In each process data # 1 to process data # n, display control data # 1 to display control data # n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with the effect control process timer determination values # 1 to # n. The data # n, the lamp control data # 1 to the lamp control data # n, the operation detection control data # 1 to the operation detection control data # n, and the vibration control data # 1 to the vibration control data # n are the control of the effect operation in the effect device. The effect control execution data # 1 to the effect control execution data # n that indicate the contents and specify the execution of the effect control are configured.

The operation unit effect control pattern is composed of, for example, process data including the effect control process timer determination value, lamp control data, vibration control data, and the like. The lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern includes data indicating a lighting operation mode of the light emitting body in the operation unit effect, such as lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2. That is, the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern is data that specifies a light emission mode when the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31B are made to emit light in the light emission effect included in the operation unit effect. The vibration control data of the operation unit effect control pattern includes data indicating an on period and a drive mode of the vibration generator in the operation unit effect, such as driving the vibration motor 131. That is, the vibration control data of the operation unit effect control pattern is data that specifies the vibration mode when the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31B are vibrated in the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect.

FIG. 12-9 shows a setting example of the timing at which the operation unit effect can be executed in the vibration effect execution example AKE01. The timings AKT01 to AKT03 are timings at which the operation unit effect at the start of the pre-variation can be executed in response to the case where the variable display of the decorative symbol that becomes the pre-variation is started. For example, when the continuous effect pattern is determined in step AKS105 of the read-ahead notice setting process, the operation unit effect is executed at a part or all of the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation according to the number of remaining times. be able to. For example, when the number of remaining times is "3", the operation unit effect can be executed at the timing AKT01, and when the number of remaining times is "2", the operation unit effect can be executed at the timing AKT02. When is "1", the operation unit effect can be executed at the timing AKT03.

The timing AKT11 shown in FIG. 12-9 is a timing at which the operation unit effect at the start of the target variation can be executed in response to the case where the variable display of the decorative symbol that becomes the target variation is started. For example, when the continuous effect pattern is determined in step AKS105 of the read-ahead notice setting process, the operation unit based on the operation unit effect pattern according to the remaining number of times in a part or all of the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation. At the timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation after the effect is executed, the operation unit effect according to the operation unit effect pattern corresponding to the remaining number of times of "0" can be executed. Further, at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target fluctuation, the operation unit effect may be executed. Specifically, when the operation unit effect pattern AKC11 to AKC13 is determined by step AKS202, the operation unit effect according to the determined operation unit effect pattern is executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation. be able to.

As in the case of timing AKT01 to AKT03 or timing AKT11, the timing corresponding to the case where the variable display of the decorative symbol is started may be such that the operation unit effect can be executed at the same time as the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. , The operation unit effect may be executed when a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol. As described above, the timing corresponding to the case where the variable display of the decorative symbol is started may be any timing that can be reached by the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

In the timings AKT12 to AKT14 shown in FIGS. 12-9, as the operation unit effects corresponding to the variable display this time, the operation unit effects when the reach is established, the operation unit effects when the reach is developed, and the operation unit effects when the hit / fail notification is agitated are displayed. Each is a feasible timing. For example, according to the operation unit effect pattern determined in step AKS202 of the variable display start setting process, the operation unit effect can be executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established, and the operation unit effect at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops. There are cases where it becomes possible to execute the operation unit effect, and there are cases where the operation unit effect can be executed at the timing AKT14 when the success / failure notification is triggered. Specifically, when the operation unit effect pattern AKC21 or AKC22 is determined by step AKS202, the operation unit effect according to the determined operation unit effect pattern is executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established. Can be done. Further, when the operation unit effect pattern AKC31 or AKC32 is determined by step AKS202, the operation unit effect according to the determined operation unit effect pattern can be executed at the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development. Alternatively, when the operation unit effect pattern AKC41 is determined by step ASK202, the operation unit effect according to the determined operation unit effect pattern can be executed at the timing AKT14 at the time of the hit / fail notification.

FIG. 12-10 shows an example of control of the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color shown in FIG. 12-10 (A) becomes white and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 shown in FIG. 12-10 (B). It can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation. As shown in FIG. 12-10 (B), the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 is a vibration mode in which the on period and the off period are alternately repeated three times every 300 milliseconds. As shown in FIG. 12-10 (A), the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect. During the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be turned off without emitting light. The emission effect that the emission color becomes white according to the on period of the vibration effect is the first brightness in which the white emission brightness is high and the second brightness in which the emission brightness is low, for example, every 30 milliseconds in the on period of 300 milliseconds. By alternately repeating the above, the emission brightness of white may change periodically.

FIG. 12-11 shows an example of control of the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC02 and AKC03. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC02 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color shown in FIG. 12-11 (A) turns red and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. 12-11 (B). It can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC03 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color shown in FIG. 12-11 (A) becomes rainbow, and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. 12-11 (B). , It can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation. As shown in FIG. 12-11 (B), the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the on period of 1500 milliseconds continues. As shown in FIG. 12-11 (A), the light emitting effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 are continuously red in the operation unit effect pattern AKC02 according to the on period of the vibration effect. If the operation unit effect pattern AKC03 is used, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in rainbow colors. For example, the plurality of LEDs constituting the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light by shifting the emission colors of red, reddish purple, blue-purple, blue, green, yellow, and orange according to the elapsed time and the light emitting position. , The lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may emit light in rainbow colors. The light emitting positions of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 can be specified in a plurality of sections such as the upper part and the lower part of the lever lamp 9B1 and the entire button lamp 9B2. It suffices if part or all of the brightness can be set.

FIG. 12-12 shows an example of control of the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC11. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC11 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color shown in FIG. 12-12 (A) becomes white and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. 12-12 (B). It can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts. As shown in FIG. 12-12 (B), the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the on period of 1500 milliseconds continues. As shown in FIG. 12-12 (A), the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect. The emission effect that the emission color becomes white according to the on period of the vibration effect is the first brightness in which the white emission brightness is high and the second brightness in which the emission brightness is low, for example, every 30 milliseconds in the on period of 1500 milliseconds. By alternately repeating the above, the emission brightness of white may change periodically.

FIG. 12-13 shows an example of control of the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC12 and AKC13. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC12 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color shown in FIG. 12-13 (A) turns red and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 shown in FIG. 12-13 (B). It can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC13 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color shown in FIG. 12-13 (A) becomes rainbow color and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 shown in FIG. 12-13 (B). , It can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts. As shown in FIG. 12-13 (B), the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 is a vibration mode in which the on period of 3000 milliseconds continues. As shown in FIG. 12-13 (A), the light emitting effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 are intermittently red in the operation unit effect pattern AKC12 according to the on period of the vibration effect. If the operation unit effect pattern AKC13, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in rainbow colors. For example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit red light by alternately repeating the first brightness having a high emission brightness and the second brightness having a low emission brightness every 20 milliseconds during the on period of the vibration effect. The brightness may change periodically. In this case, the light emission mode included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC12 changes the emission brightness in a shorter cycle than the light emission effect included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC11. It becomes. As described above, as an effect mode of the light emission effect, not only the light emission color but also the light emission cycle may be different to suggest the jackpot reliability. In the on period of the vibration effect, red light may be emitted intermittently by alternately repeating red light emission and non-light emission, for example, every 20 milliseconds. As an effect mode of the light emission effect, while the light emission cycle is common, it may be possible to suggest the jackpot reliability by making the light emission colors different. In this way, for example, when the emission colors in the light emission effect are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the light emission effect by sharing the light emission cycle.

FIG. 12-14 shows an example of control of the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC21. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC21 can be executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established, in response to the effect AKR1 which is the effect when the reach is established as shown in FIGS. 12-14 (A). Includes a light emission effect in which the emission color shown in (B) becomes pink, and a vibration effect in which the vibration pattern AKV11 shown in FIG. 12-14 (C) is used. The effect AKR1 that is an effect when the reach is established may be, for example, an effect that displays an effect image indicating the reach line on the display screen of the image display device 5, or an effect that displays a background image according to the establishment of the reach. In addition, any other effect that accompanies the establishment of reach may be used. As shown in FIG. 12-14 (C), the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV11 is a vibration mode in which the on period and the off period are alternately repeated a plurality of times at predetermined time (for example, 100 milliseconds). As shown in FIG. 12-14 (B), the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in pink in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect. During the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be turned off without emitting light.

FIG. 12-15 shows an example of control of the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC22. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC22 can be executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established, in response to the effect AKR2 which is the effect when the reach is established as shown in FIGS. 12-15 (A). It includes a light emitting effect in which the light emitting color shown in (B) turns orange and a vibration effect in which the vibration pattern AKV12 shown in FIG. 12-15 (C) is used. The effect AKR2, which is an effect when the reach is established, may be an effect of displaying an effect image showing the reach line on the display screen of the image display device 5, or an effect of displaying a background image according to the establishment of the reach. In addition, any other effect that accompanies the establishment of reach may be used. It suffices that the effect mode is different between the effect AKR1 and the effect AKR2, which are the effects when the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 12-15 (C), the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV12 has an on period of the first vibration on time (for example, 100 milliseconds) and an off period of the first vibration off time (for example, 100 milliseconds). After repeating twice alternately, the vibration mode includes an on period of the second vibration on time (for example, 250 milliseconds) and an on period of the third vibration on time (for example, 500 milliseconds). As shown in FIG. 12-15 (B), the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in orange in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect. During the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be turned off without emitting light. Further, when the on periods of the vibration effects are different vibration on times, the light emitting patterns of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be different. For example, during the on period of the first vibration on time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 continuously emit orange light. On the other hand, during the on period of the second vibration on time and the third vibration on time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 intermittently emit orange light. The lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit orange light intermittently by alternately repeating orange light emission and non-light emission every 20 milliseconds during the on period of the second vibration on time and the third vibration on time. do it.

Operation unit effect pattern The operation unit effect by AKC31 and AKC32 can be executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops, corresponding to the effects AKS1 and AKS2 which are the effect when the reach develops, and the emission color becomes white. , The vibration effect by the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, and the like. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV21 is an on-period vibration mode that matches the effect AKS1 in the case of the operation unit effect pattern AKC31. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV22 is an on-period vibration mode that matches the effect AKS2 in the case of the operation unit effect pattern AKC32. In any of the operation unit effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect.

The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC41 can be executed in response to the hit / fail effect at the timing AKT14 at the time of the hit / fail notification, and the light emission effect that the emission color becomes gold and the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31. ,including. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31 is a vibration mode in which the on period is 1500 milliseconds or more. In the light emitting effect accompanying this vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in gold according to the on period of the vibration effect.

As shown in FIGS. 12-12 and 12-13, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is white. Including the case where the emission color becomes red or rainbow color different from white, and when the emission color becomes white, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is executed and the emission color becomes red or rainbow color. In this case, a vibration effect is executed by a vibration pattern AKV03 different from the vibration pattern AKV02. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on whether the emission color is white or the emission color is red or rainbow. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is the same, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, so that the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are used. It is possible to appropriately diversify the production and improve the entertainment of the game. It should be noted that the vibration effect by the common vibration pattern AKV03 is executed in both the case where the emission color becomes red and the case where the emission color becomes rainbow color. That is, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common depending on whether the emission color is red or the emission color is rainbow. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is common, the case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common may be provided regardless of the light emission mode of the light emission effect.

The operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation includes an operation unit effect in which the emission color becomes white due to the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02, such as the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC11. I'm out. As for the operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development, a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white due to the vibration effect by the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, such as the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32, is executed. Includes things. In this way, the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target fluctuation and the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development become white with a common emission color, and the vibration effect is produced. There are cases where the vibration modes of the above are different. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common, whereas the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are used. It is possible to appropriately diversify the production and improve the entertainment of the game. It should be noted that the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation includes the operation unit effect that the emission color becomes red or rainbow color, such as the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC12 and AKC13. There is. As in this case, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect differs between the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT 11 at the start of the target fluctuation and the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT 13 at the time of reach development, and the vibration effect is produced. The vibration mode of the above may be different. As in the case where the emission color becomes white, the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation is the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development, and the light emission mode of the light emission effect. Includes what is common. Further, as in the case where the emission color becomes red or rainbow color, the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target fluctuation is the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development, and the light emission. It may include those having different light emitting modes of the effect. The operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development does not have to include an operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation and a light emission mode different from that of the light emission effect.

The operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT12 when the reach is established is a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes pink or orange due to the vibration effect by the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12, such as the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22. Includes what to do. All of these operation unit effects have a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT14 at the time of the hit / fail notification includes an operation unit effect such as an operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC41 that executes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes gold due to the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31. I'm out. The jackpot reliability of this operation unit effect is 100%. In this way, the jackpot reliability is 100% common between the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established and the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT14 when the hit / miss notification is triggered, and the vibration effect is produced. There are cases where the vibration modes of the above are different. Further, the emission color is different and the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different between the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established and the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT14 when the hit / miss notification is triggered. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the jackpot reliability is common, whereas the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, or the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different, so that the stick controller 31A It is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using the operation members such as the push button 31B and the push button 31B to improve the game entertainment.

The operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts is that the emission color becomes white, red, or rainbow color due to the vibration effect by the vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03, such as the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13. Includes those that perform light emission effects. The operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT12 when the reach is established is a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes pink or orange due to the vibration effect by the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12, such as the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22. Includes what to do. In this way, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect differs between the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT 11 at the start of the target variation and the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT 12 at the time when the reach is established, and the vibration of the vibration effect. There are cases where the modes are different. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different, and the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that the effects using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately varied. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT12 when the reach is established is a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes pink or orange due to the vibration effect by the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12, such as the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22. Includes what to do. The operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development is such that the operation unit effect is performed by the operation unit effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32. Contains things. In this way, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect differs between the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established and the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach is developed, and the vibration mode of the vibration effect. Is different. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different, or the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that the effect using the operation member such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B can be produced. It can be diversified appropriately to improve the entertainment of the game. The operation unit effect that can be executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established may include an effect that executes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white. Further, the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development may include one that executes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes pink or orange. As a result, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, even if the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that the effect using the operation member such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B can be performed. It can be diversified appropriately to improve the entertainment of the game.

The jackpot reliability when the operation unit effect is executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation is 50% or more, 70% or more, or 100% depending on the operation unit effect pattern. The jackpot reliability when the operation unit effect is executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation is 50% or more, 70% or more, or 100% depending on the operation unit effect pattern. The jackpot reliability when the operation unit effect is executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established is 100% regardless of the operation unit effect pattern. The jackpot reliability when the operation unit effect is executed at the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development is 50% or more regardless of the operation unit effect pattern. The jackpot reliability is 100% when the operation unit effect is executed at the timing AKT14 at the time of the hit / fail notification. Therefore, the jackpot reliability when the operation unit effect is executed may differ depending on the light emitting mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect and the timing when the vibration effect is executed. In addition, the vibration mode of the vibration effect may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect. The vibration modes of the vibration effect include the vibration time according to the length of the on period, the vibration intensity driven by the vibration motor 131, the combination of the on period and the off period, the combination of the strong vibration and the weak vibration in the vibration intensity, and others. , It suffices if the arbitrary vibration patterns that vibrate the operating members such as the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are different, so that they can be made different.

The plurality of specific effects that can be executed according to the progress of the game include the movable body movement, the image display, the music reproduction, the jackpot confirmation notification, and the jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 in the reach effect of SP reach A. In the reach effect of SP reach A, for example, the jackpot reliability is about 40%. Therefore, when the vibration effect by the operation unit effect is executed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, and when it is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is high. Become. Since the movable body movement, the image display, and the music reproduction in the reach effect of the SP reach A are all executed as a part of the reach effect, they do not have the jackpot reliability individually. Further, the jackpot confirmation notification is an effect of deterministically notifying that the variable display result is a "big hit". The jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 are jackpot type lottery effects according to the number of rounds and the like, corresponding to the case where the jackpot game state is controlled. The jackpot confirmation notification and the jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 are similar to the reach production of SP reach A in that the player can undoubtedly recognize that the variable display result is "big hit" and is controlled to the jackpot game state. It is different from the production with a high hit reliability. In this way, among a plurality of specific effects, the jackpot reliability is higher when the vibration effect by the operation unit effect is executed than when the specific effect is executed for the specific effect having the jackpot reliability. It suffices if it is set as. Further, the jackpot reliability is set to be higher when the vibration effect by the operation unit effect is executed than when the vibration effect by the operation unit effect is not executed.

FIG. 12-16 shows an execution example of the effect by causing the game effect lamp 9 to emit light. The game effect lamp 9 includes an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, and a right frame lamp 9N, which are different from the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. Here, a plurality of production execution examples AKF01 to AKF04 are shown according to the execution mode of the effect by light emission.

In the effect execution example AKF01, when the background display of the image display device 5 is a white display color, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are made to emit white light according to the background display. , The operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are made to emit red light by the light emission effect in the operation unit effect. For example, the operation unit effect by any one of the operation unit effect patterns AKC02 and AKC12 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes red due to the vibration effect.

In the effect execution example AKF02, when the background display of the image display device 5 is a red display color, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are made to emit red light according to the background display. , The operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are made to emit rainbow colors by the light emission effect in the operation unit effect. For example, the operation unit effect by any one of the operation unit effect patterns AKC03 and AKC13 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes rainbow color due to the vibration effect.

In the effect execution example AKF03, when the background display of the image display device 5 changes from black to white from the left side to the right side, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are displayed as the background. While the light is emitted so as to change from black to white according to the above, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit white light by the light emission effect in the operation unit effect. For example, the operation unit effect by any one of the operation unit effect patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white due to the vibration effect.

In the effect execution example AKF04, when the character display of the image display device 5 is a blue display color, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are made to emit blue light in accordance with the character display. , The operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are made to emit white light by the light emission effect in the operation unit effect. For example, the operation unit effect by any one of the operation unit effect patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white due to the vibration effect.

For example, the background display and the character display of the image display device 5, and other predetermined effects by displaying an arbitrary effect image can be executed according to the progress of the game including the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the variable display during effect process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process, variable display and the like are performed using the control data read from the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 of the variable display start setting process. Control is performed to execute a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game. This control data includes display control data for controlling the display of the image display device 5 and lamp control data for controlling light emission of the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N. There is. When the operation unit effect is executed during the execution of such a predetermined effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 cause the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light due to the vibration effect in the operation unit effect. It is possible to emit light in the light emitting mode of. In the variable display during effect process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process, the operation unit effect is performed using the control data read from the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 of the variable display start setting process. Control to execute is performed. The control data includes lamp control data for controlling the light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2, and vibration control data for controlling the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A by driving the vibration motor 131. It is included. In contrast to the light emitting effect associated with the vibration effect in the operation unit effect, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N can emit light in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting effect of the operation unit effect due to the predetermined effect. Is. In this way, the operating members such as the operating lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A and other light emitting members such as the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N emit light by different light emitting modes. It is possible to improve the game entertainment by appropriately diversifying the production by.

The predetermined effect may be executed by the audio output of the speakers 8L and 8R in addition to the screen display of the image display device 5 or instead of the screen display of the image display device 5. In this case, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are made to emit light in a emission color corresponding to the sound output of, for example, BGM, while the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are operated. The light emission color of the light emission effect in the club effect may be emitted. For example, when the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound that gives the player an impression of red, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are made to emit red light according to the sound output. On the other hand, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be made to emit white light by the light emission effect in the operation unit effect. Even in this way, by making the light emitting mode different between the operating members such as the operating lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A and other light emitting members such as the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N. , It is possible to improve the game entertainment by appropriately diversifying the production by light emission. In the predetermined effect, the screen display of the image display device 5 is dimmed, and in addition to stopping the audio output by the speakers 8L and 8R, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, the right frame lamp 9N, etc. are not emitted (turned off). May be. When this predetermined effect is executed, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be vibrated by the vibration effect in the operation unit effect. By executing the operation unit effect during the execution of such a predetermined effect, the player's attention to the vibration effect that vibrates the operation members such as the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is further increased. Therefore, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

FIG. 12-17 shows an example of setting an effect period in which the specific interlocking effect can be executed in the vibration effect execution example AKE02. The period AKZ01 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV41 can be executed along with the movement of the movable body in the reach effect of the SP reach A. The specific interlocking effect that can be performed in the period AKZ01 includes a specific light emission effect in which the emission color of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes blue in accordance with the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV41. The period AKZ02 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV42 can be executed along with the image display in the reach effect of the SP reach A. The specific interlocking effect that can be performed in the period AKZ02 includes a specific light emitting effect in which the emission color of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes gold due to the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV42. The period AKZ03 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV43 can be executed along with the music reproduction in the reach effect of the SP reach A. The specific interlocking effect that can be performed in the period AKZ03 includes a specific light emitting effect in which the emission color of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A changes from blue to red to gold due to the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV43. ..

The period AKZ04 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed along with the jackpot confirmation notification. The specific interlocking effect that can be performed in the period AKZ04 includes a specific light emitting effect in which the emission color of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes rainbow color due to the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44. In addition, the jackpot confirmation notification is to stop and display the confirmation decoration symbol that is the display result of the decoration symbol, to display the production image of the scene where the ally character wins the battle with the enemy character in the reach production, the speaker 8L, By outputting a big hit confirmation sound by 8R, turning on the big hit confirmation notification lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, or by combining a part or all of these, the player can recognize the big hit arbitrarily. It is sufficient if the notification of is executed.

In addition, following the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC41 executed at the timing AKT14 at the time of the hit / fail notification, the specific interlocking effect in the period AKZ04 accompanying the big hit confirmation notification may be executed. In this case, it is possible to enhance the impression of the effect and improve the interest of the game by executing the specific interlocking effect accompanying the jackpot confirmation notification while increasing the expectation of the player by the effect of the operation unit. When executing a specific interlocking effect following such an operation unit effect, the vibration mode of the vibration effect or the special vibration effect may be different between the operation unit effect and the specific interlocking effect, or the light emitting effect or the specific light emitting effect may be used. The light emission mode may be different. For example, the vibration intensity may be different between the vibration effect and the special vibration effect. The emission brightness may be different between the light emission effect and the specific light emission effect. By making the vibration mode and the light emission mode different to give the effect a sharpness, it is possible to easily recognize the distinction between the operation unit effect and the specific interlocking effect, appropriately diversify the effect, and improve the game entertainment. Can be done.

The period AKZ05 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed in accordance with the jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed in the period AKZ05 is that when the jackpot type lottery CH1 is executed, the emission color of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes white due to the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44. Includes directing. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed in the period AKZ05 is that when the jackpot type lottery CH2 is executed, the emission color of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes rainbow color due to the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44. Includes light emission effect.

12-18 to 12-20 show a case where the reach effect of SP reach A is executed. FIG. 12-18 shows production execution examples AKG01 to AKG03 when the movable body movement in the reach effect of SP reach A is executed. FIG. 12-19 shows an effect execution example AKG11 to AKG13 when the image display in the reach effect of SP reach A is executed. FIG. 12-20 shows production execution examples AKG21 to AKG23 when music reproduction is executed in the reach production of SP reach A.

When the variable display of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the reach effect of the normal reach is executed, the position of the movable body 32 is not changed from the initial position. The initial position of the movable body 32 may be a position that is in front of the lower end with respect to the display screen of the image display device 5. Subsequently, when the reach effect of the SP reach A is started due to the reach development, the movable body operation is performed by changing the position of the movable body 32 from the initial position as in the effect execution example AKG01. At this time, the position of the movable body 32 is changed by linearly or parallelly moving upward from the initial position, and the display position of the image display device 5 corresponding to the window provided inside the movable body 32 is "SP. An effect image showing a message such as "reach A" is displayed. After that, by continuing to change the position of the movable body 32, the position of the movable body 32 passes near the center of the display screen of the image display device 5, as in the production execution example AKG02. At this time, at the display position of the image display device 5 corresponding to the window portion of the movable body 32, an effect image showing a message such as "This fluctuation is ..." is displayed.

Example of effect execution A specific interlocking effect is executed according to the position change of the movable body 32 which is a movable body operation such as AKG01 and AKG02, and the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light with vibration. The specific interlocking effect executed together with the movement of the movable body in the reach effect of SP reach A includes a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV41 and a specific light emission effect in which the emission color becomes blue during the period AKZ01 shown in FIG. 12-17. , Including. Further, when the position of the movable body 32 is continuously changed and the position of the movable body 32 reaches the upper end front of the display screen of the image display device 5 as in the effect execution example AKG03, the specific interlocking effect in the period AKZ01 ends. do. For example, the period AKZ01 corresponding to the time when the position of the movable body 32 reaches the upper end front from the lower end front with respect to the display screen which is the initial position is 2500 milliseconds, and the stick controller 31A is continuously operated over this period AKZ01. A special vibration effect may be performed in a vibration mode during which the lever or the push button 31B is vibrated during the on-period. Alternatively, when the period is AKZ01, a special vibration effect may be executed in a vibration mode in which the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is vibrated every 250 milliseconds, which is switched between an on period and a non-vibrating off period. Further, the specific light emitting effect may be executed in a light emitting mode in which the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A continuously emit blue light over the period AKZ01. Alternatively, during the period AKZ01, a specific light emission effect is executed in a light emission mode in which the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is switched between blue light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (off) every 250 milliseconds. May be good.

Production execution example When the movable body operation in the reach production of SP reach A such as AKG01 to AKG03 is executed, the positions of the movable body 32 of the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are changed, for example. As a result, the light may be emitted in a light emission pattern in which the emission color and the emission brightness gradually change from the lower side to the upper side. For example, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N have a blue emission color when the position of the movable body 32 is changed, and the emission brightness changes in a wavy shape according to the height and time. It suffices to emit light as if it were.

After the movement of the movable body is completed as in the effect execution example AKG03, the effect image is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 as the image display in the reach effect of the SP reach A as in the effect execution example AKG11. At this time, for example, the character display indicating the message "super hot" is performed in the gold display color. Further, as in the effect execution example AKG12, an effect image can be added and displayed around the character display.

Example of effect execution A specific interlocking effect is executed along with the display of the effect image to be an image display such as AKG11 and AKG12, and the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light with vibration. The specific interlocking effect executed together with the image display in the reach effect of SP reach A includes a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV42 and a specific light emission effect in which the emission color becomes gold in the period AKZ02 shown in FIG. 12-17. Includes. When the character display indicating the message ends and the display of the effect image in the reach effect different from the character display is started as in the effect execution example AKG13, the specific interlocking effect in the period AKZ02 ends. For example, the period AKZ02 corresponding to the character display indicating the message "super hot" is 1000 milliseconds, and the vibration that is the on period for continuously vibrating the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A over this period AKZ02. A special vibration effect may be performed depending on the embodiment. Further, during the period AKZ02, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are alternately repeated every 10 milliseconds with the first brightness having a high golden emission brightness and the second brightness having a low emission brightness. A specific light emission effect may be executed.

Example of effect execution When the image display in the reach effect of SP reach A such as AKG11 to AKG13 is executed, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are, for example, on the display screen of the image display device 5. The emission color may be gold according to the image display and the emission color of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. For example, with the display of the effect image such as the effect execution examples AKG11 and AKG12, the emission color of the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N becomes gold, as in the effect execution example AKG13. When the display of the effect image is started, the light may be emitted in a light emitting color different from the gold color.

After the display of the production image as in the production execution example AKG13 is started, the sound of the music phrase PH01 is output by the speakers 8L and 8R as in the production execution example AKG21 as the music reproduction in the reach production of the SP reach A. Subsequently, as in the production execution example AKG22, the sound of the music phrase PH02 is output by the speakers 8L and 8R. After that, the sound of the music phrase PH03 is output by the speakers 8L and 8R as in the production execution example AKG23. In this way, by sequentially outputting the sounds of the plurality of music phrases PH01 to PH03 according to the progress of the production, it is sufficient that the entire music reproduction in the reach production of the SP reach A can be executed.

Production Execution Example A specific interlocking effect is executed along with the output of audio for playing music such as AKG21 to AKG23, and the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light with vibration. The specific interlocking effect executed together with the music reproduction in the reach effect of SP reach A is the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV43 and the emission color changing from blue to red in the period AKZ03 shown in FIG. 12-17, and further. It includes a specific light emission effect that changes from red to gold. Production execution example In AKG21, a specific light emission effect in which the emission color is blue is executed in response to the audio output of the music phrase PH01. In the production execution example AKG22, a specific light emission effect in which the emission color is red is executed in response to the audio output of the music phrase PH02. Production execution example In the AKG23, a specific light emission effect in which the emission color becomes gold is executed in response to the audio output of the music phrase PH03. As described above, it suffices to be able to execute a specific light emitting effect in which the emission color changes to a plurality of colors as the sounds of the plurality of music phrases PH01 to PH03 are sequentially output according to the progress of the effect.

FIG. 12-21 shows a case where the musical scale changes in order as the production progresses as the music reproduction execution example AKH01. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 12-21 (A), in the period AKZ03 in which the specific interlocking effect can be executed along with the music reproduction, each of do, re, mi, fa, so, la, shi, and do The sound corresponding to the scale is output by the speakers 8L and 8R. Here, the scale of the do that is output last may be one octave higher than the scale of the do that is output first.

The specific interlocking effect associated with such music reproduction is a light emission effect that is a specific light emission effect in which the emission color changes as shown in FIG. 12-21 (B), and a special emission effect based on the vibration pattern shown in FIG. 12-21 (C). It can be executed in the period AKZ03 corresponding to the music reproduction, including the vibration effect which is the vibration effect. The vibration effect shown in FIG. 12-21 (C) is a vibration mode in which the on period and the off period are alternately repeated a plurality of times according to the output period of the sound corresponding to each scale. As shown in FIG. 12-21 (B), the specific light emission effect associated with this special vibration effect is the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 according to the sound output period corresponding to each scale and the on period of the special vibration effect. The emission color of is changed in order between blue, red, and gold. During the period when the audio output is stopped and the period when the special vibration effect is off, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be turned off without emitting light. In the sound output period corresponding to each scale, the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect may be different for each scale. For example, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are continuously made to emit blue light for a period of the scale of the first output. Next, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light in a light emitting mode in which the first brightness having a high red light emission brightness and the second brightness having a low light emission brightness are alternately repeated during the period of the scale. After that, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light in a light emitting mode in which the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are switched between golden light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (off) during the period of the scale of Mi. In this way, by setting the light emission mode in which the light emission amount is different for each light emission color according to each scale, it is possible to appropriately diversify the production and improve the game entertainment.

The reach effect of SP reach A is executably controlled by using the control data read from the variable display effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. The variable display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 12-8 (A) is based on the lamp control data and the vibration control data, and is associated with a specific effect such as moving body movement, image display, and music reproduction in the reach effect of SP reach A. The specific interlocking effect is set to be executable. In the specific interlocking effect, a special vibration effect using any of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 can be executed. The vibration mode is different between the special vibration effect by any of these vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 and the vibration effect by the vibration pattern in the operation unit effect. In this way, the stick controller 31A and the stick controller 31A and It is possible to appropriately diversify the production using the operation member such as the push button 31B to improve the game entertainment.

When executing the operation unit effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 are used to emit light of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in accordance with the vibration effect of vibrating the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. A light emitting effect is executed. When executing the specific interlocking effect, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are moved by using the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 in accordance with the special vibration effect that vibrates the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. A specific light emission effect for emitting light is executed. A player who has been paying attention to the image display on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example, by performing an effect including vibration and light emission of an operation member such as an operation lever of the stick controller 31A and a push button 31B, can display the image. By recognizing the vibration and light emission of different operating members, the unexpectedness of the production is enhanced.

In the period AKZ01 shown in FIG. 12-17, a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV41 can be executed along with the operation of the movable body 32 which is the movable object operation in the reach effect of the SP reach A. In this way, by being able to execute the special vibration effect during the operation period of the movable body 32, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effect using the operating members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, and improve the game entertainment.

In the period AKZ04 shown in FIG. 12-17, a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed along with the big hit confirmation notification. In this way, by being able to execute a special vibration effect in response to the notification that the jackpot game state is controlled, the effect using operating members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified to improve the game entertainment. be able to.

The specific interlocking effect includes a specific light emitting effect due to the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emitting light in association with the special vibration effect by any of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44. Then, the light emitting mode such as the light emitting color is different between the light emitting effect associated with the vibration effect in the operation unit effect and the specific light emitting effect associated with the special vibration effect in the specific interlocking effect. In this way, by making the light emitting mode different according to the operation unit effect and the specific interlocking effect, the effect using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified to improve the game entertainment. Can be done.

As shown in FIGS. 12-10 and 12-11, among the operation unit effects that can be performed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is white. Including the case where the emission color becomes red or rainbow color different from white, when the emission color becomes white, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 is executed, and the emission color becomes red or rainbow color. In that case, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. As shown in FIGS. 12-12 and 12-13, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is white. Including the case where the emission color becomes red or rainbow color different from white, when the emission color becomes white, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is executed, and the emission color becomes red or rainbow color. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 is executed. Therefore, the timing of execution is determined by the vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation and the vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation. Along with being different, the vibration mode is different. Further, the emission colors are white and red depending on the vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timing AKT01 at the start of the pre-variation and the vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation. By becoming one of the rainbow colors, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is common. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, while the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common, so that the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be operated. It is possible to appropriately diversify the production using the members and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed in the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation is executed by the operation unit effect at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation based on the winning determination result that is the pre-reading determination result. It is executed in the variable display before the variable display to be performed. In this way, by making the timing at which the operation unit effect is executed different, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effect using the operation member such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, and improve the game entertainment.

As shown in FIGS. 12-10 and 12-11, among the operation unit effects that can be performed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is white. Including the case where the emission color becomes red or rainbow color different from white, when the emission color becomes white, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 is executed, and the emission color becomes red or rainbow color. In that case, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on whether the emission color is white or the emission color is red or rainbow. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is the same, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, so that the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are used. It is possible to appropriately diversify the production and improve the entertainment of the game. It should be noted that the vibration effect by the common vibration pattern AKV02 is executed in both the case where the emission color becomes red and the case where the emission color becomes rainbow color. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common between the case where the emission color is red and the case where the emission color is rainbow. As described above, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is common, the case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common may be provided regardless of the light emission mode of the light emission effect.

The continuous effect pattern used to execute the continuous advance notice effect is an operation unit effect pattern in which the emission color in the light emission effect is different depending on the case where the remaining number of times is other than "0" and the case where the remaining number of times is "0". Some include. For example, the continuous effect pattern AKD02 shown in FIG. 12-5 (A) includes an operation unit effect pattern AKC01 when the remaining number of times is "1" and an operation unit effect pattern AKC12 when the remaining number of times is "0". , Including. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white. Operation unit effect pattern The operation unit effect by the AKC12 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color is red. Therefore, the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation and the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation. The light emission mode is different between the two. In this way, by providing a case where the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the effect using the operating members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In the continuous effect pattern used to execute the continuous advance notice effect, the jackpot reliability of the operation unit effect pattern corresponding to the case where the remaining number of times is small is higher than the jackpot reliability of the operation unit effect pattern corresponding to the case where the remaining number of times is large. Is set to prevent it from becoming degraded. For example, in the continuous effect pattern shown in FIG. 12-5 (A), in the case of the operation unit effect pattern AKC02 when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation unit effect pattern when the remaining number of times is "0". As a result, it is set to prevent the operation unit effect pattern AKC11. If the operation unit effect pattern AKC03 is used when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation unit effect pattern AKC11 or the operation unit effect pattern AKC12 is used as the operation unit effect pattern when the remaining number of times is "0". It is set to prevent. This prevents the operation unit effect with low jackpot reliability from being executed later at the start of the target variation, even though the operation unit effect with high jackpot reliability is executed first at the start of the pre-variation. , It is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game without lowering the expectation of the player.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-10 and 12-11, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is the emission color. Including the case where the emission color becomes white and the case where the emission color becomes red or rainbow color different from white, and when the emission color becomes white, it emits light according to the on period and the off period of the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01. And non-light emission are repeated, and when the emission color turns red, light is continuously emitted according to the on period of the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02. As shown in FIGS. 12-12 and 12-13, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is white. Including the case where the emission color becomes red or rainbow color different from white, when the emission color becomes white, it emits light according to the on period of the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02, and the emission color becomes red. In that case, light is emitted intermittently according to the on period of the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03. In the vibration effect by the vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03, the setting of the on period is different from each other, so that the light emission mode such as the light emission period in the light emission effect is different. Even in this way, it is sufficient to provide a case where the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different.

(Modification example of featured parts 48AK to 50AK)
Regarding the operation unit effect, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Regarding the specific interlocking effect, the timing to be executed, the vibration mode of the special vibration effect, the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Regarding the operation unit effect, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the set value of the pachinko game machine 1, or the setting of the pachinko game machine 1. It may be determined in different proportions depending on the value. Regarding the specific interlocking effect, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the special vibration effect, the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, or the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be different. It may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value of. In addition, regarding the operation unit effect, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability may be different depending on any advantage regarding the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined in different proportions depending on such advantage. Regarding the specific interlocking effect, the timing of execution, the vibration mode of the special vibration effect, the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability may be different depending on any advantage regarding the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined in different proportions depending on such advantage.

When the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different and common, when the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different and common, and when the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different and common, the jackpot reliability is high. The combination of each case, such as a different case and a common case, can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the timing of execution is different and common between the operation unit effect and the specific interlocking effect, and when the vibration modes of the vibration effect and the special vibration effect are different, the light emission mode of the light emission effect and the specific light emission effect The combination of each case can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. When the vibration modes of the vibration effect are different, it is sufficient that the control load of the light emission effect can be reduced by sharing the light emission mode of the light emission effect. When the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different, it is sufficient that the control load of the vibration effect can be reduced by sharing the vibration mode of the vibration effect. When some vibration modes in the vibration effect are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the vibration effect by sharing the other vibration modes in the vibration effect. For example, when the vibration intensities in the vibration effect are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control load of the vibration effect by sharing the vibration cycle in the vibration effect. When some of the light emitting modes in the light emitting effect are different, it is sufficient that the control burden of the light emitting effect can be reduced by sharing the other light emitting modes in the light emitting effect. For example, when the emission colors in the light emission effect are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the light emission effect by sharing the light emission cycle in the light emission effect. It suffices if the control load can be reduced by the same standardization of the vibration mode of the special vibration effect and the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect.

In addition to the execution of the variable display, or instead of the execution of the variable display, when the game is controlled to an arbitrary game state such as a small hit game state or a big hit game state, the operation unit effect or the specific interlocking effect is executed. It may be possible. For example, when the player is controlled to the small hit game state, a predetermined ratio is determined according to the presence / absence of opening of the V winning attacker, the opening time, the number of times of opening, or the number of rounds of the big hit game state controlled after the occurrence of the V winning. It may be possible to execute the operation unit effect with. When controlled to the jackpot game state, the number of rounds is increased from the number of rounds previously notified in the jackpot game state, such as the presence / absence of time reduction control and probability variation control after the end of the jackpot game state, the end condition, and the rank up. It may be possible to execute the operation unit effect at a predetermined ratio depending on the presence or absence, the amount of increase, and the like. It may be possible to execute a specific interlocking effect along with a specific effect such as a movable object movement in a small hit game state or a big hit game state, image display, and music reproduction.

The specific effect capable of executing the specific interlocking effect may be an arbitrary effect that can be executed according to the execution of the variable display, or may be an arbitrary effect that can be executed regardless of the execution of the variable display. For example, unlike the reach effect, when a suggestion effect suggesting that the display result of the variable display becomes a "big hit" at a predetermined ratio and is controlled to the big hit game state is executed, it is specified in a part or all of the effect period. The interlocking effect may be executable.

When controlled to an arbitrary effect state, the operation unit effect or the specific interlocking effect may be executed. For example, when the effect is controlled to be the special effect mode, the operation unit effect or the specific interlocking effect is executed at a higher rate than when the effect state is controlled to be a different effect mode from the special effect mode. It may be possible.

The operating member capable of performing the effect of vibration or light emission may be any motion detecting member configured so as to be able to detect the motion of the player. For example, it may be a sensor that detects an operation on a jog dial that can be rotated, or it may be a sensor that detects a touch operation or a pressing operation on a touch panel. Further, a sensor capable of detecting a predetermined operation by the player, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. The result of photographing the player's hand or the like using a predetermined camera may be analyzed (video type motion capture) so that the movement by the player can be detected. In addition, any configuration that can mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detect a predetermined operation by the player may be used. A contact member that allows the player to come into contact with a hand or the like may be provided together with such a motion detection member, and the contact member may be vibrated or emitted light together with the motion detection member or separately from the motion detection member. ..

The vibration effect included in the operation unit effect can correspond to the vibration effect in the feature unit 48AK, the predetermined vibration effect in the feature unit 49AK, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect in the feature unit 50AK. Among the vibration effects included in the operation unit effect, the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation can correspond to the first vibration effect in the feature unit 50AK. Among the vibration effects included in the operation unit effect, the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation can correspond to the second vibration effect in the feature unit 50AK. The light emitting effect included in the operation unit effect is associated with the light emitting effect associated with the vibration effect of the feature unit 48AK, the light emitting effect associated with the predetermined vibration effect of the feature unit 49AK, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect of the feature unit 50AK. It can correspond to the light emission effect. Among the light emitting effects included in the operation unit effect, the light emitting effect associated with the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation is the light emission associated with the first vibration effect in the feature unit 50AK. It can correspond to the production. Of the light-emitting effects included in the operation unit effect, the light-emitting effect associated with the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target fluctuation is the light-emitting effect associated with the second vibration effect in the feature unit 50AK. Can be accommodated. The special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect can correspond to the special vibration effect in the feature portion 49AK.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned feature portions and modified examples, regarding the transition to the time saving state (high base state), the mode of shifting to the big hit state or the small hit state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 always operates is adopted. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a time saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the time saving state (high base state) without operating the special variable winning ball device 7 is performed. ) May be used.

As the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be a part of the out-of-time symbols or a part of the small hit symbols.

In addition, when performing a lottery process related to the derivation display of the time-saving symbol, the lottery may be executed by using a dedicated random number for the time-saving symbol lottery in these lottery processes, or a lottery random number of a missed symbol or a big hit symbol. The lottery may be performed using other lottery random numbers such as the lottery random number of the above, the lottery random number of the small hit symbol, the random number for determining the big hit lottery, and the lottery random number of the fall lottery.

Further, these time-saving symbols may be a plurality of types of symbols, and may be used in combination with other symbols such as small hit symbols and symbols displayed as missed symbols. In this case, it may be determined whether or not the time saving state is changed depending on the small hit symbol used together. However, if a time-saving symbol is won, the presence or absence of a transition to the time-saving state will not be drawn by lottery, and the number of time-savings will not be drawn.

Further, in the case of drawing a time-saving symbol and the set value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol does not change according to the set value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol in all the set values. Is the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special figure and the second special figure.

In addition, regarding the timing of random number acquisition when drawing a lottery for time-saving symbols, regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used, the starting port (first starting winning opening, It may be at the time of winning the second start winning opening).

In addition, regarding the winning when the time-saving symbol is drawn, when using a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number), the lottery result by the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used as the winning value, and the small hit symbol is used for the time-saving symbol lottery. When a random number is used, a specific small hit symbol random number value can be used as the winning value, and when a random number for the fall lottery judgment value is used for the lottery of the time saving symbol, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. A lottery using the above, for example, a time saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the time saving symbol may be won when the game ball passes through the time saving area.

In addition, in the case where the lottery of the time saving symbol is performed using the structure, when the small hit symbol also uses the time saving symbol, the variable display number (time saving number) of the time saving state does not change depending on the presence or absence of passing through the time saving area. To.

In addition, regarding the winning when the time-saving symbol lottery is performed, when the time-saving symbol lottery uses the missing symbol random number, the specific missing symbol random number value is used as the winning value, and when the jackpot symbol random number is used for the time-saving symbol lottery, it is specified. The jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, when these random values are used as winning values, performances other than the jackpot probability differ depending on the settings, so it is possible only if the set values cannot be changed.

Further, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be executed at the timing after the jackpot determination. In addition, the lottery of the time saving symbol is not executed in the time saving state (high base) or the high probability time regardless of the random number value used for the lottery, and is executed only in the low probability low base state. .. However, if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed in the state where the time-saving state is already set, even if the number of time-saving times is reset or the lottery is not performed, it may be determined for each gaming machine.

Further, regarding the number of time reductions when the time reduction symbol is derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of time reductions according to the winning value (symbol) and the game state. In addition, the conditions for granting the time reduction can be made different for each time reduction symbol.

Further, when the number of time reductions differs depending on the time reduction symbol, the time reduction symbol distribution lottery can be changed between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

Further, even when the same time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time saving times given may be different depending on the game state at that time. However, it is necessary that the game state is predetermined.

In addition, the lottery result of "0 times of time saving" can be included as the lottery result of the time saving symbol in the low probability low base state.

Further, the time-saving end symbol derivation lottery (time-saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of time reductions may be set to the number of times until the time-saving end symbol is derived and displayed after the time reduction starts, or until the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. That is, in principle, the number of time reductions may not be set and may be unlimited.

Further, the number of time reductions and the granting condition may be different between the time reduction state controlled by the time reduction symbol and the time reduction state controlled by the occurrence of a big hit.

Further, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing of being controlled to the time-saving state is the time when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where the small hit symbol random number is used for the lottery of the time saving symbol, when the small hit is won and the time saving state is entered, the end time of the small hit operation is controlled to the time saving state.

Further, in the case of a lottery using the structure, the timing controlled to the time saving state is the timing at the end of the operation of the structure in the gaming state (for example, the small hit state) in which the structure is operated.

Further, in the case of a gaming machine (so-called specified number of probability change machines (ST machines)) that is controlled to a high probability low base state over a predetermined variable display number after a big hit, the high probability low base state is reached when the game hall is opened. Therefore, the high-probability low-base state may be controlled to a time-saving state after the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed and ended.

In addition, when the time saving limiter function is installed and the time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time saving limiter is updated.

Further, the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol may be set to a time different from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature 48AK)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and is an operating means that can be operated by the player, a vibration effect executing means that can execute a vibration effect in which the operating means vibrates, and an operating means that accompanies the vibration effect. It is equipped with a light emitting effect executing means capable of executing a light emitting effect, and the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed. The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed, and the vibration of the vibration effect is performed according to the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect. The aspect is different. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a big hit game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration pattern included in the operation unit effect pattern. The vibration effect executing means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light emission effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 according to the light emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The light emitting effect executing means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The higher the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state when the vibration effect is executed may be, for example, the jackpot reliability according to the operation unit effect pattern or the like. The fact that the ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed is, for example, a big hit according to the emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern and the application of the operation unit effect pattern. It may be reliability. The vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, for example, the emission color and the vibration pattern AKV01 to AKV03 included in the operation unit effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 and AKC11 to AKC13.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which the variable display is started may be, for example, timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, and the like.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode. Here, the timing at which the variable display becomes the reach mode may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display is in the reach mode. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be able to execute the vibration effect at the timing when the notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled in an advantageous state is executed. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes a first light emitting mode and a second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting effect is the first light emitting mode. The vibration mode of the vibration effect may be different depending on whether the mode is executed or the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emitting mode may be, for example, a case where the light emitting color is white. The second light emitting mode may be, for example, when the light emitting color is red or iridescent. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect to improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is common between the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. The vibration mode may be different. Here, the common light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the notification effect is executed have a common ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when executed, and vibration. The mode may be different. Here, the common ratio of control to the advantageous state may be, for example, when the jackpot reliability is 100%. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different between the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is in the reach mode, and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the difference in light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white, red, or rainbow color, which is different from the case where the light emission color is pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, the case of vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect according to the timing.

The vibration mode may be different between the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. Here, the difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

A first light emitting means for causing the operation means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game are provided, and the predetermined effect is being executed. When the vibration effect is executed, the first light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting mode associated with the vibration effect, and the second light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode in accordance with the predetermined effect. There may be. Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1 or a button lamp 9B2. The second light emitting means may be, for example, an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, a right frame lamp 9N, or the like. The predetermined effect may be, for example, display of a background image or a character image. The predetermined effect executing means may be, for example, an image display device 5. The light emitting mode according to the vibration effect may be, for example, the emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The light emitting mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emitting mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emitting modes by the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means to improve the game entertainment.

The line-of-sight guidance effect executing means capable of executing the line-of-sight guidance effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operating means is provided, and the vibration effect executing means is provided at the first timing and the second timing after the first timing. , The vibration effect can be executed, and the vibration effect can be executed in a common vibration mode regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing. It may be possible to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing without executing the guidance effect. Here, the line-of-sight guidance effect executing means may be, for example, game effect lamps 9L, 9R, or the like. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1 and T2. The second timing may be, for example, timings T3 and T4. The common vibration mode may be, for example, when the vibration time is 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. When the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, for example, the timings T1 and T2 may be used in step 10SHS3. When the line-of-sight guidance effect can be executed at the second timing, for example, the timings T3 and T4 in step 10SHS3 may be used.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be suitably recognized, and the interest of the vibration effect can be sufficiently enhanced.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature 49AK)
It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player, and a vibration effect that can execute a predetermined vibration effect and a special vibration effect as an operation means that the player can operate and a vibration effect that the operation means vibrates. A predetermined vibration effect is provided with an execution means, a light emission effect execution means capable of executing a light emission effect that causes the operation means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect, and a specific effect execution means capable of executing the specific effect according to the progress of the game. The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed. The ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different depending on the above, and the vibration effect executing means can execute the special vibration effect according to the execution of the specific effect, and the vibration mode differs between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect. .. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a big hit game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The predetermined vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration pattern included in the operation unit effect pattern. The special vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 based on the vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern. The vibration effect executing means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit effect control pattern or the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. Just do it. The light emitting effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 according to the light emitting state color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The light emitting effect executing means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The specific effect may be, for example, a reach effect of SP reach A, a jackpot confirmation notification, a jackpot type lottery, or the like. The specific effect executing means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect process in step S172 based on the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS 203. The higher the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when the predetermined vibration effect is executed may be, for example, the jackpot reliability according to the operation unit effect pattern or the like. The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed, for example, depending on the emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern and the use of the operation unit effect pattern. The jackpot reliability may be sufficient. The ability to execute the special vibration effect may be, for example, the execution of the vibration effect during the periods AKZ01 to AKZ05. The difference in vibration mode between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which the variable display is started may be, for example, timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, and the like.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode. Here, the timing at which the variable display becomes the reach mode may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display is in the reach mode. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be able to execute a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the notification effect for notifying whether or not the vibration effect is controlled in an advantageous state is executed. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect associated with the predetermined vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes a first light emitting mode and a second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting effect is the first. The vibration mode of the predetermined vibration effect may be different depending on whether the light emission mode is executed or the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emitting mode may be, for example, a case where the light emitting color is white. The second light emitting mode may be, for example, when the light emitting color is red or iridescent. The different vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect to improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is common between the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. Yes, the vibration mode may be different. Here, the common light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

The ratio of the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode and the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the notification effect is executed is controlled to an advantageous state when executed is common. , The vibration mode may be different. Here, the common ratio of control to the advantageous state may be, for example, when the jackpot reliability is 100%. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different between the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is in the reach mode, and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the difference in light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white, red, or rainbow color, which is different from the case where the light emission color is pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, the case of vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect according to the timing.

The vibration mode may be different between the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode and the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. .. Here, the different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV11, AKV12, etc., which are different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

A first light emitting means for causing the operation means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game are provided, and the predetermined effect is being executed. When a predetermined vibration effect is executed, the first light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting mode associated with the predetermined vibration effect, and the second light emitting means emits light in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect. It may be possible. Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1 or a button lamp 9B2. The second light emitting means may be, for example, an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, a right frame lamp 9N, or the like. The predetermined effect may be, for example, display of a background image or a character image. The predetermined effect executing means may be, for example, an image display device 5. The light emitting mode according to the vibration effect may be, for example, the emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The light emitting mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emitting mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emitting modes by the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means to improve the game entertainment.

The line-of-sight guidance effect executing means capable of executing the line-of-sight guidance effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operating means is provided, and the vibration effect executing means is provided at the first timing and the second timing after the first timing. , The predetermined vibration effect can be executed, and the predetermined vibration effect can be executed in a common vibration mode regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, and the line-of-sight guidance effect executing means is the first timing. In, the line-of-sight guidance effect may not be executed, and the line-of-sight guidance effect may be executed before the predetermined vibration effect is executed at the second timing. Here, the line-of-sight guidance effect executing means may be, for example, game effect lamps 9L, 9R, or the like. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1 and T2. The second timing may be, for example, timings T3 and T4. The common vibration mode may be, for example, when the vibration time is 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. When the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, for example, the timings T1 and T2 may be used in step 10SHS3. When the line-of-sight guidance effect can be executed at the second timing, for example, the timings T3 and T4 in step 10SHS3 may be used.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be suitably recognized, and the interest of the vibration effect can be sufficiently enhanced.

When the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state may be higher than when the specific effect is executed. Here, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot expectation of 50% or more, which is higher than when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed.
In such a configuration, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the predetermined vibration effect and improve the game interest.

The specific effect executing means can execute an effect of operating the movable member as a specific effect, and the vibration effect executing means may be able to execute a special vibration effect during the operation period of the movable member. Here, the effect of operating the movable member may be, for example, the effect execution examples AKG01 to AKG03. The special vibration effect during the operation period of the movable member may be, for example, a vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV41.
In such a configuration, the vibration effect can be diversified to improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing a special vibration effect with the notification that the vibration effect is controlled to an advantageous state. Here, the notification that the control is performed in an advantageous state may be, for example, a big hit confirmation notification. The special vibration effect associated with this notification may be, for example, a vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV44.
In such a configuration, the vibration effect can be diversified to improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting effect executing means can execute a specific light emitting effect that causes the operating means to emit light in accordance with the special vibration effect, and the light emitting mode differs between the light emitting effect associated with the predetermined vibration effect and the specific light emitting effect associated with the special vibration effect. May be good. Here, the specific light emission effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 based on the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern. The light emission mode may be different, for example, when the emission color is white, red, or rainbow color, which is different from the case where the emission color changes from blue, gold, or blue to gold via red.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect and improve the game entertainment.

When the special vibration effect is executed, a limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined vibration effect may be provided. Here, the limiting means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 when determining the effect of the operation unit in step AKS202.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the vibration effect and improve the game entertainment.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature 50AK)
It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and can execute the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect as the operation means that can be operated by the player and the vibration effect that the operation means vibrates. It is provided with a vibration effect executing means and a light emitting effect executing means capable of executing a light emitting effect that causes the operating means to emit light in association with the vibration effect, and the vibration effect is executed more when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed. The ratio controlled to the advantageous state is high, and the ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect, and the timing of execution in the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect. However, the vibration mode is different, and the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a big hit game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The first vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration patterns AKV01 and AKV02 included in the operation unit effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03. The second vibration effect may be, for example, driving the drive motor 131 by the vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 included in the operation unit effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13. The vibration effect executing means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light emission effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 according to the light emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The light emitting effect executing means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The higher the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state when the vibration effect is executed may be, for example, the jackpot reliability according to the operation unit effect pattern or the like. The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect, for example, the jackpot reliability according to the emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern may be sufficient. The timing of execution differs between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect may be, for example, the timings of the start of the pre-variation, AKT01 to AKT03, which are different from the timings of the start of the target variation, AKT11. The difference in vibration mode between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect may be, for example, a vibration pattern AKV01 different from the vibration pattern AKV03. The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is common to the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect, for example, when the emission colors included in the operation unit effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 and AKC11 to AKC13 are white, red, or rainbow. And so on.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect executing means may be able to execute the second vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which the variable display is started may be, for example, the timing AKT11 at which the target variation starts.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be able to execute the second vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode. Here, the timing at which the variable display becomes the reach mode may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be able to execute the second vibration effect at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display is in the reach mode. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be able to execute the second vibration effect at the timing when the notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled in an advantageous state is executed. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the second vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes a first light emitting mode and a second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting effect is the first. The vibration mode of the second vibration effect may be different depending on whether the light emission effect is executed in the first light emission mode or the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emitting mode may be, for example, a case where the light emitting color is white. The second light emitting mode may be, for example, when the light emitting color is red or iridescent. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect to improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. It is common and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the common light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

The second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the notification effect is executed have a common ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when executed. The vibration mode may be different. Here, the common ratio of control to the advantageous state may be, for example, when the jackpot reliability is 100%. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

Even if the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different between the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode, the vibration mode is different. good. Here, the difference in light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white, red, or rainbow color, which is different from the case where the light emission color is pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, the case of vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect according to the timing.

The vibration mode is different between the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. May be good. Here, the difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

A first light emitting means for causing the operation means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game are provided, and the predetermined effect is being executed. When the second vibration effect is executed, the first light emitting means can emit light in the light emitting mode associated with the second vibration effect, and the second light emitting means is capable of emitting light in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode in accordance with the predetermined effect. It may be possible to emit light with. Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1 or a button lamp 9B2. The second light emitting means may be, for example, an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, a right frame lamp 9N, or the like. The predetermined effect may be, for example, display of a background image or a character image. The predetermined effect executing means may be, for example, an image display device 5. The light emitting mode according to the vibration effect may be, for example, the emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The light emitting mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emitting mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emitting modes by the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means to improve the game entertainment.

The line-of-sight guidance effect executing means capable of executing the line-of-sight guidance effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operating means is provided, and the vibration effect executing means is provided at the first timing and the second timing after the first timing. , The second vibration effect can be executed, and the second vibration effect can be executed in a common vibration mode regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing. The line-of-sight guidance effect may not be executed at the first timing, and the line-of-sight guidance effect may be executed before the second vibration effect is executed at the second timing. Here, the line-of-sight guidance effect executing means may be, for example, game effect lamps 9L, 9R, or the like. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1 and T2. The second timing may be, for example, timings T3 and T4. The common vibration mode may be, for example, when the vibration time is 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. When the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, for example, the timings T1 and T2 may be used in step 10SHS3. When the line-of-sight guidance effect can be executed at the second timing, for example, the timings T3 and T4 in step 10SHS3 may be used.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be suitably recognized, and the interest of the vibration effect can be sufficiently enhanced.

The vibration effect executing means may be able to execute the first vibration effect in the variable display before the variable display in which the second vibration effect is executed, based on the pre-reading determination result. Here, the variable display before the variable display corresponding to the hold storage may be, for example, a variable display that is pre-variable.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the first vibration effect includes a first vibration light emitting mode and a second vibration light emitting mode different from the first vibration light emitting mode, and the light emitting effect is the first vibration light emitting mode. The vibration mode of the first vibration effect may be different depending on whether the light emission effect is executed in the second vibration light emission mode. Here, the light emitting mode at the time of the first vibration may be, for example, a case where the light emitting color is white. The light emitting mode at the time of the second vibration may be, for example, a case where the light emitting color is red or rainbow color. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of a vibration pattern AKV01 different from the vibration pattern AKV02.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect to improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting mode may be different between the light emitting effect associated with the first vibration effect and the light emitting effect associated with the second vibration effect. Here, the light emission mode is different, for example, when the remaining number of times is other than "0" according to the continuous effect pattern, the emission color of the operation unit effect pattern is different from the case where the residual number of times is "0". All you need is.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect and improve the game entertainment.

(Explanation relating to the association of the feature portions 48AK to 50AK)
Each configuration of the feature portions 48AK to 50AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration of the other feature portions. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention also has an advantage when the first identification information is variably displayed and the second identification information is variably displayed and a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A gaming machine that can be controlled to a state (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and is predetermined as an operating means that can be operated by the player (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.) and a vibration effect in which the operating means vibrates. Vibration effect (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration pattern included in the operation unit effect pattern) and special vibration effect (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern) can be executed. Vibration effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit effect control pattern or the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203). , A light emitting effect executing means (for example, step AKS203) capable of executing a light emitting effect (for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 according to the light emitting color included in the operation unit effect pattern) that causes the operating means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect. The effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step S172, and the specific effect (for example, SP reach A) according to the progress of the game. Production control that executes the variable display effect processing in step S172 based on the specific effect execution means (for example, the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) that can execute the reach effect, the jackpot confirmation notification, the jackpot type lottery, etc. CPU 120, etc.), and the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed (for example, an operation unit effect pattern, etc.). The ratio of control to the advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed (for example, operation). The emission color included in the part effect pattern and the jackpot reliability according to the use of the operation unit effect pattern, etc.), and the vibration effect execution means can execute the special vibration effect in association with the execution of the specific effect (for example, a period). (Execution of vibration effect in AKZ01 to AKZ05, etc.), the vibration mode of the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect. (For example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44),
Moreover,
Step 100 IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control computer 100, as shown in FIG. 8-17, are state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. The part to be executed, as shown in FIG. 8-19, the part to execute step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the updating means (for example, the part where the numerical information can be updated based on the execution of the variable display). As shown in FIG. 8-13, the game control computer 100 includes a portion for executing step 100 IWS71), and the state control means has a specific value in which the numerical information updated by the update means corresponds to a special number of times. As a result, it is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, the portion in which step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100, FIG. 8-17. As shown, the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means executes the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. A game machine whose numerical information is updated depending on the case (for example, a portion where step 100 IWS 71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-13) can be mentioned.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect. Further, the relief of the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, even if the game state changes and the variable display of any identification information is executed, the numerical information is continuously updated, so that the player can be easily rescued and the motivation for the game is increased. Can be done.

That is, attention is paid to the light emitting mode in which the predetermined vibration effect is controlled in an advantageous state at a high rate, whether or not the vibration effect is executed at the execution timing, and whether or not the special vibration effect is executed in association with the execution of the specific effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game, and the numerical information is updated depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed. For example, it becomes easier for the numerical information to reach the special number of times than when the numerical information is updated only when either the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information is executed. Can be easily rescued, which can increase the motivation to play. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that easily attracts the interest of the player when installed in the amusement park and can improve the player's motivation to play.

Further, the vibration effect and the numerical information of the updating means may be associated with each other. For example, the vibration effect may be executed when the numerical information reaches a special number of times. By doing so, it becomes possible to notify in an easy-to-understand manner that the specified number of times has been reached.

Further, as another example of the gaming machine capable of improving the interest, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A state control that can be controlled to an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) based on the fact, and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state. Means (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-17, step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100, a portion for executing step 100IWS173, and as shown in FIG. 14-19, step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed. The part to be executed) and the updating means (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part to execute step 100 IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) in which the numerical information can be updated based on the execution of the variable display. , And the state control means can control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times of execution of the variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a portion for executing step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 14-17, step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100. The updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, in FIG. 14-13). As shown, a predetermined suggestion effect executing means (for example, a figure) capable of executing a predetermined suggestion effect (for example, a notice effect) when the variable display is being executed, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step 100 IWS71). As shown in 14-49, a special notification effect (for example, a portion for executing step 108 IWS811 in the effect control CPU 120) and a special notification effect for notifying that the control of the special state is started based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, The background image changes as shown in FIGS. 14-52 (C1) and 14-52 (C2), blackout occurs at the start of fluctuation as shown in FIG. 14-53 (B), and as shown in FIG. 14-54 (C). Special notification performance that can execute (blackout at the end of fluctuation, etc.) The output execution means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-23, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 100 IWS638) is further provided, and the predetermined suggestion effect execution means is provided in the period before the special condition is satisfied. The ratio of executing the predetermined suggestion effect is common (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-44, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A. (See FIG. 14-50) Examples include gaming machines. A form example of this gaming machine will be described below as another form example.

(Example of other forms)

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 13, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S901). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S902). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S903). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S903; Yes), the initialization process (step S908) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S909). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S903; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S904). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game (including various flags, various timer states, etc.), as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S904, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S904; No), the initialization process (step S908) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S904; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal or not (step). S905). In step S905, for example, the parity bit and the checksum are used to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S905; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S908) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S905; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S906) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S907). In accordance with this, the effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and the effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S9010). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9011), and the interrupt is enabled (step S9012). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

Next, the gaming machine according to the first embodiment in the feature unit 108IW of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-1 to 14-47.

(Board composition)
FIG. 14-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the feature portion 108IW. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 108IW, in addition to the board surface configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1, as shown in FIG. 14-1, a right-handed LED 100IW10 is provided below the normal drawing hold indicator 25C. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 14-1, a right-handed notification LED 100IW20 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-1, the fourth symbol display devices 100IW21a and 21b are provided on the left side and the right side of the image display device 5, respectively. Of these, the fourth symbol display 100IW21a provided on the left side of the image display device 5 is a display that executes the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol. Further, the fourth symbol display 100IW21b provided on the right side of the image display device 5 is a display that executes the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol. In this example, the fourth symbol display 100IW21a and 21b are composed of two LEDs arranged one above the other, and the two LEDs are alternately turned on and off to execute the variable display of the fourth symbol. NS.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-1, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 108IW, instead of the passing gate 41 shown in FIG. 1, a passing game ball can pass to the right side of the image display device 5. A gate 100 IW41 is provided. In the feature unit 108IW, the normal drawing game is executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 100IW41. Therefore, in the feature unit 108IW, since the probability of hitting a normal figure increases in the probability variation state or the time saving state, it is advantageous to perform the firing operation (right-handed operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. On the other hand, in the main feature unit 108IW, in the normal state, it is advantageous to perform the firing operation (left-handed operation) aiming at the left side of the game area.

(Big hit probability, time saving loss probability)
14-2 and 14-3 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the jackpot probability and the time saving loss probability for each set value. Of these, FIG. 14-2 shows the jackpot probability and the time saving loss probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. Further, FIG. 14-3 shows the jackpot probability and the time saving loss probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. In this example, it is configured so that it can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different), and when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to check the current setting value or change the setting value by executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process. Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-2 and 14-3, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". Not only when the setting can be changed in 6 steps, for example, the setting may be changed in 2 to 5 steps, or the setting may be changed in 7 or more steps.

As shown in FIGS. 14-2 (A) and 14-3 (A), the non-probability change state (low) is performed both when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In the probability state (normal state or time saving state), the setting value "1" is the lowest with the jackpot probability "205/65536" (about 1/319), which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "242/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is high (about 1/270), which is the most advantageous setting for the player.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-2 (B) and 14-3 (B), the probability variation state (in both the case of executing the variation display of the first special symbol and the case of executing the variation display of the second special symbol ( In the high probability state), the setting value "1" is the lowest (about 1/32) with the jackpot probability "2050/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "2420/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is high (about 1/27), which is the most advantageous setting for the player. Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-2 and 14-3, in this example, the jackpot probability is increased 10 times in the probabilistic state as compared with the non-probability state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-2, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" is set (furthermore, whether it is in a probabilistic state). Regardless of whether it is in a non-probability state), the time saving loss probability is constant as "164/65536" (about 1/400). Further, as shown in FIG. 14-3, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, it does not matter which of the set values "1" to "6" is set (furthermore, whether it is in a probabilistic state). Regardless of whether it is in a non-probability state), the time saving loss probability is constant as "328/65536" (about 1/200). That is, in this example, the determination value for determining the time reduction is the same regardless of the set value.

As shown in FIGS. 14-2 and 14-3, even when the jackpot probability is different depending on the set value as described above and the time reduction probability is set to be constant, no time reduction is lost. By making the probabilities different for the set values "1" to "6", the number of determined values for each set value may be matched.

In addition, it may be configured to be controllable to a small hit game state. When the small hit is also determinable, for example, the small hit probability may be constant regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6".

Further, when the small hit is also configured to be determinable, it may be configured so that there is a small hit with a time reduction that is controlled to a time reduction state triggered by the small hit.

The examples shown in FIGS. 14-2 and 14-3 are examples, and various modes can be considered as methods for setting the jackpot probability and the time saving loss probability. For example, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 14-2 and 14-3, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the time saving loss probability is about 1/400, and the variation of the second special symbol. When the display is executed, the case where the time saving loss probability is about 1/200 is shown, but conversely, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the time saving loss probability is about 1/200. When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, the time saving loss probability may be configured to be about 1/400.

(Big hit type judgment table)
FIG. 14-4 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 14-4 (A) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 14-4 (B) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 14-4 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on a random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. It is a table referred to for determining the type of jackpot to be either "normal jackpot", "probability change jackpot", or "sudden probability variation jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 14-4 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on a random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. It is a table referred to for determining the type of jackpot to be either "normal jackpot", "probability change jackpot", or "sudden probability variation jackpot".

The "normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot game state of 15 rounds and shifts to a time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state. When the state shifts to the time saving state, the time saving state is maintained until the fluctuation display of 100 times is finished or the next big hit occurs.

The "probability change jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the jackpot game state of 15 rounds and shifts to the probability variation state after the end of the jackpot game state. When the state shifts to the probabilistic state, the probabilistic state is maintained until the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed or the next big hit occurs. In this example, when it is controlled to the probabilistic state, it is also controlled to the time saving state.

The "sudden probability change jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the jackpot game state of two rounds and shifts to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state. When the state shifts to the probabilistic state, the probabilistic state is maintained until the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed or the next big hit occurs. In this example, when it is controlled to the probabilistic state, it is also controlled to the time saving state.

In this example, in the case of "normal jackpot" and "probability variable jackpot", 29 seconds have passed or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of games in each of the 15 rounds during the jackpot game. The large winning opening is controlled to be open until the ball wins (therefore, the long-term opening of the large winning opening is performed 15 times). On the other hand, in the case of a "sudden change jackpot", the jackpot is controlled to be open for an extremely short 0.5 seconds in each of the two rounds of the jackpot game (hence, a short period of time for the jackpot). Opening is done twice). Therefore, in the case of a "sudden change jackpot", it is practically impossible to expect a prize in the big prize opening, and it can be made to appear as if the player suddenly changed to the probability change state.

As shown in FIG. 14-4 (A), in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and a big hit is obtained, it is determined as a "normal big hit" with a probability of 40%, and 40%. It is determined to be a "probability change jackpot" with a probability, and is determined to be a "sudden change jackpot" with a probability of 20%. Further, as shown in FIG. 14-4 (B), in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and a big hit is obtained, it is determined as a "normal big hit" with a probability of 40%, 55. With a% probability, it is determined as a "probability change jackpot", and with a 5% probability, it is determined as a "sudden change jackpot".

(Time saving type judgment table)
FIG. 14-5 is an explanatory diagram showing a time saving type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 14-5 (A) shows a specific example of the time saving type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 14-5 (B) shows a specific example of the time saving type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 14-5 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on a random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a symbol that is out of time. , It is a table referred to for determining the time saving type as one of "time saving loss A", "time saving loss B", or "time saving loss C".

As shown in FIG. 14-5 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on a random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a symbol that is out of time. , It is a table referred to for determining the time saving type as one of "time saving loss A", "time saving loss B", or "time saving loss C".

As shown in FIGS. 14-5 (A) and 14-5 (B), in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the time is out of time, and when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and the time is shortened. In any case of loss, there is a 1/3 chance that it will be determined as "time saving loss A", a 1/3 probability that it will be determined as "time saving loss B", and a 1/3 probability that it will be determined as "time saving loss C". Is decided.

In the example shown in FIG. 14-5, various modes can be considered as a method of determining the time saving type. For example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is determined to be out of time, the probability of determining "time reduction out of C" is increased, while when the variation display of the second special symbol is determined to be out of time, "time reduction is out". The determination ratio of the time saving type may be different between the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol, such as increasing the determination probability of "missing A".

Further, for example, in the case where the time reduction can be determined even during the time reduction state via the relief time reduction, the time reduction counter or the like may be uniformly configured so as not to be overwritten even if the time reduction is lost, or the time reduction deviation symbol may be configured. Depending on the type, the time reduction counter or the like may be overwritten or not overwritten.

FIG. 14-6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the time saving type. As shown in FIG. 14-6, in this example, in the normal state, the time reduction state is controlled to 100 times when the time reduction is out of A, and the time reduction is 50 times when the time reduction is out of B. It is controlled to the time saving state of 30 times, and when it becomes "time saving out of C", it is controlled to the time saving state of 30 times. Further, in the time saving state, when "time saving loss A" occurs, the time saving state is controlled until the next big hit, and when "time saving loss B" occurs, the time saving state is controlled to 200 times, and "time saving loss". When it becomes "C", it is controlled to the time saving state of 100 times of time saving. Further, in the normal state and the time saving state, when the relief time is shortened, the time saving state is controlled to 800 times.

In this example, as will be described later, the time reduction may not be determined in the probabilistic state. Further, in this example, as will be described later, there is no case where the time reduction is determined to be out of time even in the time reduction state due to the relief time reduction. Further, in this example, as will be described later, if a big hit does not occur even after finishing the variation display of 800 times after being controlled to the time saving state of 800 times by the relief time saving, the relief time is shortened again. It is controlled to a time saving state (relief time saving) of 800 times. Therefore, the number of time reductions due to the relief time reduction is substantially until the next big hit occurs.

Here, the relief time reduction arrival rate for each set value will be described. The relief time reduction arrival rate is the rate controlled to the time reduction state via the relief time reduction. Since the time saving state via the relief time saving is controlled by fluctuating n times (800 times in this example) without being controlled by the jackpot game state, the relief time saving arrival rate K is as follows. It can be calculated in this way.
K = (1-ML) n = {(P-1) ÷ P} n
(K = Relief time reduction arrival rate, P = Big hit probability ML denominator, n = Number of operations)

Specifically, for example, if the set value is "1", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/319, so the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 8.1%, and if the set value is "2", the jackpot probability ML is Since it is about 1/310, the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 7.5%, and if the set value is "3", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/300, so the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 6.9%. If the set value is "4", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/290, so the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 6.3%, and if the set value is "5", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/280. The relief time reduction arrival rate K is 5.7%, and if the set value is "6", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/270, so the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 5.1%.

In this way, the lower the jackpot probability is, the higher the relief time reduction arrival rate is. As a result, the player can be rescued even if the set value has a low jackpot probability.

Further, the method of controlling the number of time reductions in the case of a time reduction deviation is not limited to that shown in FIG. 14-6. For example, even when the same time-saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed, it may be configured to control so that the number of time-savings is 100 times in the normal state and the time-saving state. Further, for example, even when the same time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed, the time saving number is controlled to 100 times in the normal state, and the time saving number is controlled to 0 times in the time saving state (that is,). It may be configured to fall from the time saving state to the normal state). Various modes can be considered as a method of controlling the number of time reductions in the case where the time reduction is lost.

(Variation pattern table)
14-7 and 14-8 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature portion 108IW. Of these, FIG. 14-7 (A) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table A for big hits. Further, FIG. 14-7 (B) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state. Further, FIG. 14-7 (C) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table C for the deviation in the time saving state controlled via the jackpot. Further, FIG. 14-7 (D) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table D for deviation in the time reduction state controlled via the time reduction deviation.

Further, FIG. 14-8 (E) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table E for the deviation in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving. Further, FIGS. 14-8 (F) and 14-8 (G) show specific examples of fluctuation pattern tables F and G for deviation within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened. Of these, the fluctuation pattern table F shown in FIG. 14-8 (F) is a fluctuation pattern table for immediately before the relief time reduction, which is selected when the number of reserved storages (for example, the total number of reserved storages) is 3 or less. Further, the fluctuation pattern table F shown in FIG. 14-8 (G) is a fluctuation pattern table for immediately before the relief time reduction, which is selected when the number of reserved storages (for example, the total number of reserved storages) is 4 or more.

Further, FIG. 14-8 (H) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table H for deviation in the probabilistic state. However, in this example, even in the probabilistic change state or the time saving state, when the number of reserved storages is not 1 or more (when there is no reserved storage), the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern table B.

Further, FIG. 14-8 (I) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table I for removing the fluctuation display that shortens the relief time. Further, FIG. 14-8 (J) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table J for the jackpot of the fluctuation display that shortens the relief time.

As shown in FIG. 14-7 (A), in this example, in the case of a big hit, the fluctuation patterns include the fluctuation pattern PB2-1 (normal reach), the fluctuation pattern PB2-2 (super reach α), and the fluctuation pattern PB2. It is determined to be one of -3 (super reach β).

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-7 (B), in this example, when the deviation occurs in the normal state, the fluctuation patterns include the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) and the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach). , The fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) are determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-7 (C), in this example, when there is a deviation in the time saving state controlled via the jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) and the fluctuation. It is determined to be one of pattern PA1-3 (shortening variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-7 (D), in this example, when the deviation occurs in the time reduction state controlled via the time reduction deviation, the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening fluctuation), It is determined to be one of the fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation), the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (E), in this example, when there is a deviation in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortened fluctuation) is used as the fluctuation pattern. , The fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) are determined.

As shown in FIGS. 14-7 (C), 14-7 (D), and 14-8 (E), in this example, the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) and fluctuations occur in the time-saving state. The rate at which the pattern PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation) and the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortened fluctuation) are determined is high, and the average fluctuation time is shorter than in the normal state. Further, even in the same time saving state, in the time saving state controlled via the time saving deviation, the selection probability of the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) is 80 as compared with the time saving state controlled via the jackpot. It is as high as%, and the average fluctuation time is short. In addition, in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortened fluctuation) is as high as 99%, which is the same as in the time saving state controlled via the time saving deviation or the jackpot. In comparison, the average fluctuation time is even shorter. With such a configuration, when the number of executions of the fluctuation display reaches a predetermined number of times (900 times in this example) and the relief time is shortened (that is, when a big hit does not occur for a long period of time), the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (Extremely shortened fluctuation) increases the rate at which the fluctuation display is executed, and shortens the period until the next big hit is controlled, so that the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-7 (C), 14-7 (D), and 14-8 (E), the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened variation) is compared with that of this example. The selection probability is as high as 80%, and the average fluctuation time is short. Further, in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) are different from the time saving state controlled via the time saving loss or the jackpot. ) Will not be determined and super reach will not be performed. That is, in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, unlike the time saving state controlled via the time saving loss or the jackpot, the super reach is not executed at the time of the loss, and the average fluctuation time becomes shorter. There is. With such a configuration, when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a predetermined number of times (900 times in this example) and the relief time is shortened (that is, when a big hit has not occurred for a long period of time), the super reach is out of order. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest. In addition, since the period until the next big hit is controlled is shortened, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest. In this example, in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, the super reach is not executed at the time of disconnection, but it may be configured to be executed. For example, in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, the super reach may be executed at a lower rate than in the time saving state controlled via the time saving loss or the jackpot. With such a configuration, when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a predetermined number of times (900 times in this example) and the relief time is shortened (that is, when a big hit has not occurred for a long period of time), the super reach will be missed. Since the ratio of becoming is low, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (F), in this example, if the time is out of the range within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the number of reserved storages (for example, the total number of reserved storages) is 3 or less. For example, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be either fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation) or fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), and the probability of being determined to fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation) is 95%. It's getting higher. Further, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (G), in this example, if the time is out of the range within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the number of reserved storages (for example, the total number of reserved storages) is 4 or more. For example, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be either the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), and the probability of being determined to the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) is 95%. It's getting higher.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-8 (F) and 14-8 (G), if the deviation is within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 It is not determined to be (super reach β), and super reach is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the variable display of the super reach is executed in the period immediately before the relief time is shortened but the jackpot is not obtained. In addition, even if the deviation occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) may be determined. For example, within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the rate is lower than the period before the 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time (that is, the period using the fluctuation pattern table C shown in FIG. 14-7 (C)). At the time of disconnection, the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) may be determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (H), in this example, when the deviation occurs in the probabilistic state, the fluctuation patterns include the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) and the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach). ), The fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

As shown in FIG. 14-8 (H), in this example, the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation) is determined with a high probability of 90% in the probabilistic state, and the average fluctuation time is further averaged than in the time-shortened state. Is getting shorter.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (I), in this example, the variation display is such that the relief time is shortened, and if it is out of alignment, the variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern PA3-1 (rushing out). NS. That is, the variation pattern PA3-1 (rushing off) is a variation pattern dedicated to the relief time reduction, which is not used for the variation display that does not result in the relief time reduction, but is used only for the variation display (disappearance) that results in the relief time reduction. In this example, when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 (rushing off), as will be described later, a time saving rushing effect (for example, a time saving rushing effect) for notifying that the fluctuation pattern is controlled to the time saving state (that is, the relief time saving) is performed. (See FIGS. 14-38 (G) and (H)) is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the rescue time is shortened and the time is controlled to be shortened, and it is possible to improve the interest when the rescue time is shortened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (J), in this example, if the relief time is shortened and the jackpot is missed, the fluctuation pattern PA3-2 (rushing pretending jackpot) is determined as the fluctuation pattern. Will be done. That is, the fluctuation pattern PA3-2 (rushing fake jackpot) is a fluctuation pattern dedicated to the relief time reduction, which is not used for the fluctuation display that does not result in the relief time reduction, but is used only for the fluctuation display (big hit) that results in the relief time reduction. In this example, when the fluctuation pattern PA3-2 (rushing masquerading jackpot) is determined, a time saving rushing effect (for example, FIG. 14) for notifying that the time saving state (that is, relief time saving) is controlled is determined, as will be described later. -38 (G), (H)) and the same mode of effect (see, for example, FIG. 14-41 (G')), and then an effect of notifying that a big hit will occur (for example, FIG. 14-41). (See (H')) is executed. With such a configuration, after the player once recognizes that the relief time has been shortened, it is notified that a big hit will be made, so that the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved.

The method of setting the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIGS. 14-7 and 14-8 is an example, and various modes can be considered. For example, when the time reduction state occurs and the time reduction state is controlled again during the time reduction state, it is the same as the variation pattern table C for the time reduction state controlled via the jackpot shown in FIG. 14-7 (C). The table may be used to determine the variation pattern.

Further, for example, only when the time saving state is continued until the next big hit among the cases where the time saving is lost (in this example, when the time saving is lost A during the time saving state), via the big hit shown in FIG. 14-7 (C). The fluctuation pattern may be determined by using the same table as the fluctuation pattern table C for the deviation in the time saving state controlled by.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (E), the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 of the extremely shortened fluctuation of 1.5 seconds is high during the time saving state via the relief time saving, and the fluctuation display is displayed. Since the digestion speed is fast, there are few types of feasible advance notice effects and look-ahead advance notice effects. For example, in the case of a time saving state via the relief time saving, an effect of displaying an effect image at the edge of the display screen of the image display device 5, an effect of turning on a lamp or an LED, a predetermined effect sound, or a normal effect. An effect that outputs different fluctuating stop sounds is executed.

Further, in this example, the case where the fluctuation pattern table E dedicated to the time saving state via the relief time saving is provided, but the fluctuation pattern table E dedicated to the time saving state via the relief time saving is not provided, for example, via the jackpot. The fluctuation pattern may be determined by using the fluctuation pattern table C (see FIG. 14-7 (C)) in the time saving state.

Further, in this example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, the case of switching to the fluctuation pattern tables F and G (see FIGS. 14-8 (F) and (G)) is shown. , Not limited to such aspects. For example, the fluctuation pattern table may be switched so that the reach ratio gradually decreases as the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened, or the number of divisions such as 100 or 200 remaining fluctuations. Only in the case of, the fluctuation pattern table may be switched so that the remaining number of fluctuations can be suggested.

Further, in this example, different fluctuation pattern tables are used (that is, the average fluctuation time is different) depending on the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the missed time saving, and the time saving state via the relief time saving. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the same fluctuation pattern table may be used in both cases (that is, the average fluctuation time is the same), and the time saving state via the relief time saving is better than the time saving state via the jackpot or the missed time saving. However, the average fluctuation time may be long.

(Direction control command)
14-9 and 14-10 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. In the examples shown in FIGS. 14-9 and 14-10, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command for designating a variation pattern of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. (Fluctuating pattern command). The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when any of the commands 80XX (H) is received, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is out of line (no time reduction). be.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command) (time saving A designation command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the time saving deviation A. be. Command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command) (time saving B designation command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the time reduction deviation B. be. Command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command) (time saving C designation command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the time saving out of time C. be.

The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (normal jackpot designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is a normal jackpot. The command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (probability variation jackpot designation command)) for designating the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command as the probability variation jackpot. The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (sudden probability change jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is suddenly changed to the probability change jackpot. ..

The command 95XX (H) is an effect control command (relief time reduction number 1 designation command) for designating the remaining number of fluctuations (number of times of 126 times or less) until the relief time is shortened. In this example, the value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations (the number of times of 126 times or less) until the relief time is shortened is set in the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 1 designated command. For example, when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 1, the command 9501 (H) is transmitted as the relief time reduction number 1 designation command, and when the remaining number of fluctuations is 126, the command is transmitted. The command 957E (H) is transmitted as a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command. In this example, when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 127 times or more, the maximum value of 7F (H) is set in the EXT data, and the command is uniformly designated as the relief time reduction number 1 designation command. The command 957F (H) is transmitted to.

The command 96XX (H) is an effect control command (relief time reduction number 2 designation command) for designating the remaining number of fluctuations (number of times in units of 100 times) until the relief time is shortened. In this example, a value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations (number of times in units of 100 times) until the relief time is shortened is set in the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 2 designated command. For example, when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100, the command 9601 (H) is transmitted as a command for specifying the number of relief times 2, and when the remaining number of fluctuations is 800, the command is transmitted. The command 9608 (H) is transmitted as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command.

The command 97XX (H) is an effect control command (command for specifying the number of times of relief time for restoration) that specifies the number of remaining fluctuations (the number of times in units of 100 times) until the relief time is shortened at the time of power restoration. In this example, when the power is restored, the EXT data of the command for specifying the number of times of relief time for restoration is set with a value corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations until the time for relief is shortened and transmitted. For example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened at the time of power restoration is 100 times or less, the command 9701 (H) is transmitted as a command for specifying the number of relief times at the time of restoration, and the remaining number of fluctuations is 701 times or more. If the number of times is 800 or less, the command 9708 (H) is transmitted as a command for specifying the number of times of relief time for restoration.

In this example, the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened can be specified in 1-time units up to 126 times, and in the case of 127 or more remaining times, it can be specified in 100-time units. However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, two commands may be combined and transmitted so that even if the remaining number of times is 127 or more, the two commands can be identifiable and transmitted in units of one time.

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation A designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol and can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation B designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol and can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds. Command A002 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation C designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol and that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. be.

The command A100 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation A designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. The command A101 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation B designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds. The command A102 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation C designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. be.

The command B000 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the jackpot game. The command B001 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command: ending designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during the opening of the big winning opening) that specifies the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big winning opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a prize in the prize opening) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the prize opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first hold storage number addition designation command) for designating that the first hold storage number has been increased by 1. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second hold storage number addition designation command) for designating that the second hold storage number has been increased by 1. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (first hold storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the first hold storage number has decreased by one. The command C101 (H) is an effect control command (second hold storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the second hold storage number has decreased by 1.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state specification command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the normal state. The command E001 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state A designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time saving state at the end of the big hit game. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state B designation command) that specifies that the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state when the time saving is lost. The command E003 (H) is an effect control command (time reduction state C designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time reduction state at the time of relief time reduction. The command E004 (H) is an effect control command (probability change state designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the probability change state.

The command E100 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed notification start designation command) for designating the start of right-handed notification. The command E101 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed notification end designation command) for designating the end of right-handed notification.

The command F000 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies to start displaying the customer waiting demonstration. The customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, for example, when the hold storage is not stored (that is, when the total number of hold storages is 0) at the end of the symbol confirmation period and the end of the jackpot game. The customer waiting demo designation command is also transmitted, for example, when the power is turned on (it is transmitted regardless of whether the initialization process or the recovery process is executed). In addition, for example, when shifting to the setting change mode for executing the setting change process or the setting confirmation mode for executing the setting confirmation process, a setting value specification command is sent after each mode is completed, and then a customer waiting demo is specified. The command is sent. When the recovery process or the setting confirmation process is executed, the customer is not executing the big hit game, the small hit game, or the special figure game, and the hold memory is not stored. The wait demo specification command is sent. As will be described later, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the customer waiting demo designation command, the relief time saving function is activated when 10 seconds elapse without receiving other commands such as the effect control command at the time of starting winning. Start the telop display indicating that it is installed (in this example, it is determined whether or not to display the telop by lottery). In addition, when 3 minutes have passed without receiving another command after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command, the demonstration movie is played.

The command F1XX (H) is an effect control command (setting value designation command) for designating a set setting value. A value corresponding to the set value is set in "XX".

When the effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the above-mentioned effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in 14-9 and 14-10, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the voice control board 13. The effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 14-9 and 14-10 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating the game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

(Game control main processing)
FIG. 14-11 is a flowchart showing the game control main process in the feature unit 108IW. In this example, the processes of steps S1 to S7, the processes of steps S8 to S9, and the processes of steps S10 to S12 are the same as those processes shown in FIG.

In this example, when the effect control command instructing the recovery from the power failure is transmitted in step S7, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the relief time reduction counter for counting the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. Control is performed so that a value corresponding to the value of the current relief time reduction counter is set and a recovery relief time reduction specification command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS11). For example, when the value of the current relief time reduction counter is 100 or less, the CPU 10 controls to transmit the command 9701 (H) as a recovery time reduction designation command. Further, for example, when the value of the current relief time reduction counter is 701 or more and 800 or less, the CPU 10 controls to transmit the command 9708 (H) as a recovery time reduction designation command. Therefore, in this example, if the RAM clear process is not executed and the recovery process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the command for specifying the number of times of relief time for recovery is transmitted, and the remaining time until the current relief time is shortened. The number of fluctuations is notified. Further, the relief time can be shortened by executing the variable display based on the hold memory restored by the recovery process (that is, the hold memory stored before the power failure). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage for the player when a power failure occurs in a situation where the hold memory corresponding to the variable display in which the relief time is shortened is stored before the power failure.

In this example, a case is shown in which a command for specifying the number of times of relief time for recovery is transmitted separately from the command for recovery at the time of power failure recovery, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the EXT data of the recovery command (for example, the power-on designation command) transmitted in step S7 may be configured to be set with a value corresponding to the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened and transmitted.

Further, when the effect control command instructing the initialization is transmitted in step S9, the CPU 103 sets "800" in the relief time reduction counter (step 100 IWS12). Therefore, in this example, when the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, "800" is set in the relief time reduction counter. That is, in this example, if the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and then the jackpot and the time reduction are not generated even if the fluctuation display is executed 800 times, the relief time is shortened and the time reduction state is established. Will be controlled by. In this example, the initial value to be set in the relief time reduction counter can be specified based on the effect control command for instructing the initialization to be transmitted in step S9.

In this example, when the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, "800" is set in the relief time reduction counter to make the initial setting, but only in such a mode. Instead, it may be configured not to perform the initial setting of the relief time reduction counter when the RAM clear processing is executed. For example, when the RAM clear process is executed, the time saving flags A to C indicating that the time saving state is executed, the time saving number counter for counting the number of executions of the variation display during the time saving state, and the hold storage are initialized. On the other hand, the value of the relief time reduction counter may be restored. With such a configuration, the game can be started from the state where the value of the relief time reduction counter on the previous day is continued, so that the investment amount until the relief time is shortened can be reduced and the player is not disadvantaged. be able to. In addition, it is possible to prevent the relief time reduction counter from being intentionally initialized, and it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, the RAM is configured so that the initial setting of the relief time reduction counter is not performed only when the ON of the clear switch is detected (Y in step S3) and the RAM clear processing is executed. When an abnormality is detected (N in steps S4 and S5) and the RAM clear process is executed, the relief time reduction counter may be initially set.

(Special design normal processing)
14-12 and 14-13 are flowcharts showing a special symbol normal process (step S110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step 100IWS51). Specifically, the count value of the total hold storage number counter for counting the total number of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number is confirmed. If the total number of reserved storages is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second number of reserved storages is 0 (step 100IWS52). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second hold storage number counter for counting the second hold storage number is 0. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to the data indicating "second" (step 100 IWS53). If the second reserved storage number is 0 (that is, when only the first reserved storage number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets the data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step 100IWS54).

In the feature unit 108IW, by executing the processes of steps 100IWS52 to S54, the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed with respect to the variation display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be satisfied in preference to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

Not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are executed in the order in which the game ball wins the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. It may be configured as follows.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 100IWS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = 1 in the first hold storage number buffer. The numerical value is read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer. Is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 100IWS56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first hold storage counter, and each storage area in the first hold storage buffer. Shift the contents of. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has a storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first hold storage number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value stored in is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always the first reserved storage number (or the first reserved storage number). The order of the second reserved memory) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage counter is subtracted by 1 (step 100IWS57). The CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the hit determination random number from the random number buffer area (step 100IWS61) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 100IWS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads a hit determination random number extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer, and performs a big hit determination. The jackpot determination module compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIGS. 14-2 and 14-3) with a hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining a jackpot if they match. It is a program. That is, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process. In this case, the CPU 103 has a jackpot determination value for low probability (FIGS. 14-2 (A) and 14-3) unless the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set (if the probability variation state is low). (See (A)) is used to make a jackpot determination. Further, if the probability variation flag is set (in the high probability state), the CPU 103 uses the jackpot determination value for high probability (see FIGS. 14-2 (B) and 14-3 (B)). Make a big hit judgment. When the value of the random number for hit determination matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIGS. 14-2 and 14-3, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot.

When it is decided to make a big hit (Y in step 100IWS63), the CPU 103 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit (step 100IWS64). Then, the CPU 103 determines the type (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot) corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the type determination random number stored in the random number buffer area as the jackpot type (step 100IWS65). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and determines the jackpot type. Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS84.

On the other hand, if it is not decided to make a big hit (N in step 100IWS63), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter for counting the number of executions of the variation display in the time reduction state is 0. (Step 100 IWS66). If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the time reduction counter value (step 100IWS67), and confirms whether or not the subtracted time reduction counter value is 0 (step 100IWS68). ). If the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets the time reduction end flag indicating that the time reduction state ends at the end of the fluctuation (step 100IWS69).

In this example, steps 100IWS66 to S69 are executed before the count processing of the number of fluctuations up to the relief time reduction after step 100IWS70 to perform the subtraction processing of the time reduction counter. I can't be limited. For example, it may be configured to execute the subtraction process of the time reduction counter after executing the counting process of the number of fluctuations up to the relief time reduction after step 100 IWS70. In this case, for example, in the case of a variable display that shortens the relief time, if the subtraction process is executed after setting "800" in the time reduction counter (see step 100IWS172), the value of the time reduction counter becomes 1 extra. Since the value is subtracted, the value of the time reduction counter may be added by 1 again after the subtraction process in the variable display in which the relief time is shortened. Further, it may be configured to set "901", which is one more time reduction counter, in advance.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 100IWS70). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS79. If the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the relief time reduction counter value (step 100IWS71). In this example, by executing the process of step 100 IWS71, the value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated regardless of whether the game state is the normal state, the time reduction state, or the probability change state. .. Further, in this example, by executing the process of step 100IWS71, regardless of whether the variation display of the first special symbol is executed or the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. , The value of the relief time reduction counter is updated uniformly.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (step 100IWS72). If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 126 or less (N in step 100IWS72), the CPU 103 sets the value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction counter in the EXT data, and issues the relief time reduction 1 designation command. Control to transmit to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS73). For example, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the command 9501 (H) as the relief time reduction 1 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 126, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the command 957E (H) as the relief time reduction 1 designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS74). If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS79. If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a relief time reduction determination flag indicating that the time reduction state is controlled at the end of the fluctuation based on the occurrence of the relief time reduction (step 100IWS75). .. Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS84.

On the other hand, if the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (Y in step 100IWS72), the CPU 103 uniformly sets 7F (H) as EXT data, and commands 957F as a relief time reduction 1 designation command. (H) is controlled to be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100 IWS76). Next, in the CPU 103, the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is the number of times in units of 100 times (in this example, 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times). It is confirmed whether or not it is (step 100IWS77). Whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations up to the relief time reduction is in units of 100 can be determined by checking the value of the relief time reduction counter. If the remaining number of fluctuations up to the relief time reduction is in units of 100 times, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction counter in the EXT data, and directs and controls the relief time reduction 2 designation command. Control to transmit to the CPU 120 (step 100IWS78). For example, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 100, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the command 9601 (H) as the relief time reduction 2 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 800, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the command 9608 (H) as the relief time reduction 2 designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS79.

In this example, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) counts the number of remaining fluctuations up to the relief time reduction and transmits the relief time reduction number 1 designation command and the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to count the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and execute the fanning effect, the countdown effect, and the effect effect described later.

Further, for example, as will be described later, the relief time reduction counter is set (set to "800") at the timing when the relief time is shortened, and in a configuration in which the relief time reduction can be continuously generated, the relief time reduction is set to the first time. It is configured to send the relief time reduction number 1 specified command and the relief time reduction number 2 specified command only when the relief time is reduced, and when the relief time is shortened after the second time, the relief time reduction number 1 specified command and the relief time reduction number 2 specified command are transmitted. It may be configured not to.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag C indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the relief time saving is set (step 100IWS79). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if the time saving state is via the relief time saving), the process proceeds to step 100IWS84. In this example, when the process of step 100IWS79 is executed and the time is shortened via the relief time reduction, the time reduction is not determined as it is without performing the subsequent time reduction determination processing of step 100IWS81. It is decided to.

In addition to the time saving state via the relief time saving, the time saving state may be uniformly determined not to be determined as the time saving state during the time saving state including the time saving state via the jackpot and the time saving state via the time saving loss. That is, not only when the time saving flag C is set, but also when the time saving flag A and the time saving flag B are set, the time saving deviation determination process after step 100 IWS81 is uniformly prevented, and there is no time saving as it is. You may decide to make it out of the question.

Further, conversely, even during the time saving state via the relief time saving, the processing after step 100IWS81 may be executed so that the time saving deviation can be determined. Further, the same variation display may be configured so that both the relief time reduction and the time reduction deviation may occur. In this case, for example, it may be configured to give priority to the relief time reduction and control it to the time reduction state, or it may be configured to control the time reduction state to give priority to the time reduction deviation.

If the time saving flag C is not set (that is, the time saving state via the relief time saving is not set), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 100IWS80). If the probability change flag is set (that is, if it is in the probability change state), the process proceeds to step 100 IWS84. In this example, by executing the process of step 100 IWS80, it is determined that, in the case of the probability change state, the process of step 100 IWS 81 and subsequent step 100 IWS 81 is not performed, and the process of step 100 IWS 81 is performed as it is. NS.

If the probability change flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the probability change state), the CPU 103 uses a time reduction loss determination table for determining whether or not the time reduction is lost, and a lottery process based on the time reduction deviation determination random number is used. (Step 100 IWS81). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the time saving loss determination table for the first special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time saving is lost with a probability of about 1/400. (See Figure 14-2). If the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the time saving loss determination table for the second special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time saving is lost with a probability of about 1/200 (). See Figure 14-3).

When it is determined to be out of time (Y in step 100IWS82), the CPU 103 uses the type corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the random number for type determination stored in the random number buffer area (out of time A or out of time). B, time saving loss C) is determined as the type of time saving loss (step 100IWS83). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and determines the time saving type. Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS84.

In step 100IWS83, the time saving type determination is performed using the type determination random number used in the jackpot type determination in step 100IWS65 and the common type determination random number. Furthermore, when the small hit type is also determined and the small hit type is also determined, a common type determination random number is used in the small hit type determination in addition to the large hit type determination and the time saving type determination. It may be configured to perform the determination process.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type and the time saving type (step 100IWS84). In this case, for example, if it is decided to make a normal jackpot, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "3", and if it is decided to be a probabilistic jackpot, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "7". If it is decided and suddenly it is decided to make a probabilistic jackpot, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "9", and if it is decided to be the time saving out of A, the stop symbol of the special symbol is set to "2". If it is decided and it is decided to set the time saving out of B, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "4", and if it is decided to be the time saving out of C, the stop symbol of the special symbol is set to "6". If it is decided and it is decided that it is out of order (no time reduction), the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined as "-". Further, the CPU 103 stores the determined stop symbol of the special symbol in the stop symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 100IWS85).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 100IWS86).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 14-14 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern setting process (step S111) in the special symbol process process. In the variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step 100IWS1701). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 100IWS1701A). When the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (that is, when the relief time is shortened and the value is a big hit), the CPU 103 uses FIG. 14-8 (J) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. ) Is selected (step 100 IWS1701B). When the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot fluctuation pattern table A shown in FIG. 14-7 (A) as the table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1702). ..

If the jackpot flag is not set (that is, if it is off), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 100IWS1702A). When the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (that is, the variation display that shortens the relief time and the relief time is out of order), the CPU 103 uses FIG. 14-8 (I) as a table for determining the variation pattern. ) Is selected (step 100 IWS1702B). When the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter is 10 or less (step 100IWS1703). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is 10 or less (that is, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is reduced is 10 or less), the CPU 103 has a total hold storage counter value of 3 or less. Check if it is. In addition, not limited to the aspect shown in this example, for example, it may be configured to confirm whether or not the value of the first hold storage number counter or the second hold storage number counter is 3 or less.

If the value of the total pending storage counter is 3 or less (Y in step 100IWS1704), the CPU 103 serves as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern for the deviation immediately before the relief time reduction shown in FIG. 14-8 (F). The variation pattern table F of (step 100IWS1705) is selected. If the value of the total pending storage counter is 4 or more (N in step 100IWS1704), the CPU 103 serves as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern for the deviation immediately before the relief time reduction shown in FIG. 14-8 (G). The variation pattern table G of (step 100IWS1706) is selected.

If the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 10 or less (N in step 100IWS1703), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability change flag is set (step 100IWS1707). If the probability change flag is set (that is, in the probability change state), the CPU 103 uses the fluctuation pattern table for deviation in the probability change state shown in FIG. 14-8 (H) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. Select H (step 100 IWS 1708). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage counter, selects the variation pattern table H on condition that the value of the total pending storage counter is 1 or more, and sets the value of the total pending storage counter. If is 0 (that is, if there is no hold storage), the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 14-7 (B) is selected.

If the probability change flag is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag A indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the jackpot is set (step 100IWS1709). If the time saving flag A is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the jackpot), the CPU 103 uses the jackpot as shown in FIG. 14-7 (C) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern table C for the outlier in the controlled time saving state is selected (step 100IWS1710). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage counter, selects the variation pattern table C on condition that the value of the total pending storage counter is 1 or more, and sets the value of the total pending storage counter. If is 0 (that is, if there is no hold storage), the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 14-7 (B) is selected.

If the time saving flag A is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag B indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the time saving deviation is set (step 100IWS1711). If the time saving flag B is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the time saving deviation), the CPU 103 uses the time saving deviation as shown in FIG. 14-7 (D) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern table D for the loss in the time saving state controlled via the method is selected (step 100IWS1712). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage counter, selects the variation pattern table D on condition that the value of the total pending storage counter is 1 or more, and sets the value of the total pending storage counter. If is 0 (that is, if there is no hold storage), the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 14-7 (B) is selected.

If the time saving flag B is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag C indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the relief time saving is set (step 100IWS1713). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the relief time saving), the CPU 103 uses the relief time saving as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern as shown in FIG. 14-8 (E). The variation pattern table E for the loss in the time saving state controlled via the method is selected (step 100IWS1714).

If the time saving flag C is not set (that is, in the normal state), the CPU 103 uses the fluctuation pattern for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 14-7 (B) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. Select table B (step 100 IWS 1715).

Next, the CPU 103 is stored in the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 100IWS1701B, S1702, S1702B, S1705, S1706, S1708, S1710, S1712, S1714, S1715, and the first special symbol determination buffer. Based on the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern, it is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIGS. 14-7 and 14-8 is used (step 100IWS1716). In this example, by determining the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined. After determining the fluctuation time, the fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1717).

Further, when the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined in step 100IWS1716, the CPU 103 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the fluctuation time timer and measures the fluctuation time. (Step 100IWS1718), the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is started (step 100IWS1719). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation processing (step 100IWS1720).

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 14-15 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process (step S112) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol variation processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether or not to make a big hit, the big hit type determination result, and the time saving type if it has not been transmitted yet. Based on the determination result of, one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 7 designation command) is controlled to be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1121).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation time timer (step 100IWS1122), and when the fluctuation time timer times out (step 100IWS1123), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is determined to be out of time (step). 100IWS1124). It should be noted that whether or not it is determined that the time reduction is out of time can be determined, for example, by confirming the stop symbol of the special symbol stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 100 IWS85.

If it is determined that the time is out of time, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS1125). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1126).

By executing the process of step 100IWS1125, in this example, when the time-saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed, the right-handed LED 100IW10 is started to light at the start of the symbol determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (step 100IWS1127). If neither the time saving flag A nor the time saving flag B is set (that is, in the normal state), the CPU 103 measures the fixed display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "20 seconds" is set in the fixed period timer (step 100IWS1128). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1129). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to send the second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS1139.

If the time reduction flag A or the time reduction flag B is set (that is, in the time reduction state), the CPU 103 measures the symbol confirmation period for measuring the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "10 seconds" is set in the timer (step 100IWS1130). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1131). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation B designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to send the second symbol confirmation B designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS1139.

Unless it is determined to be out of time (N in step 100IWS1124), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the relief time reduction determination flag is set (step 100IWS1132). If the rescue time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS1133). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1134).

By executing the process of step 100IWS1133, in this example, when the relief time is shortened, the right-handed LED 100IW10 is started to light at the start of the symbol determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "20 seconds" in the symbol confirmation period timer for measuring the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (step 100IWS1135). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1136). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to send the second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS1139.

If the relief time reduction determination flag is not set (N in step 100IWS1132), the CPU 103 sets the symbol confirmation period timer for measuring the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol to "0.5". A value corresponding to "seconds" is set (step 100 IWS1137). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1138). .. In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation C designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to send the second symbol confirmation C designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS1139.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S113) (step 100IWS1139).

(Special symbol stop processing)
14-16 and 14-17 are flowcharts showing a special symbol stop process (step S113) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol confirmation period timer (step 100IWS131), and confirms whether or not the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS132). ..

If the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after subtraction is not 0 (that is, if the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not ended), the special symbol stop process is terminated. do. If the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after subtraction is 0 (that is, if the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has ended), the jackpot flag is set in the CPU 103. It is confirmed whether or not it has been performed (step 100IWS133). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103, if set, counts the probability change flag, the time reduction flag A, the time reduction flag B, the time reduction flag C, and the number of times of execution of the variation display during the probability change state. The probability variation counter and the time reduction counter for counting the number of executions of the variation display during the time reduction state are reset (step 100IWS134).

Next, the CPU 103 sets "800" in the relief time reduction counter (step 100IWS135). Therefore, in this example, when "800" is set in the relief time reduction counter triggered by the big hit, and even if the fluctuation display of 800 times is executed after the big hit game is completed, neither the next big hit nor the time reduction occurs. , The relief time will be shortened and the time will be controlled.

In this example, when a big hit is obtained by executing the process of step 100 IWS135, "800" is set in the relief time reduction counter at the start of the fanfare period of the big hit to make an initial setting. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, "800" may be set in the relief time reduction counter during the round of the jackpot game, and "800" may be set in the relief time reduction counter at the start or end of the ending period of the jackpot game to make the initial setting. It may be configured as.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS136). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS137).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the jackpot start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS138). Next, the CPU 103 sets a large winning opening pre-opening time timer for measuring the large winning opening pre-opening time (fanfare time) until the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the open state (step 100IWS139). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (step S144) (step 100 IWS140).

If the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 100IWS133), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving end flag is set (step 100IWS141). If the time saving end flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time saving end flag (step 100IWS142). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag C is set (step 100IWS143). If the time saving flag C is set, the CPU 103 sets "800" in the relief time saving number counter (step 100IWS144).

In this example, as will be described later, when the relief time is shortened, the time reduction state is controlled to 800 times (see steps 100IWS172 and S173). By executing the processes of steps 100 IWS143 and S144, in this example, when the time reduction state is controlled with the relief time reduction as an opportunity, after that, the variation display is executed 800 times without a big hit or a time reduction loss. With this as an opportunity, "800" is set in the relief time reduction counter. After that, if the next big hit or time reduction does not occur even after executing the fluctuation display 800 times, the second relief time is shortened and the time reduction state is controlled. In this example, the time reduction does not occur in the time reduction state triggered by the relief time reduction, but it may occur and the value of the relief time reduction counter is reset (that is, "800" is set). ) May be done.

Next, the CPU 103 resets any of the set time saving flags (any of the time saving flags A to C) and ends the time saving state (step 100IWS145). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS150.

If the time saving end flag is not set (N in step 100IWS141), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is 0 (step 100IWS146). If the value of the probability variation counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 100IWS153. If the value of the probability variation counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the probability variation counter (step 100IWS147) and confirms whether or not the value of the probability variation counter after subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS148). ). If the value of the probability change counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 10 resets the probability change flag and the time saving flag A, and ends the probability change state (step 100IWS149). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS150.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS150). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the right-handed notification end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS151). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the normal state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS152). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS153.

In this example, by executing the processes of steps 100IWS141 to S152, the time saving final variation and the probability variation final variation shift to the normal state at the end of the symbol determination period and end the right-handed notification. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in the time saving final fluctuation or the probability variation final fluctuation, the right-handed notification may be terminated by shifting to the normal state at the start of the fluctuation or the start of the symbol fixing period.

Further, in this example, the case where the probabilistic state is terminated and the time saving state is also terminated in the probabilistic final variation is shown, but not limited to such a mode, only the probabilistic state is terminated and the time saving state is continued. It may be configured.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is the case where the time reduction is decided (step 100IWS153). It should be noted that whether or not it is determined that the time reduction is out of time can be determined, for example, by confirming the stop symbol of the special symbol stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 100 IWS85.

If it is determined that the time reduction is off, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time reduction flag A or the time reduction flag B is set (step 100IWS154). If neither the time saving flag A nor the time saving flag B is set (that is, in the normal state), the CPU 103 sets "100" in the time saving number counter if it is out of time saving A (Y in step 100IWS155). (Step 100 IWS156). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS165.

If it is not the time reduction A, the CPU 103 sets "50" in the time reduction counter if it is the time reduction B (Y in step 100IWS157) (step 100IWS158). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS165.

If it is not the time reduction B (that is, if it is the time reduction C), the CPU 103 sets "30" in the time reduction counter (step 100IWS159). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS165.

If the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (that is, in the time saving state), the CPU 103 resets the value of the time saving number counter to 0 if the time saving is out of A (Y in step 100 IWS160). Step 100 IWS 161). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS165.

If it is not the time reduction A, the CPU 103 sets "200" in the time reduction counter if it is the time reduction B (Y in step 100IWS162) (step 100IWS163). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS165.

If it is not the time reduction B (that is, if it is the time reduction C), the CPU 103 sets "100" in the time reduction counter (step 100IWS164). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS165.

Next, the CPU 103 resets the time saving flag A if it is set (step 100IWS165). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag B and controls the time saving state (step 100IWS166).

Next, the CPU 103 sets "800" in the relief time reduction counter (step 100IWS167). Therefore, in this example, when "800" is set in the relief time reduction counter triggered by the time reduction loss, and even if the fluctuation display of 800 times is executed after the time reduction deviation, neither the next big hit nor the time reduction deviation occurs. , The relief time will be shortened and the time will be controlled.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the time saving state B designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS168).

By executing the processing of steps 100IWS166 and S168, in this example, when the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed, the time saving state is controlled at the end of the symbol confirmation period, and the time saving state B designation command is issued. By being transmitted, the background image can be switched according to the time saving state via the time saving deviation.

Unless it is determined to be out of time (N in step 100IWS153), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the relief time reduction determination flag is set (step 100IWS170). If the relief time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the relief time reduction determination flag (step 100IWS171), sets the time reduction counter to "800" (step 100IWS172), and sets the relief time reduction counter to "800". Is set (step 100IWS172A). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag C and controls the time saving state (step 100IWS173). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the time saving state C designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS174).

In this example, the relief time can be continuously generated by controlling the time reduction state at the timing when the relief time is shortened and setting the relief time reduction counter ("800" is set). Once the time reduction occurs, it is configured to continue the time reduction state until a big hit occurs, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, at the timing when the relief time is shortened, the relief time reduction counter is not set only by controlling the time reduction state, and then the relief time reduction counter is set at the timing when the fluctuation display of 800 times is finished and the normal state is controlled. (See step 100 IWS 144).

Further, in this example, "800" is set when setting the relief time reduction counter, and the value of the relief time reduction counter is subtracted by 1 each time the fluctuation display is executed, and the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0". However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, "0" is set when setting the relief time reduction counter, and the value of the relief time reduction counter is added by 1 each time the fluctuation display is executed, and the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes "800". Based on this, it may be configured to generate a reduction in relief time.

Further, in this example, when the relief time is shortened, a case is shown in which 20 seconds longer than usual is set as the symbol confirmation period to secure an effect period such as a mode transition effect, but the image display device is used during the symbol determination period. In 5, the decorative symbol may not be displayed, but only the small symbol may be displayed so that the small symbol is not concealed by the director or the like.

Further, in this example, by executing the process of step 100IWS172, 800 times, which is the same as the number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction occurs, is set as the time reduction number, but it is limited to such a mode. do not have. For example, in step 100IWS172, a value larger than "800" may be set in the time reduction counter, or a value smaller than "800" may be set.

Further, in step 100IWS172, a value corresponding to a plurality of types of time reduction times may be configured to be set in the time reduction counter. For example, when the relief time is shortened for the first time, "100" is set in the time reduction counter, and when the relief time is shortened for the second time, "800" is set in the time reduction counter. May be good.

Further, for example, a lottery process based on a random number may be performed to determine the number of time reductions, and in step 100IWS172, a value corresponding to the number of time reductions determined in the lottery process may be set in the time reduction counter. good. In this case, for example, the number of time reductions may be determined to be 100 times with a probability of 10% and 800 times with a probability of 90%. When the number of time reductions is determined by lottery processing, the number of time reductions may be determined by using the type determination random number used for determining the jackpot type and the time reduction type, or the number of time reductions may be determined using a dedicated random number. You may.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S110) (step 100IWS175).

(External output signal)
FIG. 14-18 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal output externally from the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIGS. 14-18, in this example, a jackpot 1 signal, a jackpot 2 signal, a jackpot 3 signal, a jackpot 4 signal, and a fluctuation stop signal are output as external output signals. Of these, the jackpot 1 signal is a signal that is output externally during the jackpot game. Further, the jackpot 2 signal is a signal that is output externally during the jackpot game and the time saving state. Further, the jackpot 3 signals are signals that are output externally during the symbol determination period that is out of time. Further, the jackpot 4 signals are signals that are output externally during the symbol determination period of the variation display in which the relief time is shortened. The fluctuation stop signal is a signal that is output externally at the start of the symbol determination period.

In this example, in addition to the case where the game is shifted to the time saving state at the end of the big hit game, the time saving out-of-time symbol may be derived and displayed even when the time-saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed. At the end of the symbol determination period, the external output of the jackpot 2 signal is started. In addition, even if the relief time is shortened, the time may be shortened. Therefore, if a symbol that is out of the variable display that shortens the relief time is derived and displayed, the jackpot 2 signal is displayed at the end of the symbol confirmation period. External output is started.

The big hit 3 signal and the big hit 4 signal may be configured to be output not only during the symbol determination period but also during the big hit game. Further, in this example, a case where different external output signals (3 big hit signals and 4 big hit signals) are output for the case where the time reduction is missed and the case where the relief time is shortened is shown, but the external output signal for both purposes is shown. May be configured to output.

Further, the big hit 3 signal and the big hit 4 signal may be configured to be output at a timing after the fluctuation stop signal during the symbol determination period is output.

For example, a fluctuation stop signal may be output at the start of the symbol confirmation period of the missing symbol, and three jackpot signals may be output during the symbol confirmation period after the fluctuation stop signal is output, or a variation display that shortens the relief time. The fluctuation stop signal may be output at the start of the symbol confirmation period, and four jackpot signals may be output during the symbol confirmation period after the fluctuation stop signal is output. With such a configuration, when the fluctuation stop signal and the big hit 3 signal or the big hit 4 signal are output at the same time, it is possible to prevent the signal from being dropped externally.

Further, the jackpot 3 signals may be configured to be continuously output even during the time saving state via the time saving deviation. Further, the jackpot 4 signals may be configured to be continuously output even during the time saving state via the relief time saving. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably discriminate the type of the time reduction even during the time reduction state.

(Big hit end processing)
FIG. 14-19 is a flowchart showing a jackpot end process (step S117) in the special symbol process process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step 100IWS531), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, proceeds to step 100IWS535. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot flag (step 100IWS532) and controls the transmission of the jackpot end designation command (step 100IWS533). Then, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (big hit end display time) in which the big hit end display is performed in the image display device 5 in the big hit end display timer (step 100IWS534), and performs the process. finish.

In step 100 IWS535, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 100IWS536). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 100IWS536), the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag A and controls the time saving state (step 100IWS537). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot that ends this time is a normal jackpot (step 100IWS538). Whether or not it is a normal big hit can be determined by checking, for example, the stop symbol of the special symbol stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 100 IWS85. If it is a normal big hit, the CPU 103 sets "100" in the time reduction counter (step 100IWS539). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the time saving state A designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS540).

If it is not a normal jackpot (that is, if it is a probability variation jackpot or a sudden probability variation jackpot), the CPU 103 sets a probability variation flag and controls the probability variation state (step 100IWS541). Further, the CPU 103 sets "100" in the probability variation counter (step 100IWS542). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the probability change state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS543).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S110) (step 100IWS544).

(state change)
Next, the state transition in the feature unit 108IW will be described. FIG. 14-20 is a state transition diagram for explaining the state transition in the feature unit 108IW. As shown in FIG. 14-20, in the normal state, when a probability variation jackpot or a sudden probability variation jackpot occurs, the probability variation state is controlled (see steps 100IWS541 to S542), and when a normal jackpot occurs, the time saving state A (see steps 100IWS541 to S542). It is controlled to (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). Further, in the normal state, even if the symbol is out of time, it is controlled to the time saving state B (time saving state via the time saving deviation) when the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed (see step 100IWS166). Furthermore, even if the time is lost, the number of fluctuations has reached 800 times without the next big hit or time saving loss occurring after the RAM clear processing or after the big hit or time saving loss. In the case), it is controlled to the time saving state C (time saving state via the relief time saving) (see step 100IWS173).

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-20, in the probability change state, when the probability change big hit or the sudden probability change big hit occurs, the probability change state is controlled again (see steps 100IWS541 to S542), and when the normal big hit occurs, the time is shortened. It is controlled to state A (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). On the other hand, in the probabilistic state, the time saving out-of-time symbol is not derived and displayed (see Y in step 100IWS80), and the relief time is not shortened. Further, in the probabilistic state, when the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed without the occurrence of a big hit, it is controlled to the normal state (see steps 100IWS146 to S149).

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-20, in the time saving state A, when the probability change big hit or the sudden probability change big hit occurs, the probability change state is controlled (see steps 100IWS541 to S542), and when the normal big hit occurs again. It is controlled to the time saving state A (time saving state via the jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). Further, in the time saving state A, even if it is out of time, it is controlled to the time saving state B (time saving state via the time saving out) when the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed (see step 100IWS166). Further, in the time saving state A, when the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed without the occurrence of a big hit, it is controlled to the normal state (see steps 100IWS66 to S69 and S145). On the other hand, there is no case where the relief time is shortened in the time saving state A.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-20, in the time saving state B, when the probability change big hit or the sudden probability change big hit occurs, the probability change state is controlled (see steps 100IWS541 to S542), and when the normal big hit occurs, the time reduction occurs. It is controlled to state A (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). Further, in the time saving state B, even if the time saving state B is out of order, when the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed, the time saving state B (time saving state via the time saving out of time) is controlled again (see step 100IWS166). Further, in the time saving state A, when the variation display of 30, 50, 100, or 200 times is completed without the occurrence of a big hit, it is controlled to the normal state (see steps 100IWS66 to S69 and S145). However, if the time reduction state is controlled to the time reduction state B due to the time reduction loss A during the time reduction state, the time reduction state B is continued until the next big hit occurs (see steps 100IWS160 and S161). On the other hand, there is no case where the relief time is shortened in the time saving state B.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-20, in the time saving state C, when the probability change big hit or the sudden probability change big hit occurs, the probability change state is controlled (see steps 100IWS541 to S542), and when the normal big hit occurs, the time reduction occurs. It is controlled to state A (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). On the other hand, in the time saving state C, the time saving out-of-time symbol is not derived and displayed (see Y in step 100IWS79). Further, in the time saving state C, when the variation display of 800 times is completed without the occurrence of a big hit, the time saving state C (the time saving state via the relief time saving) is controlled again (see steps 100IWS170 to S173).

In this example, when the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed in the time saving state A, the case is uniformly shifted to the time saving state B, but the control mode is not limited to such a control mode. For example, the remaining number of times of the current time reduction is compared with the number of time reductions corresponding to the determined time reduction type, and if the remaining number of times of the current time reduction is larger, the current time reduction state A is configured to continue as it is. You may.

In this example, when a normal jackpot occurs during the time saving state B, the case where the time saving state A is uniformly shifted is shown, but the control mode is not limited to such a control mode. For example, the remaining number of times of the current time reduction is compared with the number of time reductions corresponding to the normal jackpot (100 times in this example), and if the remaining number of times of the current time reduction is larger, the current time reduction state B is continued as it is. It may be configured to do so.

Further, in this example, a case is shown in which the time saving out-of-time symbol is not derived and displayed in the time saving state C (see Y in step 100IWS79), but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, for example. , Even in the time saving state C, it may be configured so that it can be determined that the time saving is out.

Further, in this example, when the probability change state is controlled, the case where the probability change state is terminated based on the execution of the fluctuation display 100 times is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to determine whether or not to end the probabilistic state for each variation display by a lottery process, and to end the probabilistic state based on the determination to end the probabilistic state.

(Main processing of production control)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 14-21 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the effect control main process in the feature unit 108IW. In FIGS. 14-21, the processes of steps S71 to S76 are the same as those processes shown in FIG.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the small symbol process process (step 087IWS701). In this example, by executing the small symbol process process of step 087IWS701, the image display device 5 synchronizes with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in addition to the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the image display device 5, a variable display of small symbols in a reduced manner of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the fourth symbol process process (step 100IWS702). In this example, by executing the fourth symbol process process of step 100IWS702, the image display device 5 synchronizes with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in addition to the variable display of the decorative symbol. The variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. In this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed on the fourth symbol display 100IW21a provided on the left side of the image display device 5. When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed on the fourth symbol display 100IW21b provided on the right side of the image display device 5.

The process of step S77 is the same as the process of step S77 shown in FIG.

When the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed by alternately turning on and off the two LEDs arranged above and below on the fourth symbol display 100IW21a and 21b. Will be done.

When the fluctuation time is completed, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is confirmed and displayed at the start of the symbol determination period. In this case, in the case of a big hit, the two LEDs arranged one above the other as the big hit symbol are stopped and displayed in a state of being lit in red. In addition, when the time reduction is lost, the two LEDs arranged above and below as the time reduction deviation symbol are stopped and displayed in a state of being lit in blue. In addition, when the LED is off (no time reduction), the two LEDs arranged above and below are turned off as an out-of-order symbol (no time reduction), and the stop display is displayed.

The mode of the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is not limited to the mode shown in this example, and for example, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is derived and displayed in a mode in which the jackpot type and the time saving type can be distinguished. May be good.

Further, in this example, the case where a dedicated symbol is provided as the time-saving out-of-time symbol of the fourth symbol is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode, and the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is provided in the case of a big hit and the case of time-saving out of time. May be used as a common pattern.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. 14-22 to 14-23 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 100IWS611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 100IWS612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 100IWS613). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step 100IWS614), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 100IWS615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 100IWS616).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step 100IWS617), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result specification command in the display result specification command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 100IWS618). ).

The received effect control command is one of the symbol confirmation command (1st symbol confirmation A designation command, 1st symbol confirmation B designation command, 1st symbol confirmation C designation command, 2nd symbol confirmation A designation command, 2nd symbol confirmation If it is (B designation command, second symbol confirmation C designation command) (step 100IWS619), the effect control CPU 120 sets the confirmation command reception flag corresponding to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 100IWS620). For example, when the first symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the first confirmation A command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the first confirmation B command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first symbol confirmation C designation command is received, the first confirmation C command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the second confirmation A command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the second confirmation B command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second symbol confirmation C designation command is received, the second confirmation C command reception flag is set.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 100IWS621), the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 100IWS622). If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 100IWS623), the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 100IWS624).

If the received effect control command is a rescue time reduction 1 designation command (step 100IWS625), the effect control CPU 120 transmits the received relief time reduction 1 designation command to the relief time reduction 1 designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122. Store in (step 100 IWS626).

If the received effect control command is a rescue time reduction 2 designation command (step 100IWS627), the effect control CPU 120 transmits the received relief time reduction 2 designation command to the relief time reduction 2 designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122. Store in (step 100 IWS628).

If the received effect control command is a recovery time reduction time reduction command (step 100IWS629), the effect control CPU 120 reaches the relief time reduction in the image display device 5 based on the received recovery time reduction number designation command. Control is performed to display the initial result according to the number of times (step 100IWS630). For example, when the EXT data of the received recovery time reduction command is "01 (H)" (when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is reduced is 100 or less), the initial result is "112". Is displayed, suggesting that the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100 or less. Further, for example, when the EXT data of the received recovery time reduction command is "02 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 101 times or more and 200 times or less), the initial stage. "223" is displayed as a result, suggesting that the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 101 times or more and 200 times or less. Further, for example, when the EXT data of the received recovery time reduction command is "08 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 701 or more and 800 or less), the initial "889" is displayed as a result, suggesting that the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 701 or more and 800 or less.

It should be noted that not only when the initial result suggesting the number of remaining fluctuations is displayed at the time of power restoration, for example, in the first fluctuation display after power restoration, a display suggesting the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is displayed. , A combination of symbols suggesting the number of remaining fluctuations may be displayed. Further, for example, after the power is restored, a display suggesting the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened or a combination of symbols suggesting the remaining number of fluctuations is displayed within 1 to 100 fluctuations after the power is restored. The suggestion display may be configured at a relatively early stage. Further, it may be configured so as not to suggest the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened by the initial roll (for example, in the configuration of Example 2 described later, the relief time is shortened by the initial roll). It is possible not to suggest the number of remaining fluctuations).

If the received effect control command is a normal state specification command (step 100IWS631), the effect control CPU 120 displays a background image according to the normal state (for example, a blue background image according to the sea mode) in the image display device 5. Control is performed to switch to (step 100 IWS632).

If the received effect control command is a time saving state A designation command (step 100IWS633), the effect control CPU 120 presents the image display device 5 with a background image (for example, a setting sun) corresponding to the time saving state A (time saving state via a jackpot). Control to switch to the yellow background image according to the mode) is performed (step 100IWS634).

If the received effect control command is a time saving state B designation command (step 100IWS635), the effect control CPU 120 presents the image display device 5 with a background image (for example, a time saving state via the time saving state) according to the time saving state B. Control to switch to the green background image according to the forest mode) is performed (step 100IWS636).

If the received effect control command is a time saving state C designation command (step 100IWS637), the effect control CPU 120 displays a background image (for example, a time saving state via the relief time saving) in the image display device 5. Control is performed to switch to the orange background image according to the mandarin orange field mode (step 100IWS638).

In this example, by executing the processes of steps 100IWS633 to S638, even in the same time saving state, which of the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, and the time saving state via the relief time saving is performed. Display different background images depending on. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the difference in the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Not limited to the mode shown in this example, the common background image is displayed regardless of whether the time saving state is via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, or the time saving state via the relief time saving. It may be configured. For example, a common background image may be displayed in step 100IW634, step 100IWS636, and step 100IWS638, and a common background image may be displayed in the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, and the time saving state via the relief time saving. It may be configured as.

If the received effect control command is a probability change state specification command (step 100IWS639), the effect control CPU 120 displays a background image according to the probability change state (for example, a red background image according to the flame mode) in the image display device 5. Control is performed to switch to (step 100 IWS 640).

If the received effect control command is a right-handed notification start designation command (step 100IWS641), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start lighting the right-handed notification LED 100IW20 (step 100IWS642). In this example, the right-handed notification start designation command is transmitted at the start of the symbol confirmation period when the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed or the relief time is shortened (see step 100IWS1126, S1134). At the start of the symbol determination period, the right-handed notification LED 100IW20 is turned on.

If the received effect control command is a right-handed notification end designation command (step 100IWS643), the effect control CPU 120 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed notification LED 100IW20 (step 100IWS644).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 executes a process of storing the received effect control command or setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 100 IWS645). ). For example, when a command for designating a large prize opening is received, a large winning opening winning flag indicating that the large winning opening has been won is set. Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS611.

(Customer waiting demonstration production control process)
FIG. 14-24 is a flowchart showing a customer waiting demonstration effect control process. As described above, in this example, when the hold memory is not stored at the end of the symbol determination period and the end of the jackpot game (that is, when the total number of hold memories is 0), the effect control board is displayed from the main board 11. A customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted to 12.

When the customer waiting demo designation command is received, the production control CPU 120 receives the customer waiting demo designation command, and then 10 seconds elapse without receiving other commands such as the production control command at the time of starting winning. (Y in step 105IWS250), the telop display execution lottery process is executed (step 105IWS251).

In this example, it is possible to display a telop indicating that the relief time saving function is installed during the period when the variable display is not performed. In step 105 IWS251, it is determined by lottery whether or not to display the telop.

FIG. 14-25 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the telop display execution lottery table and the telop mode determination lottery table. Of FIGS. 14-25, FIG. 14-25 (A) is a telop display execution lottery table used when the set value is set to "1", and FIG. 14-25 (B) shows the set value. It is a telop display execution lottery table used when it is set to "6".

As shown in FIGS. 14-25 (A) and 14-25 (B), in this example, the ratio of displaying the telop while waiting for a customer differs depending on the number of times remaining until the relief time is shortened. With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened depending on the presence or absence of the telop display while waiting for the customer.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-25 (A) and 14-25 (B), in this example, the ratio of displaying the telop while waiting for a customer differs depending on the set value. With such a configuration, it can be suggested whether the set value is set to be advantageous depending on the presence or absence of the telop display while waiting for the customer.

In addition, in FIG. 14-25, an example of the setting value 1 and the setting value 6 is shown for simplification of the description, but a table corresponding to each setting value may be provided, or a plurality of sets may be provided. A table corresponding to the set value of (for example, set values 1 to 3) may be provided.

When it is determined to execute the telop display (Y in step 105IWS252), the effect control CPU 120 executes the telop display mode determination lottery process (step 105IWS253). Then, the telop display is started (step 105IWS254).

In this example, the telop display can be performed by the red effect mode and the blue effect mode. In step 105 IWS253, the effect mode of the telop display is determined by lottery.

FIG. 14-25 (C) is a telop mode determination lottery table used when the set value is set to "1", and FIG. 14-25 (D) shows the set value set to "6". It is a telop mode determination lottery table used when there is.

As shown in FIGS. 14-25 (C) and 14-25 (D), in this example, the effect mode of the telop display displayed while waiting for a customer differs depending on the number of times remaining until the relief time is shortened. With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened depending on the effect mode of the telop display waiting for the customer.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-25 (C) and 14-25 (D), in this example, the ratio of the telop display effect mode displayed while waiting for a customer is configured to be different depending on the set value. With such a configuration, it can be suggested whether the set value is set to be advantageous depending on the effect mode of the telop display waiting for the customer.

Then, after 3 minutes have passed without receiving other commands such as the effect control command at the time of starting winning after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command (Y in step 105IWS255), the effect control CPU 120 is demonstrated. The movie is played back (step 105IWS256).

It should be noted that the telop display and the reproduction of the demonstration movie waiting for the customer are terminated when the production control command or the like at the time of starting winning is received.

14-26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode of the telop display. In the example shown in FIGS. 14-26, the screens change in the order of (A), (B), (C), or (A), (D), and (E).

As shown in FIG. 14-26 (A), if the hold storage is not stored when the symbol determination period elapses, the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

Then, after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command on the production control board 12 side, 10 seconds have passed without receiving other commands such as the production control command at the time of starting winning, and the telop display while waiting for the customer is displayed. If it is decided to do so, the image display device 5 displays a telop display indicating that the relief time saving function is installed.

At this time, if it is determined to display the telop display according to the blue effect mode, the telop display 108IW001 with a blue edge is displayed (in the example of FIG. 14-26 (B), the edge is white. It is in the form of). Further, when it is determined to display the telop display according to the red effect mode, the telop display 108IW002 with a red edge is displayed (in the example of FIG. 14-26 (D), the edge is painted black. It is an aspect).

Then, after 3 minutes have passed without receiving other commands such as the production control command at the time of starting winning after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command on the production control board 12, the demonstration is performed on the image display device 5. The movie is played. As shown in FIGS. 14-26 (C) and 14-26 (E), the telop display is continuously displayed even during the playback of the demonstration movie.

(Read-ahead notice setting process)
14-27 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead notice setting process (step S161) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7.

In this example, in the start winning determination process (step S101) in the special symbol process process, a process of detecting the occurrence of the start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. In addition, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern is executed based on the extracted random number value. Then, after storing the hold information and the hold storage number, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the hold storage number, and the look-ahead determination is set on the effect control board 12. Will be done. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

In the look-ahead notice setting process (step S161), for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 14-27, the effect control CPU 120 is used to specify an effect control command at the time of a start prize (for example, an effect control command for designating a determination result such as the occurrence of a start prize, the number of reserved memories, and the look-ahead determination). ) Is received (step 108IWS701).

When the effect control command at the time of starting prize is received, the effect control CPU 120 has a hold memory number including the hold memory for newly receiving the effect control command at the time of starting prize, which is larger than the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened. It is determined whether or not there are many (step 108IWS702). That is, it is determined whether or not the variable display corresponding to the newly stored hold memory due to the occurrence of the start winning is executed after the relief time is shortened. Then, when the number of reserved memories is not more than the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened, that is, when the variable display corresponding to the newly stored reserved memory due to the occurrence of the start winning is executed after the rescue time is shortened. Ends the read-ahead notice setting process.

In this example, by executing the process of step 108IWS702, among the variable displays corresponding to the reserved storage stored before the relief time is shortened, the look-ahead notice effect for which the variable display when the relief time is shortened is targeted for advance notice is performed. While it is feasible, it restricts the execution of the look-ahead notice effect that targets the variable display after the variable display when the relief time is shortened. That is, it is configured to limit the execution of the look-ahead notice effect across the relief time reduction in which the game state changes. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complicating the control process and avoid inconsistency in the production contents.

When the number of reserved memories is larger than the number of remaining times until the rescue time is shortened, that is, when the variable display corresponding to the newly stored reserved memory due to the occurrence of the start winning is executed before the rescue time is shortened. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the look-ahead notice effect is executed, the effect type when the pre-reading notice effect is executed, and the effect mode (step 108IWS703).

FIG. 14-28 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of the pre-reading notice effect execution decision table, the pre-reading notice effect type determination table, and the pre-read notice effect mode determination table. In step 108 IWS703, each table shown in FIGS. 14-28 is used to determine whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice effect, the type of effect to be executed, and the mode of effect.

Specifically, when the game state is different from the time saving state C, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice effect using the look-ahead notice effect execution decision table shown in FIG. 14-28 (A). Then, when the game state is the time saving state C, the presence / absence of execution of the look-ahead notice effect is determined using the look-ahead notice effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 14-28 (B).

As shown in FIGS. 14-28 (A) and 14-28 (B), in this example, the pre-reading notice effect can be executed in both the case where the display result is a big hit and the case where the display result is a big hit, and the big hit. In the case of, the rate of executing the look-ahead notice effect is higher than in the case of being out of order. Therefore, it is suggested that the expectation of becoming a big hit is high by executing the look-ahead notice effect.

In such a configuration, further, as shown in FIGS. 14-28 (A) and 14-28 (B), the display result is different in the time saving state C than in the gaming state other than the time saving state C. In addition, it is configured so that the ratio of executing the look-ahead notice effect is low. With such a configuration, in the case of the time saving state C (that is, when the big hit has not occurred for a long period of time), it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the pre-reading notice effect is executed but the big hit does not occur.

When the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is determined in step 108 IWS703, if the game state is different from the time saving state C, the execution is executed using the look-ahead notice effect type determination table shown in FIG. 14-28 (C). The effect type of the look-ahead notice effect to be performed is determined, and when the game state is the time saving state C, the effect of the look-ahead advance notice effect to be executed is performed using the look-ahead notice effect type determination table shown in FIG. 14-28 (D). Determine the type. Specifically, the type of effect is determined to be either a chance eye effect or a pending change effect.

The chance eye effect is a variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect because the display result of the variable display that is executed before the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect is the chance eye (“778” in this example). Is a production that suggests that is a big hit. In the chance eye effect, for example, an effect of inciting whether or not the display result is the chance eye (“778” in this example) is executed. Further, for example, when the chance eye effect is executed by the red effect mode, the red chance eye (“778” in this example) is stopped and displayed, and the chance eye effect is executed by the blue effect mode. The blue chance eye (“778” in this example) is stopped and displayed.

The hold change effect suggests that the change display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect becomes a big hit because the hold display corresponding to the change display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode. It is a production to do. Further, for example, when the hold change effect is executed by the red effect mode, the red hold display is displayed, and when the hold change effect is executed by the blue effect mode, the blue hold display is displayed. Will be done.

FIG. 14-29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of each effect type of the look-ahead notice effect. Of FIGS. 14-29, FIGS. 14-29 (A1) to (E1) show specific examples of the chance eye effect, and FIGS. 14-29 (A2) to (B2) show specific examples of the pending change effect. It shows an example.

When the chance eye effect is executed as the look-ahead notice effect, it is shown in FIGS. 14-29 (B1) and (C1) after one variation display is started as shown in FIG. 14-29 (A1). As shown, the left and right decorative patterns are stopped and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-29 (D1), whether the decorative symbol in the center stops at "7", which is the chance eye "778", or "6", which is not the chance eye "778". The production that incites is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 14-29 (E1), when the decorative symbol in the center stops at "7" and the chance eye "778" is stopped and displayed, the variable display becomes a big hit in the reserved memory. It will be suggested that there may be a corresponding hold memory. In addition, after the fanning effect is executed, a symbol different from the chance eye "778" (for example, "768") may be stopped and displayed.

When the hold change effect is executed as the look-ahead notice effect, as shown in FIGS. 14-29 (A2) and (B2), when the start winning is generated, the new hold display is different from the normal mode. It is displayed in a display mode (for example, red), and it is suggested that a variable display that is a big hit may be executed based on the hold storage corresponding to the hold display. In this example, the display mode of the hold display is inherited as the display mode of the active display. The hold change effect is not limited to the mode shown in FIGS. 14-29, and at any timing from the display of the new hold display in the normal mode to the end of the corresponding hold display and active display display. It may be changed to a display mode different from the normal mode.

FIG. 14-30 is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period and the execution period of the look-ahead notice effect in the time saving state via the jackpot and the time saving state via the relief. Of FIGS. 14-30, FIG. 14-30 (A) is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period in the time saving state via the jackpot and the execution period of the look-ahead notice effect, and FIG. 14-30 (B) is , It is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period in the time saving state via relief and the execution period of the look-ahead notice effect. In the examples shown in FIGS. 14-30 (A) and 14-30 (B), it is assumed that the starting prizes are generated at the same timing.

As shown in FIG. 14-30 (A), when the chance eye effect is executed as the look-ahead notice effect, the variation display executed from the time when the start winning prize is generated to the start of the change display of the look-ahead target , The effect of inciting whether or not the chance symbol is stopped is executed, and then the chance symbol is stopped and displayed. Since such a fanning effect is included, when executing the chance eye effect, it is necessary to secure an execution period of a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) during at least one variation display.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14-30 (A), when the hold change effect is executed as the look-ahead notice effect, the change display of the look-ahead target is displayed from the timing when the start prize occurs or the time when the start prize occurs. The display mode of the hold display (or active display) changes at an arbitrary timing over a plurality of variable displays until the end. Then, the display of the hold display and the display of the active display according to the display mode after the change is continuously executed until the variable display of the look-ahead target is completed. That is, when the hold change effect is executed, it can be executed at any timing from the time when the start winning is generated until the variation display of the look-ahead target ends, and continues until the variation display of the look-ahead target ends. can do.

In this way, even in the look-ahead notice effect, the execution period differs between the chance eye effect and the hold change effect. That is, the chance eye effect is executed in a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) during one variation display, while the hold change effect is executed over a plurality of variation displays.

Further, as described above, in the time saving state via the jackpot, the ultra-super shortening fluctuation (1.5 seconds) is not executed at the time of disconnection, and the shortening fluctuation (5 seconds) is mainly executed, but the time saving state via relief is executed. In, the extremely ultra-shortening fluctuation (1.5 seconds) is mainly executed at the time of disconnection. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 14-30, it is difficult to secure a period for executing the chance eye effect in the time saving state via the relief.

Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 14-28 (C) and 14-28 (D), both the chance eye effect and the hold change effect can be executed as the look-ahead notice effect in the time saving state via the jackpot. On the other hand, in the time-saving state via relief, as a look-ahead notice effect, the execution of the chance eye effect is restricted, and only the hold change effect can be executed. With such a configuration, the pre-reading advance notice effect can be suitably executed according to the game state.

Further, when the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is determined in step 108IWS703, if the game state is different from the time saving state C, the look-ahead notice effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 14-28 (E) is used. , The effect mode of the look-ahead advance notice effect to be executed is determined, and when the game state is the time saving state C, the look-ahead advance notice effect to be executed is executed using the look-ahead advance notice effect type determination table shown in FIG. 14-28 (D). Determine the production type of. Specifically, it is determined to be either a red effect mode or a blue effect mode.

As shown in FIGS. 14-28 (E) and 14-28 (F), in this example, the pre-reading notice effect can be executed by the red effect mode and the blue effect mode, and the case of a big hit is out of order. It is configured so that the ratio of executing the look-ahead notice effect is higher depending on the red effect mode than in the case of. Therefore, it is suggested that the expectation of a big hit is high by executing the pre-reading advance notice effect of the red effect mode.

In such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 14-28 (E) and 14-28 (F), in the time saving state C, the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed only in the red effect mode. With such a configuration, in the case of the time saving state C (that is, when the big hit has not occurred for a long period of time), the deterioration of the interest when the pre-reading notice effect is executed is suppressed by the blue effect mode in which the big hit expectation is low. be able to. In this example, in the time saving state C, the look-ahead notice effect is executed only in the red effect mode, but when the time is off, the look-ahead notice effect is not executed at a rate of 99%. Therefore, although the pre-reading notice effect is executed in the red effect mode, the display result is configured so as not to occur frequently.

In this example, by setting the determination ratio as shown in FIGS. 14-28, a look-ahead notice is given depending on whether the time saving state C (that is, no big hit has occurred for a long period of time) or the time saving state C. The execution ratio of the production, the production type, and the ratio of the production mode can be different, and the interest can be improved.

In this example, as will be described later, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 times or less, the execution of the advance notice effect is restricted (even if only the advance notice effect with high expectation is not executed). Although it is configured to be good), the execution of the look-ahead advance notice effect may also be restricted (for example, the execution rate may be reduced (or not executed). It may be configured to reduce (or not execute) the ratio, or may reduce (or not execute) the execution ratio of the pre-reading advance notice effect of the type with high expectation.

Further, not limited to the example shown in FIGS. 14-28, for example, even in the time saving state C, when the variable display that is a big hit or the time saving is executed, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is not restricted. May be good.

When the process of step 108IWS704 is completed, the effect control CPU 120 sets the execution of the look-ahead advance notice effect based on the determined content (step 108IWS704). For example, when it is determined to execute the chance eye effect, the chance eye flag is set as the execution setting of the chance eye effect in step 108IWS704. Then, in steps 108IWS809 to S810 of the variable display start setting process described later, when the chance eye flag is set, the chance eye effect is executed by selecting the process table including the chance eye effect. The chance eye flag is reset when the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display to be read ahead is executed.

Further, for example, when it is determined to execute the hold change effect, the hold change effect is executed by changing the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the command at the time of starting winning in step 108IWS704.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 14-31 is a flowchart showing a variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 100 IWS801). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays a decorative symbol display result (stop) according to the variation pattern command read in step 100IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command). The symbol) is determined (step 100IWS802). That is, by executing the process of step 100IWS802 by the effect control CPU 120, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the decorative symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. When the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120 has a chance eye symbol (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-ream in step 100IWS802. , A combination of a jackpot symbol that does not reach but one symbol is out of alignment) is also determined. The effect control CPU 120 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In step 100IWS802, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. ..

In step 100 IWS802, when the received display result designation command indicates "normal jackpot", the effect control CPU 120 has a decorative symbol in which the three symbols are the same even-numbered symbols as the stop symbol. Determine the combination (usually the jackpot symbol). Further, when the received display result specification command indicates "probability variation jackpot", the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols (probability variation jackpot symbol) in which three symbols are the same odd-numbered symbols as stop symbols. do. Further, when the received display result designation command indicates "sudden probability change big hit", the effect control CPU 120 determines the combination of the decorative symbols of "135" (sudden probability change big hit symbol) as the stop symbol.

Then, in the case of "off", a combination of decorative patterns other than the above is determined. However, when accompanied by a reach effect, a combination of decorative symbols in which the two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. In addition, even if it is out of order, if it is "out of time saving", the combination of decorative symbols of the outlier symbol including the special symbol (for example, the star symbol) is determined. It should be noted that the combination of decorative symbols of the outlier symbols including different special symbols (for example, heart-shaped symbols and rhombic symbols) may be determined according to the time saving type. Further, when the execution setting of the chance eye effect is set, the combination of the decorative symbols of the chance eye symbol (“778” in this example) is determined.

The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbols and the numerical value are associated with each other to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

As for the decorative symbols, the stop symbol (a combination of symbols with the same symbol on the left, middle, and right) reminiscent of a jackpot is called a jackpot symbol. In addition, among the jackpot symbols, the stop symbol (combination of symbols in which the left, middle, and right are all the same odd-numbered symbols) reminiscent of the probabilistic jackpot is called the probabilistic jackpot symbol. In addition, among the jackpot symbols, a stop symbol (a combination of symbols in which the left, middle, and right are all the same even-numbered symbols) that reminds us of a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) is called a non-probability variation jackpot symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that reminds us of an outlier is called an outlier symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the execution of the advance notice effect to be executed during the variable display (step 108IWS802A). As a notice effect, for example, a timer effect can be executed in which a countdown is started after the start of fluctuation and an effect image suggesting a jackpot expectation is displayed when the count number becomes "0". In step 108IWS802A, the timer effect is executed. You may set the execution of.

FIG. 14-32 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the advance notice effect execution determination table and the advance notice effect mode determination table. In step 108IWS802A, when the number of times remaining until the relief time reduction exceeds 10 times, the presence or absence of execution of the advance notice effect is determined using the advance notice effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 14-32 (A), and the relief time reduction is performed. When the number of remaining times up to is 10 or less, it is determined whether or not the advance notice effect is executed by using the advance notice effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 14-32 (B). Further, when it is decided to execute the advance notice effect, if the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened exceeds 10, the effect form of the advance notice effect is determined using the advance notice effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 14-32 (C). Then, when the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, the mode of the notice effect is determined using the notice effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 14-32 (D).

As shown in FIGS. 14-32 (A) and 14-32 (B), in this example, the advance notice effect can be executed in both the case where the display result is a big hit and the case where the display result is a big hit. It is configured so that the rate of executing the advance notice effect is higher in the case of becoming than in the case of being out of order. Therefore, it is suggested that the expectation of a big hit is high by executing the advance notice effect.

In such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 14-32 (A) and 14-32 (B), a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less). In this case, the rate of executing the advance notice effect is lower than the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened exceeds 10) when the display result is out of alignment. It is configured as follows. With such a configuration, the advance notice effect is given in a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less, and the countdown effect and the effect effect described later are executed). It is possible to suppress the decline in interest when the game is executed but it does not become a big hit.

Further, in the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less), the countdown effect and the effect effect described later are executed. At this time, the timer is used as a notice effect. By limiting the execution of the effect, it is possible to avoid displaying a plurality of numerical values indicating the counters, and it is possible to prevent them from interfering with each other.

As shown in FIGS. 14-32 (C) and 14-32 (D), in this example, a red effect mode (for example, a red effect image is displayed) and a blue effect mode (for example, a blue effect image are displayed). The notice effect can be executed by (displayed), and the rate of executing the notice effect according to the red effect mode is higher in the case of a big hit than in the case of the loss. Therefore, it is suggested that the expectation of a big hit is high by executing the advance notice effect of the red effect mode.

In such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 14-32 (C) and 14-32 (D), a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less). If the display result is different from the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened exceeds 10), the advance notice effect is executed by the red effect mode. It is configured so that the ratio of doing so is low. With such a configuration, the interest when the advance notice effect is executed in the red effect mode during the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less) is not a big hit. Can be suppressed.

In addition, when a plurality of types of notice effects having different jackpot expectations are configured to be executable, a notice effect of a type with a high jackpot expectation (for example, when the jackpot expectations are classified into 5 stages,) Only for the type of notice production with a jackpot expectation of 4th stage or higher), the execution is restricted in the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less). May be good.

Further, not limited to the example shown in FIGS. 14-32, for example, even if the number of remaining times until the relief time reduction is 10 or less, when a variable display that is a big hit or a time reduction is executed, the advance notice effect is executed. You may not limit it.

Further, as described above, in this example, in the case of the time saving state C, the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is restricted, but the execution of the advance notice effect is also restricted (for example, the execution rate is lowered). It may be set (or not executed). In this case, it may be configured to reduce (or not execute) the execution rate of the advance notice effect in the case of a loss, or it may be configured to reduce (or not execute) the advance notice effect of a type with high expectation. The execution rate may be reduced (or not executed).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times. (Step 100 IWS803). Whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times is determined by, for example, the number of relief time reductions of 2. It can be determined by checking whether or not the specified command has been received.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times, the effect control CPU 120 is until the relief time is shortened. A process table containing the fanning effect according to the remaining number of fluctuations of is selected (step 100IWS804). For example, when the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction 2 specified command is "01 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is reduced is 100), the remaining number of fluctuations is set to "100". Select the process table that contains the corresponding fanning effect. Further, for example, when the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 2 designation command is "08 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 800), the remaining number of fluctuations is "800 times". Select a process table that includes a fanning effect according to. Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is not 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the relief time is shortened. It is confirmed whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the result is 0 (step 108IWS805). Whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 0 is determined by checking, for example, whether or not the value of the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction 1 designation command is 0. Can be judged.

When the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 0, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the display result is a big hit (step 108IWS806A). When the display result is not a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time reduction rush effect that notifies that the time reduction state is controlled by the relief time reduction (step 100IWS806B). With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the relief time is controlled to be reduced to the time reduction state by the time reduction rush effect, and it is possible to improve the interest when the relief time is shortened.

On the other hand, when the display result is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time-saving rush rush effect that notifies that the display result will be a big hit after executing an effect in the same mode as the time-saving rush effect ( Step 100 IWS806C). Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812. With such a configuration, once the player recognizes that the number of remaining fluctuations has become 0 until the relief time is shortened, it is notified that a big hit will occur, so that the player can be given a surprise. You can improve your interest.

In this example, when the display result becomes a big hit when the number of fluctuations of the relief time reduction is reached, the time reduction rushing pretending effect is executed using the special relief time reduction fluctuation big hit fluctuation pattern. For example, even if the full rotation effect (that is, the jackpot is confirmed) that fluctuates while the three decorative symbols are aligned, which is not executed except when the number of fluctuations of the relief time reduction is reached, is executed. good. With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and special feeling, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, for example, when the display result becomes a big hit when the number of fluctuations of the relief time reduction is reached, the same fluctuation pattern for big hits as usual may be used, or a reach effect with a short fluctuation time is specified. It may be configured to use a variation pattern.

Further, in this example, when the display result is out of order when the number of fluctuations in the relief time reduction is reached, a dedicated variation pattern for the relief time reduction deviation is used. A fluctuation pattern for deviation similar to the usual one may be used, or a fluctuation pattern that specifies a reach effect with a short fluctuation time may be used. With this configuration, the fluctuation pattern can be shared between when the number of fluctuations in the relief time reduction is reached and before it is reached, and the data capacity can be reduced. In this case, when the symbol determination period elapses, the time saving state C is entered, and the background image (in this example, the orange color) corresponding to the time saving state C (the time saving state via the relief time saving) is displayed on the image display device 5. Since the background image of the display color can be switched to (see step 078IWS638), it is possible to notify that the change in the background image controls the time saving state by the relief time saving.

When the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 times or less (). Step 108 IWS807). To check whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, for example, check whether the value of the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction 1 designation command is 10 or less. It can be judged by doing.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including a countdown effect and an effect effect according to the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. (Step 108 IWS808). For example, when the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction 1 specified command is "0A (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is reduced is 10), the count number until the relief time is reduced " Select a process table that includes a countdown effect and an effect effect according to "10". Further, for example, when the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction 1 designation command is "01 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 1), the count until the relief time is shortened. Select a process table that includes a countdown effect and an effect effect according to the number "1". Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812.

In this example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief fluctuation is 10 or less, the countdown effect and the effect effect are executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to expect the player to change the relief, and it is possible to improve the interest. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage for the player due to the player ending the game immediately before the relief change.

In this example, the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is determined based on the EXT data of the relief time reduction 1 designation command and the relief time reduction number 2 designation command, and the fanning effect or the countdown effect is executed. Although shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the background specification command for specifying the background image is configured to be transmitted, the EXT data of the background specification command is configured to be set with a value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and transmitted. You may. Then, the effect control CPU 120 side may be configured to determine the remaining number of fluctuations based on the EXT data of the received background designation command and execute the fanning effect or the countdown effect.

Further, in this example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief fluctuation is 10 or less, the countdown effect and the effect effect are always executed, but whether or not to execute by lottery. You may decide whether or not. Further, for example, when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief fluctuation is not 10 times or less, the so-called Gase countdown effect and effect effect (for example, the countdown effect and the effect effect are executed in the same manner as the effect effect). , The countdown effect and the effect effect according to the count number "0" are not continuously executed, but are interrupted in the middle. (See FIG. 14-42). May be good. In this case, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief fluctuation is 10 times or less, the countdown effect and the effect effect (genuine and fake) are compared to when the number of fluctuations is not 10 times or less. Including) may be executed at a higher rate. With such a configuration, it is possible to expect the player to change the relief, and it is possible to improve the interest. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage for the player due to the player ending the game immediately before the relief change.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is not 10 times or less (N in step 108IWS807), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution setting of the chance eye effect is set (step 108IWS809). , When the execution setting of the chance eye effect is set, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table including the chance eye effect (including the effect of inciting whether or not the chance eye effect is obtained) (step 108 IWS810). .. In addition, when the execution setting of the chance eye effect is not set, the effect that the chance eye pattern is not stopped and displayed after executing the effect of inciting whether or not it becomes the chance eye (so-called chance eye effect of Gase) is executed by lottery. You may decide whether or not to do so.

When the execution setting of the chance eye effect is not set, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table according to the fluctuation pattern (step 108 IWS811). Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 108IWS812).

The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (effect component) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of a collection of a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, in the process timer set value, the fluctuation time in the mode of the fluctuation is set. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table and controls the display control to display the decorative symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 12. In addition, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

In the process table used when executing the effect control for the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbol to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the image for displaying the symbol is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the pseudo-ream, and the temporary stop symbol in the sliding effect. You may.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 108IWS813). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (phone number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 108IW, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one, while the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step 108IWS814).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (step 108IWS815).

(Variable display during production processing)
14-33 and 14-34 are flowcharts showing the variable display during effect processing (step S172) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 100IWS841) and 1 subtracts the variable time timer value (step 100IWS842). When the process timer times out (step 100IWS843), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 100IWS844). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step 100IWS845).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command has been received (step 100IWS846). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the first confirmed A command reception flag or the second confirmed A command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a mode transition effect (an effect of notifying the transition to the time reduction state (time reduction mode)) and right-handed. The process table corresponding to the notification is selected (step 100IWS847). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS848). Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 100IWS849). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 20 seconds in the confirmation effect period timer for measuring the symbol determination period on the effect control means side (step 100IWS850). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS862.

In this example, when the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the time reduction may be delayed or the relief time may be shortened during the normal state. However, in step 100IWS847, when the time reduction is lost during the normal state, the process table corresponding to the mode transition effect for the time reduction deviation and the right-handed notification is selected, and when the relief time is shortened, the relief time is shortened. Select the process table according to the mode transition effect and right-handed notification. Whether or not the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received as the relief time is shortened is determined by, for example, the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command being "00 ( It can be determined by confirming whether or not it is "H)".

If neither the first symbol confirmation A designation command nor the second symbol confirmation A designation command has been received, whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command. (Step 100 IWS851). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the first confirmed B command reception flag or the second confirmed B command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the continuation effect (the effect of notifying that the time saving state continues). (Step 100 IWS852). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS853). Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 100IWS854). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 10 seconds in the confirmation effect period timer for measuring the symbol determination period on the effect control means side (step 100IWS855). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS862.

If neither the first symbol confirmation B designation command nor the second symbol confirmation B designation command has been received, whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command. (Step 100 IWS 856). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the first confirmed C command reception flag or the second confirmed C command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step 100IWS858.

If neither the first symbol confirmation C designation command nor the second symbol confirmation C designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step 100IWS857). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

When the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command is received (Y in step 100IWS856), or when the fluctuation time timer has timed out (Y in step 100IWS857), the effect control CPU 120 is normally used. Select the process table according to the symbol confirmation display of (step 100IWS858). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS859). Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 100IWS860). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds in the confirmation effect period timer for measuring the symbol determination period on the effect control means side (step 100IWS861). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS862.

In this example, in addition to the case where the symbol confirmation designation command is received, even when the fluctuation time timer times out (see step 100IWS857), the process shifts to the processing after step 100IWS858 and shifts to the symbol confirmation period. However, normally, if the symbol confirmation designation command is not missed, it is determined as Y in step 100IWS857 and the process does not shift to the processing after step 100IWS858.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 100 IWS862).

(Waiting processing per special figure)
14-35 is a flowchart showing a special figure hit waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the fixed effect period timer (step 100IWS871), and confirms whether or not the value of the fixed effect period timer after the subtraction has timed out (step 100IWS871). Step 100 IWS872). Final effect period after subtraction If the timer value has not timed out, the process timer value is subtracted by 1 (step 100IWS873), and the contents of the process data n (display control execution data n, lamp control execution data n, sound number data). Control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speakers 8L, 8R as the effect component) is executed according to n) (step 100IWS874).

Further, when the process timer times out (step 100IWS875), the effect control CPU 120 switches the process data (step 100IWS876). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the next set process timer setting value in the process table in the process timer and starts the process timer (step 087IWS877).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is being confirmed and displayed (step 100IWS878). Stopping the decorative symbol If the symbol is being confirmed and displayed, the process ends as it is. If the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is not being confirmed and displayed, the effect control CPU 120 controls to stop and display the determined stop symbol (missing symbol (no time reduction), time saving deviation symbol, jackpot symbol) (step 100IWS879). ).

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step 100IWS879 (Y in step 100IWS880), the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot stop flag indicating that the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed (step 100IWS881). Then, the process ends.

If the value of the fixed effect period timer after subtraction has timed out (that is, if the symbol fixed period has elapsed), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot stop flag is set (step). 100IWS882). If the jackpot stop flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received (step 100IWS883). Whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the jackpot start designation command reception flag (see step 100IWS622) is set. If the jackpot start specification command has not been received, the process ends as it is.

If the jackpot start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the jackpot stop flag (step 100IWS884). Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the big hit medium effect including the mode transition effect (the effect of notifying the transition to the probability change state (probability change mode) or the time reduction state (time reduction mode)) and the right-handed notification. (Step 100 IWS885). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 100IWS886), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). The control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step 100 IWS887).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during the jackpot (step 100 IWS888).

If the jackpot stop flag is not set (that is, when the missed symbol (no time reduction) or the missed symbol is stopped and displayed), the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to the variable display start wait process. The value is updated according to (step S170) (step 100IWS889).

(Direction execution timing)
Next, the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time will be described. FIG. 14-36 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when the variable display that shortens the relief time is executed. As shown in FIGS. 14-36, in the variation display immediately before the variation display that shortens the relief time (the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1), the variation display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is finished, and the missing symbol (no time reduction). When is stopped and displayed, the out-of-order symbol (no time reduction) is confirmed and displayed over the symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100IWS1137). Next, in the variation display (see steps 100IWS74 and S75) in which the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0 at the start of the variation display and the relief time is shortened, the time reduction rush effect is executed in the image display device 5 during the variation display of the special symbol. (See step 108 IWS806B). Then, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished and the out-of-order symbol (no time reduction) is stopped and displayed, the out-of-design symbol (no time reduction) is confirmed and displayed over the symbol confirmation period of 20 seconds (see step 100IWS1135). Further, during the symbol determination period, as shown in FIGS. 14-36, the mode transition effect is executed in the image display device 5 (see step 100IWS847). Next, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses during the symbol determination period, right-handed notification is started in the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 14-36 (see step 100IWS847). Next, when the symbol determination period elapses, the process shifts to the time saving state C, and as shown in FIGS. 14-36, the background image (this example) corresponding to the time saving state C (time saving state via the relief time saving) in the image display device 5. Then, it can be switched to the orange display color background image) (see step 100IWS638). With such a configuration, it is possible to secure a period for notifying that the control of the time saving state (relief time saving) is started in the normal state, and it is possible to clarify the effect when switching the game state and to enjoy the hobby. Can be improved.

(Production example)
Next, a specific example of the effect mode until the transition to the time saving state C, which is the relief time saving, will be described. 14-37 to 14-40 are explanatory views for explaining a specific example of the effect mode until the state shifts to the time saving state. In addition, in FIGS. 14-37 to 14-40, the effect screens transition in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

As shown in FIG. 14-37 (A), the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is displayed every 100 rotations when the symbol is stopped. In this example, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol 100IW100 is displayed in the center of the screen, and the small symbol 100IW101 is displayed in the upper right. Then, for example, it is assumed that the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 are stopped and the detached symbol (in this example, the combination of the symbols of "134") is derived and displayed when the remaining 800 rotations until the transition to the relief time reduction. At this time, the remaining rotation speed display 100IW102 is displayed in the upper left corner, saying "Relief time reduction starts with 800 rotations left!". Further, at this time, the explanation regarding the relief time reduction (for example, the explanation of the relief time reduction function and the effect of the relief time reduction) is displayed at the lower part of the screen by the telop display 100IW103. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine provided with the relief time reduction.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-37 (B), for example, when there are 700 rotations remaining until the transition to the relief time reduction, the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 stop and the symbol is off (in this example, "423"). (Combination of symbols) is derived and displayed. At this time, similarly to FIG. 14-37 (A), the remaining rotation speed display 100IW102 is displayed in the upper left, which says "Relief time reduction starts with 700 rotations left!". Further, at this time, the explanation regarding the relief time reduction (for example, the explanation of the relief time reduction function and the effect of the relief time reduction) is displayed at the lower part of the screen by the telop display 100IW103.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 14-37 (A) and 14-37 (B), a case is shown in which a fanning effect suggesting the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is executed every 100 fluctuations. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 400 to 800 times, the fanning effect is not executed, and when the remaining number of times is 300 times or less (hence, the remaining number of times is 300 times, 200 times, 100 times), the fanning effect is performed. It may be configured to run.

In addition, instead of always executing the fanning effect when the remaining number of fluctuations is reached, for example, when a command for specifying the number of times of relief time 2 is received, a lottery process based on a random number is performed and it is decided to execute the fanning effect. It may be configured to perform the fanning effect in the manner shown in FIGS. 14-37 (A) and 14-37 (B). Further, in this case, it is desirable to configure so that the execution rate of the fanning effect increases as the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened decreases.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 14-37 (C) to 14-38 (E), the countdown display 100IW104A according to the remaining number of rotations is displayed in the center of the screen after the remaining 10 rotations until the transition to the relief time reduction. NS. For example, in the countdown display 100IW104A, a state of counting down from "10" to "1" is displayed every time the variation display of the symbol ends and the symbol stops. It should be noted that each figure shows an example in which out-of-order symbols (in this example, a combination of symbols of "653", "844", and "123") are derived and displayed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-37 (C) to 14-38 (E), the effect display 100IW104B in the range corresponding to the remaining rotation speed is displayed after the remaining 10 rotations until the transition to the relief time reduction. .. In this example, as the remaining number of revolutions decreases (that is, as the relief time shortens approach), the range in which the effect display 100IW104B is displayed becomes wider (the number displayed increases).

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-38 (E), there is only one rotation remaining until the transition to the relief time reduction, the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 are displayed in a variable manner, and the symbol is stopped and the symbol is out of alignment (in this example, the symbol is out of alignment). It is assumed that the combination of the symbols of "123") is derived and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-38 (F), the remaining 0 rotations are reached until the transition to the relief time reduction, and the variation display of the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 (that is, the variation display that shortens the relief time) is started. As shown in FIG. 14-38 (G), the time saving rushing effect for notifying that the time saving state (relief time saving) is controlled is started, and the time saving rushing effect display 100IW104C is displayed on the image display device 5. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the time saving state (relief time saving) is controlled, and it is possible to improve the interest when the time saving state (relief time saving) is reached.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-38 (G), when the time saving rush effect is started, the decorative symbol 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small symbol 100IW101 is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-38 (H), the decorative symbol 100IW100 is not displayed when the symbol is stopped, and only the small symbol 100IW101 (in this example, the combination of the symbols of "254") is derived and displayed.

In addition, in the time-saving rushing effect, notifications that are generally performed during the first ending period, such as warnings for forgetting to remove the prepaid card and warnings for preventing immersiveness, may be given, or the logo of the gaming machine manufacturer. May be displayed. In this case, the notification in the time-saving rush effect may be performed in the same manner as the notification in the ending period of the first hit, or may be notified in a simplified manner. Further, these notifications may not be performed in the time saving rush effect, but may be performed in the ending period of the first big hit after shifting to the time saving state due to the relief time saving.

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-39 (I), when the symbol determination period is entered, the mode effect start display 100IW105 saying "super heat!" Is displayed, and the mode transition effect is started. After that, even in the mode transition effect, the decorative symbol 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small symbol 100IW101 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-39 (J), when the mode transition effect is started, the operation suggestion image 100IW106 suggesting that the push button 31B (see FIG. 14-1) is operated (pressed) is displayed. NS. For example, in the operation suggestion image 100IW106, the characters "press" are displayed together with the image prompting the push button 31B to be pressed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-39 (K), when the push button 31B is operated when the operation suggestion image 100IW106 is displayed, or when a predetermined time elapses from the display of the operation suggestion image 100IW106, "V" The character display 100IW107 of "STOCK x 1" is displayed, and it is notified that the relief time reduction is started. In addition, a right-handed instruction display 100IW108 for instructing right-handedness is displayed next to the small symbol 100IW101.

In this example, even if a big hit occurs, it is possible to execute an effect of displaying the character display of "V STOCK x 1" as in FIG. 14-39 (K). In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs a look-ahead determination process of whether or not a big hit is obtained and a variation pattern type look-ahead determination process in the start winning prize determination process (step S101). Sends a look-ahead judgment result specification command that can specify the result. Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect (so-called hold continuous effect) in the same manner as in FIG. 14-39 (K) based on the received look-ahead determination result designation command. For example, if it is specified that there is one big hit in the hold memory based on the received look-ahead judgment result specification command, the character display of "V STOCK x 1" is displayed to produce the hold continuous effect. To execute. Further, for example, when it is specified that there are two big hits in the hold storage based on the received look-ahead judgment result specification command, the character display of "V STOCK x 2" is displayed to hold the hold. Perform a series of productions.

On the other hand, when the relief time is shortened, it is highly likely that the fluctuation display with an extremely short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is executed during the time reduction state via the relief time reduction (see FIG. 14-8 (E)). ), Therefore, the variable display is digested extremely quickly, and a big hit is likely to occur at a relatively early timing. Therefore, in the variable display (in this example, the symbol confirmation period) in which the relief time is shortened, the character display of "V STOCK x 1" shown in FIG. 14-39 (K) is displayed without confirming the look-ahead determination result. The effect to be displayed is executed. Therefore, the effect of displaying the character display of "V STOCK x 1" shown in FIG. 14-39 (K) has the same aspect as the pseudo hold continuous effect, and the relief time is shortened. It is a production to notify.

The case where the display of the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 is started from the display timing of the character display 100IW107 of "V STOCK x 1" is shown, but the display start timing of the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 is limited to the one shown in this example. do not have. For example, the display of the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 may be started from the timing of the final display of the stop symbol shown in FIG. 14-38 (H), and various modes are conceivable.

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-39 (L), the mode selection screen 100IW109 for selecting the effect mode for shortening the relief time is displayed. For example, a screen for selecting one of modes A to D is displayed. The mode is selected by moving the cursor by operating the stick controller 31A, and is confirmed by operating the push button 31B. When a predetermined time elapses without selecting the effect mode, the effect mode in which the cursor matches is automatically determined. Further, even when the mode selection screen 100IW109 is displayed, the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 remains displayed next to the small symbol 100IW101.

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-40 (M), when the selection of the effect mode is completed, the start notification screen 100IW110 for notifying that the relief time reduction is started is displayed. For example, the words "relief short rush" are displayed. Then, when the next fluctuation is started, the state shifts to the time saving state C, and the relief time saving is started.

Next, the production mode of the time-saving rushing pretending effect will be described. FIG. 14-41 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode of the time-saving rushing masquerade effect. The example shown in FIGS. 14-41 follows the example of FIGS. 14-37 (A) to (D).

As shown in FIG. 14-41 (E), there is only one rotation left until the transition to the relief time reduction, the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 are displayed in a variable manner, and the symbol stops and comes off (in this example, "123". (Combination of symbols) is derived and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-41 (F'), the remaining 0 rotations are reached until the transition to the relief time reduction, and the variable display of the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 is started. In this variable display, the relief time is shortened, but the display result is a big hit. Therefore, after the display result is derived and displayed, it does not shift to the time saving state due to the relief time saving, but shifts to the big hit game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-41 (G'), the time-saving rushing effect pretending effect is started, and the time-saving rushing effect display 100IW104C having the same mode as the time-saving rushing effect is displayed on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 14-41 (G'), when the time saving rushing effect is started, the decorative symbol 100IW100 is not displayed and only the small symbol 100IW101 is displayed, as in the case of starting the time saving rushing effect. Is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-41 (H), when the display of the time saving rush effect display 100IW104C is completed, the decorative symbol 100IW100 is not displayed when the symbol is stopped, and the small symbol 100IW101 (in this example, the symbol "254") is not displayed. Only the combination of) is derived and displayed. The variable display of the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 is stopped, and the jackpot symbol (in this example, the combination of the symbols of "777") is derived and displayed. After that, it shifts to the big hit game. With such a configuration, after the player once recognizes the establishment of the relief time reduction, it is notified that a big hit will be made, so that the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved.

It should be noted that the character game that controls the configuration of the feature unit 108IW to the big hit game based on the game ball winning (V winning) in the specific area (V winning area) in the character during the small hit game is also executed. When applied to a game machine that is configured to be possible, when the display result of the variable display that shortens the relief time is a small hit, a time saving rush pretending effect is executed to notify that the small hit is achieved. May be good.

Next, a mode of producing a so-called Gase countdown effect and an effect effect will be described. FIG. 14-42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode of the so-called Gase countdown effect and effect effect.

As shown in FIGS. 14-42 (A) to (C), when the remaining 49 rotations are reached until the transition to the relief time reduction, the so-called Gase countdown effect is executed, so that the remaining rotation speed is 10 times. A countdown display 100IW104A according to the case is displayed in the center of the screen. Then, every time the variation display of the symbol ends and the symbol stops, a state of counting down from "10" is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-42 (A) to (C), when the remaining 49 rotations are reached until the transition to the relief time reduction, the so-called Gase effect effect is executed, so that the remaining rotation speed is 10. The effect display 100IW104B in the range corresponding to the number of times is displayed. Then, each time the variation display of the symbol ends and the symbol stops, the effect display 100IW104B is displayed so that the display range becomes wider (the number of the symbols displayed increases).

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-42 (E), the countdown display 100IW104A and the effect display 100IW104B are displayed before the remaining number of revolutions is displayed in a mode corresponding to one time until the transition to the relief time reduction. Is terminated. At this time, since the remaining number of revolutions is not 0 until the transition to the relief time reduction, the time reduction rush effect is not executed.

When the so-called Gase countdown effect and effect effect as shown in FIGS. 14-42 are configured to be executable, the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened as shown in FIGS. 14-37 (A) and 14-37 (B). You may not perform the fanning effect that suggests. With such a configuration, when the countdown display 100IW104A or the effect display 100IW104B is displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to easily distinguish between genuine and fake.

In this example, when the symbol is stopped, the remaining number of revolutions until the relief time is shortened, the effect of the relief time is explained, and the countdown is displayed, but it may be performed at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol or during the fluctuation.

Further, in this example, the case where the symbol confirmation period is secured for 20 seconds and the mode transition effect or the right-handed notification is executed in the variable display in which the relief time is shortened is shown, but the symbol confirmation period is the normal 0.5 seconds. It may be configured to shift to the time saving state via the relief time saving as it is without performing the mode transition effect.

Further, in this example, the case where the relief time reduction count is initially set to "800" when the RAM clear processing is executed, when the jackpot is hit, or when the time reduction is lost is shown. Or, when it is configured to execute a story such as whether to make it fluctuate at high speed, it may be configured to clear the selection buffer and the story counter of the story. In addition, a story may be configured to be settable when the relief time is activated, or a different story may be configured to be settable according to the game state.

(Modification example 1)
In the above-mentioned feature unit 108IW, in the variable display that shortens the relief time, a symbol confirmation period of 20 seconds, which is longer than the normal 0.5 second, is set, and a mode transition effect or a right-handed notification is executed during the symbol confirmation period. Although shown, it is not limited to such a processing mode. For example, the symbol confirmation period is set to 0.5 seconds as usual, and then a postponement period until the start of the next fluctuation is provided, and the mode transition effect and the right-handed notification are executed during the postponement period. You may. Hereinafter, a modified example 1 in which a mode transition effect and a right-handed notification are executed with a postponement period until the start of the next fluctuation will be described.

FIG. 14-43 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process processing in the first modification. As shown in FIGS. 14-43, in the modified example 1, in addition to the process shown in FIG. 5, the next fluctuation postponement process (step 100 IWS114) is included in the special symbol process process. In the first modification, the start winning determination process (step 100 IWS101) is executed in the same manner as the start winning determination process (step 101) shown in FIG.

In the first modification, the special symbol normal processing (step 100IWS110) is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. Further, the fluctuation pattern setting process (step 100IWS111) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. Further, the special symbol variation process (step 100IWS112) is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. Further, the special symbol stop processing (step 100IWS113) is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”.

Further, the next fluctuation postponement process (step 100 IWS114) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”.

Further, the jackpot opening preprocessing (step 100IWS115) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. Further, the jackpot opening process (step 100IWS116) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. Further, the jackpot release post-processing (step 100IWS117) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. Further, the jackpot end processing (step 100IWS118) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”.

Further, the small hit opening pre-processing (step 100IWS119) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. Further, the small hit opening process (step 100 IWS120) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. Further, the small hit end process (step 100 IWS121) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “11”.

In the first modification, the special symbol normal process (step 100IWS110) and the variation pattern setting process (step 100IWS111) are the same as the processes of the special symbol normal process (step S110) and the variation pattern setting process (step S111) shown in FIG. Is. Further, in the modified example 1, in the special symbol variation processing (step 100IWS112) and the special symbol stop processing (step 100IWS113), the same 0.5 seconds as usual is set as the symbol determination period even when the relief time is shortened. , The first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command is transmitted, which is different from the special symbol variation processing (step S112) and the special symbol stop processing (step S113) shown in FIG.

In the first modification, the big hit opening pre-processing (step 100IWS115) to the small hit end processing (step 100IWS121) are the processes of the big hit opening pre-processing (step S114) to the small hit end processing (step S120) shown in FIG. Is similar to.

FIG. 14-44 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step 100 IWS113) in the first modification. In the first modification, the processing of steps 100IWS131 to S171 of the special symbol stop processing is the same as those processing shown in FIGS. 14-16 and 14-17. In the first modification, when the relief time reduction determination flag is reset in step 100IWS171, the CPU 103 sets the postponement period measurement timer for measuring the postponement period until the start of the next fluctuation to a predetermined postponement period (20 seconds in this example). A value corresponding to is set (step 100IWS171A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the next fluctuation postponement process (step 100IWS114) (step 100IWS171B). The process of step 100 IWS175 is the same as the process shown in FIG. 14-17.

FIG. 14-45 is a flowchart showing the next fluctuation postponement process (step 100 IWS 114) in the first modification. In the next fluctuation postponement process, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the postponement period measurement timer (step 100IWS191), and confirms whether or not the value of the postponement period measurement timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS192). .. If the value of the postponement period measurement timer after subtraction is not 0, the process ends.

If the value of the postponement period measurement timer after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets "800" in the time reduction counter (step 100IWS193) and sets "800" in the relief time reduction counter (step 100IWS193A). ). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag C and controls the time saving state (step 100IWS194). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the time saving state C designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS195).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 100IWS110) (step 100IWS196).

In the modified example 1, in the next fluctuation postponement processing, a case is shown in which the time is shortened at the timing when the postponement period (20 seconds in this example) until the start of the next fluctuation has elapsed. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, in the next fluctuation postponement process, right-handed notification may be performed, and the time may be shortened at the start of the postponement period until the start of the next fluctuation or in the middle of the postponement period. That is, in the next fluctuation postponement process, it may be configured to control the time saving state and perform right-handed notification, or it may be configured to perform only right-handed notification without controlling the time saving state. Aspects are conceivable.

Further, in the first modification, the case where 20 seconds is uniformly measured as the postponement period in the next fluctuation postponement processing is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the relief time reduction counter is set ("800" is set) at the timing when the relief time is shortened and the relief time reduction is configured to be continuously generated, the relief time reduction is performed during the normal state and the time reduction is performed. A different postponement period may be set depending on the case where the relief time is shortened during the state. For example, when the relief time is shortened during the time reduction state, a shorter postponement period is set as compared with the case where the relief time is shortened during the normal state, and the measurement is performed in the next fluctuation postponement process, and the relief time is shortened for the second and subsequent times. In some cases, the postponement period may be shortened.

Further, during the execution of the next fluctuation postponement process, the image display device 5 does not display the decorative symbol, but displays only the small symbol so that the small symbol is not hidden by the effecting object or the like. May be good.

Further, in the modified example 1, when the relief time is shortened, the case where the next fluctuation postponement process is executed to extend the period until the next fluctuation is started is shown, but the variation display of the time reduction is not limited to such a mode. Also, it may be configured to extend the period until the next fluctuation is started by executing the next fluctuation postponement processing similar to the first variation.

Further, as described above, when applied to the variation display of the time saving deviation, the processing of steps 100IWS154 to S168 shown in FIGS. 14-17 may also be configured to be executed in the next variation postponement processing. With such a configuration, the symbol confirmation period of the fluctuation display when the time reduction is lost can be shared to 0.5 seconds, which is the same as the normal fluctuation display, and the processing related to right-handed notification can also be performed in the case of relief time reduction. Can be executed in the same process as.

FIG. 14-46 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when the variation display that shortens the relief time in the first modification is executed. As shown in FIGS. 14-46, in the modified example 1, in the variation display immediately before the variation display in which the relief time is shortened (the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1), the variation display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is terminated and the pattern is removed. When the symbol (no time reduction) is stopped and displayed, the out-of-order symbol (no time reduction) is confirmed and displayed over the symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100IWS1137). Next, in the variation display (see steps 100IWS74 and S75) in which the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0 at the start of the variation display and the relief time is shortened, the time reduction rush effect is executed in the image display device 5 during the variation display of the special symbol. (See step 108 IWS806B). Then, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished and the out-of-order symbol (no time reduction) is stopped and displayed, the out-of-order symbol (no time reduction) is confirmed and displayed for the same 0.5-second symbol confirmation period as usual (step 078IWS1135). reference). Then, when the symbol determination period of 0.5 seconds is completed, as shown in FIGS. 14-46, the next fluctuation postponement period of 20 seconds is started (see step 100 IWS114). Then, in the next fluctuation postponement period, as shown in FIGS. 14-46, the mode transition effect is executed in the image display device 5. Next, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses during the next fluctuation postponement period, right-handed notification is started in the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 14-46. Then, when the next fluctuation postponement period elapses, the process shifts to the time saving state C, and as shown in FIG. 14-46, the background image (the present) corresponding to the time saving state C (time saving state via the relief time saving) in the image display device 5. In the example, it is switched to the background image of the orange display color).

In the case of the configuration as in the first modification, the fluctuation stop signal is output at the start of the symbol confirmation period of the outlier symbol, and after the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, the next fluctuation postponement process is started (that is, the next fluctuation postponement period). At the start), 4 jackpot signals may be output. The four jackpot signals here are signals that are output externally during the next fluctuation postponement period after the fluctuation display symbol determination period in which the relief time is shortened. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid an external signal omission when the fluctuation stop signal and the four jackpot signals are output at the same time.

Further, in the case of the configuration as in the modified example 1, at the start of the next fluctuation postponement process (that is, at the start of the next fluctuation postponement period), the player is in a gaming state in which it is assumed that the player makes a right-handed strike. A test signal or an external output signal indicating the above may be output, or a right-handed notification may be started. With such a configuration, it is possible to output a signal related to right-handed strike and to notify right-handed strike at an appropriate timing.

(Modifications 2 to 4)
Further, in the above-mentioned feature unit 108IW, the fluctuation pattern table E (see FIG. 14-8 (E)) is uniformly selected during the time saving state controlled based on the relief time saving, and the fluctuation of the high speed fluctuation of 1.5 seconds is performed. The case where the display is executed is shown, but it is not limited to such an aspect. Hereinafter, modifications 2 to 4 in which the method of selecting the fluctuation pattern in the time saving state based on the relief time saving is different will be described. 14-47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the modified examples 2 to 4 of the modified example 8-37, which is a method of selecting the variation pattern in the time-reduced state based on the relief time-saving.

First, with reference to FIG. 14-47 (A), a method of selecting a fluctuation pattern in the time saving state based on the relief time saving in the modification 2 will be described. In the above-mentioned feature unit 108IW, when the variation display is executed 800 times after the RAM clear processing (without becoming a big hit or a time saving loss), or after the big hit or the time saving is lost (the next big hit or the time saving is lost). Fluctuation pattern tables F, G (FIGS. 14-8 (F), (G)) from 10 before the fluctuation, which uniformly shortens the relief time, without distinguishing whether or not the fluctuation display is executed 800 times (without becoming). Select (see) and execute the fluctuation display for 5 seconds or 12 seconds at a high rate to execute the countdown effect and effect effect. After the relief time is shortened and the time is controlled to the time reduction state, the fluctuation pattern table E (Fig.) (See 14-8 (E)) is selected to execute the fluctuation display of high-speed fluctuation for 1.5 seconds, but the mode is not limited to such a mode.

For example, as shown in the second modification of FIG. 14-47, when the variation display is executed 800 times after the RAM clear processing and the relief time is shortened, the relief time is shortened from 10 before the variation to 1 before the variation. Also selects the fluctuation pattern table B (see FIG. 14-7 (B)) to execute the same fluctuation display as usual, and after the time reduction state is controlled based on the relief time reduction, the fluctuation pattern table C (FIG. 14-7) (See (C)) may be selected to select a fluctuation pattern similar to the time saving state during the jackpot, and the fluctuation display of 5 seconds may be executed at a high rate.

Further, for example, as shown in the modified example 3 of FIGS. 14-47, in the case where the relief time is shortened by executing the variation display 800 times after the big hit, the variation is performed when the 800th variation display is executed. A variation pattern for relief time saving variation deviation (for example, variation pattern PA3-1) is selected from the pattern table I (see FIG. 14-8 (I)), and variation display with a variation time of 25 seconds is executed. The feature unit 108IW is configured to execute a time saving rush effect during the variation display, and execute a mode transition effect and a right-handed notification during the symbol confirmation period. For example, during the variation display for 25 seconds. In, the mode transition effect and the right-handed notification may be executed (therefore, in this case, the symbol confirmation period may be secured for 0.5 seconds as usual).

In addition, in the modification 2 and the modification 3 of FIGS. 14-47, if the relief time is shortened after the RAM clear processing and the relief time is shortened after the big hit, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern in the variation display that is the relief time is different. It is possible to make the effect different, and it is also possible to make the effect different from the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern in the variation display after shifting to the time saving state via the relief time saving.

Further, for example, as shown in the modified example 4 of FIG. 14-47, the fluctuation pattern table B (see FIG. 14-7 (B)) is selected even before the 10 fluctuations to 1 fluctuation, which shortens the relief time. Perform the same fluctuation display as usual, select the fluctuation pattern table C (see Fig. 14-7 (C)) during the time reduction state based on the first relief time reduction, and select the fluctuation pattern similar to the time reduction state when passing through the jackpot. Select to execute a 5-second variation display at a high rate, select the variation pattern table E (see FIG. 14-8 (E)) during the time reduction state based on the second relief time reduction, and select a high speed of 1.5 seconds. It may be configured to perform a variation display of the variation.
(Example 2)

Next, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment in the feature unit 108IW of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-48 to 14-54. In addition, about Example 2, the part which is different from Example 1 will be mainly described.

In Example 2, in principle, it is not suggested that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and the relief time is close. Therefore, in the second embodiment, as in the fluctuation pattern table F as shown in FIG. 14-8 (F) of the first embodiment and the fluctuation pattern table G as shown in FIG. 14-8 (G), immediately before the relief time is shortened. There is no variable pattern table for this. That is, if the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIGS. 14-8 (F) and 14-8 (G) only immediately before the relief time reduction, the player notices that it is immediately before the relief time reduction due to the tendency of the fluctuation pattern. However, by not using such a fluctuation pattern table, it is possible to prevent it from being noticed.

Further, in the second embodiment, the variation display in which the relief time is shortened is not a dedicated variation pattern in the relief time reduction, but a variation pattern used in the variation display in which the relief time is not shortened (for example, variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)). Is used. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the relief time is shortened as in the fluctuation pattern table I as shown in FIG. 14-8 (I) of the first embodiment and the fluctuation pattern table J as shown in FIG. 14-8 (J). There is no variation pattern table for variation when it becomes. With such a configuration, it is possible to standardize the fluctuation pattern when the relief time is shortened and before the relief time is shortened, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Variation pattern setting process in Example 2)
Next, the fluctuation pattern setting process in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 14-48 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S111) in the second embodiment. In the variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step 100IWS1701). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot variation pattern table A shown in FIG. 14-7 (A) as the table for determining the variation pattern (step 100IWS1702).

If the jackpot flag is not set (that is, if it is off), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 100IWS1707). If the probability change flag is set (that is, in the probability change state), the CPU 103 uses the fluctuation pattern table for deviation in the probability change state shown in FIG. 14-8 (H) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. Select H (step 100 IWS 1708). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage counter, selects the variation pattern table H on condition that the value of the total pending storage counter is 1 or more, and sets the value of the total pending storage counter. If is 0 (that is, if there is no hold storage), the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 14-7 (B) is selected.

If the probability change flag is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag A indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the jackpot is set (step 100IWS1709). If the time saving flag A is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the jackpot), the CPU 103 uses the jackpot as shown in FIG. 14-7 (C) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern table C for the outlier in the controlled time saving state is selected (step 100IWS1710). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage counter, selects the variation pattern table C on condition that the value of the total pending storage counter is 1 or more, and sets the value of the total pending storage counter. If is 0 (that is, if there is no hold storage), the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 14-7 (B) is selected.

If the time saving flag A is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag B indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the time saving deviation is set (step 100IWS1711). If the time saving flag B is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the time saving deviation), the CPU 103 uses the time saving deviation as shown in FIG. 14-7 (D) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern table D for the loss in the time saving state controlled via the method is selected (step 100IWS1712). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage counter, selects the variation pattern table D on condition that the value of the total pending storage counter is 1 or more, and sets the value of the total pending storage counter. If is 0 (that is, if there is no hold storage), the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 14-7 (B) is selected.

If the time saving flag B is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag C indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the relief time saving is set (step 100IWS1713). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the relief time saving), the CPU 103 uses the relief time saving as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern as shown in FIG. 14-8 (E). The variation pattern table E for the loss in the time saving state controlled via the method is selected (step 100IWS1714).

If the time saving flag C is not set (that is, in the normal state), the CPU 103 uses the fluctuation pattern for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 14-7 (B) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. Select table B (step 100 IWS 1715).

Next, the CPU 103 uses the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 100IWS1702, S1708, S1710, S1712, S1714, and S1715, and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Based on this, it is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIGS. 14-7 and 14-8 should be used (step 100IWS1716).

When the variation pattern is determined, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1717).

Further, when the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined in step 100IWS1716, the CPU 103 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the fluctuation time timer and measures the fluctuation time. (Step 100IWS1718), the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is started (step 100IWS1719). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation processing (step 100IWS1720).

(Customer waiting demonstration production control process in Example 2)
As described above, in Example 2, in principle, it is not suggested that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and the relief time is close. Therefore, a telop display indicating that the rescue time saving function is provided is performed based on the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command (see FIG. 14-26), but the relief is performed depending on whether or not this telop display is executed and the production mode. It is not suggested that the remaining number of fluctuations until the time is shortened and the relief time is close. That is, in the second embodiment, based on the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command, the telop display for explaining the relief time reduction is always performed in a common manner.

Also in the second embodiment, it may be possible to suggest that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and the relief time reduction are close depending on whether or not the telop display is executed and the effect mode. However, in the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (for example, the period in which the remaining number of fluctuations is 10 or less), the execution of the telop display is restricted (for example, the execution rate decreases) as compared with the period before that. Or do not do it). With this configuration, when the relief time is shortened, the background image is suddenly changed (that is, the notification that the time reduction control by the relief time is started) is suddenly executed, which surprises the player. It can be given to improve the interest.

(Variable display start setting process in Example 2)
Next, the variable display start setting process in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 14-49 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the second embodiment. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 100 IWS801). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays a decorative symbol display result (stop) according to the variation pattern command read in step 100IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command). The symbol) is determined (step 100IWS802).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the execution of the advance notice effect to be executed during the variable display (step 108IWS802A). As a notice effect, for example, a timer effect can be executed in which a countdown is started after the start of fluctuation and an effect image suggesting a jackpot expectation is displayed when the count number becomes "0". In step 108IWS802A, the timer effect is executed. You may set the execution of.

FIG. 14-50 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the advance notice effect execution determination table and the advance notice effect mode determination table in the second embodiment. In step 108IWS802A of the second embodiment, whether or not the advance notice effect is executed is determined by using the advance notice effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 14-50 (A) regardless of the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened. Further, when it is determined that the advance notice effect is to be executed, the effect mode of the advance notice effect is determined using the advance notice effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 14-50 (B).

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 14-50 (A) and 14-50 (B), regardless of the number of times remaining until the relief time is shortened, whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect mode when the advance notice effect is executed are determined. It is configured to be determined by a common ratio. Further, also in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the relief time is shortened and the time saving state C is shifted, the background image corresponding to the time saving state C (time saving state via the relief time saving) is displayed in the image display device 5. (In this example, the background image of the orange display color) is configured to be switched (see step 078IWS638). With such a configuration, a change in the background image (that is, a notification that the time reduction control by the relief time reduction is started) is suddenly executed, so that the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved. can.

As described above, in the second embodiment, in principle, it is not suggested that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and the relief time is close. The process for executing the countdown effect and the effect effect, and the process for displaying the initial result according to the number of times until the relief time is shortened are omitted.

In addition, also in Example 2, it may be possible to execute a fanning effect, a countdown effect, and an effect effect according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. However, in the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (for example, the period in which the remaining number of fluctuations is 10 or less), the execution of the fanning effect, the countdown effect, and the effect effect is restricted (for example). , The execution rate decreases, or does not execute). With this configuration, the change in the background image (that is, the notification that the time reduction control by the relief time reduction is started) is suddenly executed, so that the player is surprised and the interest is improved. be able to.

Further, as described above, in the second embodiment, the variation display in which the relief time is shortened is not a dedicated variation pattern in the relief time reduction, but a variation pattern used in the variation display in which the relief time is not shortened (for example, the variation pattern PA1-1). (Normal variation)) is used. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the process for executing the time-saving rushing effect and the time-saving rushing masquerading effect is omitted. With such a configuration, for example, after the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) is performed, the change of the background image (that is, the notification that the time reduction control by the relief time reduction is started) is suddenly executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the fluctuation pattern (step 108IWS811). Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 108IWS812).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step 108IWS814).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (step 108IWS815).

(Production execution timing in Example 2)
Next, the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 14-51 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when the variable display that shortens the relief time in the second embodiment is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 14-51, in the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display that shortens the relief time (the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1), the special symbol fluctuation time (the special symbol fluctuation time () after the fluctuation display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is started. When (for example, 12 seconds) elapses, it ends, and when the out-of-order symbol (no time reduction) is stopped and displayed, the out-of-design symbol (no time reduction) is confirmed and displayed over the symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100IWS1137). Next, in the variation display (see steps 100IWS74 and S75) in which the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0 at the start of the variation display and the relief time is shortened, the variation display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is started as in the immediately preceding variation display. When the special symbol fluctuation time (for example, 12 seconds) elapses, the missed symbol (no time reduction) is stopped and displayed, and the missing symbol (no time reduction) is confirmed and displayed over the symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds. (See step 100 IWS1137). Then, when the symbol determination period elapses, the state shifts to the time saving state C, and as shown in FIGS. 14-51, the background image (this example) corresponding to the time saving state C (time saving state via the relief time saving) in the image display device 5. Then, it can be switched to the orange display color background image) (see step 100IWS638). With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and prevent the production from becoming complicated. In addition, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the change in the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest when the relief time is shortened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-51, the right-handed notification is executed during the period in which the variation display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) after the transition to the time saving state C (FIG. 14-52 (C1). )reference). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game state is a right-handed game while suppressing the production related to the transition to the time saving state C from becoming complicated, and the player is disadvantaged. Can be suppressed.

(Example of production in Example 2)
Next, a specific example of the effect mode until the transition to the time saving state C, which is the relief time saving in the second embodiment, will be described. FIG. 14-52 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode until the state shifts to the time saving state. In addition, in FIG. 14-52, the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14-52 (A), when the variation display for shortening the relief time is started and the special figure variation time (for example, 12 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. 14-52 (B). In addition, the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 are derived and displayed in a combination of the outlier symbols.

Then, when the symbol determination period elapses and the next variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 14-52 (C1), the image display device 5 responds to the time saving state C (time saving state via the relief time saving). The background image (in this example, the background image of the orange display color) is switched to, and the right-handed notification is executed.

If the hold memory is not stored when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, the image display device 5 is based on the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command as shown in FIG. 14-52 (C2). In the above, the background image (in this example, the background image of the orange display color) corresponding to the time saving state C (the time saving state via the relief time saving) may be switched, and the right-handed notification may be executed.

Further, at the timing shown in FIGS. 14-52 (C1) and 14-52 (C2), the explanation regarding the relief time reduction by the telop display 100IW103 as shown in FIGS. 14-37 (A) and 14-37 (B) (for example, the relief time reduction function and the relief time reduction) (Explanation of the production in) may be performed. Further, although the effect suggesting that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and the relief time is near is not executed, the telop display 100IW103 as shown in FIGS. 14-37 (A) and 14-37 (B) is performed at an arbitrary timing. May be displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

With the configuration shown in FIGS. 14-52, the change in the background image (that is, the notification that the time reduction control by the relief time reduction is started) is suddenly executed. Can be improved.

In addition, the change in the gaming state can be clearly notified to the player, and the interest when the relief time is shortened can be improved. In addition, it is possible to standardize the fluctuation pattern when the relief time reduction is established and before it is established, and the data capacity can be reduced.

It should be noted that the effect mode until the transition to the time saving state C, which is the relief time saving in the second embodiment, is not limited to that shown in FIGS. 14-52. For example, the modification 1 shown in FIG. 14-53 and the modification 2 shown in FIG. 14-53 may be used.

(Production example in Example 2 [Modification example 1])
FIG. 14-53 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode until the relief time is shortened in the modified example 1 of the second embodiment.

In the modified example 1 shown in FIG. 14-53, as shown in FIG. 14-53 (A), the variation display immediately before the variation display that shortens the relief time is stopped, and then the variation display that shortens the relief time is started. As shown in FIG. 14-53 (B), a time-saving rush effect (blackout effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100) displayed immediately before on the image display device 5 is executed. Will be done.

Then, when the special symbol fluctuation time (for example, 12 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. 14-53 (C), the blackout state is eliminated, and the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 are derived by a combination of the outlier symbols. Is displayed.

Then, when the symbol determination period elapses and the next variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 14-53 (D), the image display device 5 responds to the time saving state C (time saving state via the relief time saving). The background image (in this example, the background image of the orange display color) is switched to, and the right-handed notification is executed. At the timing shown in FIG. 14-53 (C) when the blackout state is resolved, an image display or an output sound for notifying that the control of the time saving state (relief time saving) is started is performed. May be good.

With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest. Note that the effect shown in FIGS. 14-53 can be obtained by selecting a process table including a time reduction rush effect (blackout effect), for example, in the variable display start setting process when the variable display is a relief time reduction. It can be realized.

(Production example in Example 2 [Modification 2])
FIG. 14-54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode until the relief time is shortened in the modified example 2 of the second embodiment.

In the modified example 2 shown in FIG. 14-54, as shown in FIG. 14-54 (A), the variation display that shortens the relief time is started, and a predetermined period (for example, 12 seconds) of the special figure variation time (for example, 12 seconds) is started. For example, after 8 seconds), as shown in FIGS. 14-54 (B), the decorative symbol 100IW100 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the image display device 5 in combination with the detached symbols. However, at the timing shown in FIGS. 14-54 (B), since the special figure fluctuation time has not elapsed, the small symbol 100IW101 is displayed in a variable manner.

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-54 (C), in the image display device 5, a time-saving rush effect (blackout effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100) displayed immediately before. Will be executed. Further, the special symbol fluctuation time elapses while the time saving rush effect (blackout effect) is being executed, and the small symbol 100IW101 is derived and displayed as a combination of the outlier symbols. The time saving rush effect (blackout effect) is continuously executed even during the symbol confirmation period.

Then, when the symbol determination period elapses and the next variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 14-54 (D), the blackout state is eliminated in the image display device 5, and the time saving state C ( It is possible to switch to the background image (in this example, the background image of the orange display color) according to the time saving state (time saving state via the relief time saving). Further, as shown in FIG. 14-54 (D), right-handed notification is executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest. Note that the effect shown in FIGS. 14-53 can be obtained by selecting a process table including a time reduction rush effect (blackout effect), for example, in the variable display start setting process when the variable display is a relief time reduction. It can be realized.

Relief by the telop display 100IW103 as shown in FIGS. 14-37 (A) and 14-37 (B) at the timings of FIGS. 14-53 (C), (D), 14-54 (C), (D), etc. An explanation regarding the time reduction (for example, an explanation of the relief time reduction function and the effect of the relief time reduction) may be given. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

In Example 1 of the feature unit 108IW shown above, in the period before the relief time is shortened (for example, the period in which the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief fluctuation is 10 or less), the fluctuation pattern that becomes the super reach is determined. , The decision to execute the advance notice effect is restricted, while in the second embodiment, none of them is restricted. However, by combining these, for example, before the relief time is shortened. In the period of (for example, the period in which the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief fluctuation is 10 or less), for example, the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) is determined, and the notice of the type in which the degree of expectation is not so high among the notice effects is determined. The production may be made feasible. That is, it is possible to limit the determination of the fluctuation pattern that becomes the super reach, and also limit the execution of the notice effect of the type with high expectation among the advance notice effects.

Further, in the feature portion 108IW and each modification shown above, as an effect suggesting that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and the relief time reduction are close (also referred to as a relief suggestion effect), a fanning effect or a countdown effect, The effect effect is executed, and the initial appearance and the telop display waiting for the customer (for example, the telop display 108IW101 shown in FIGS. 14-26) are displayed according to the number of times until the relief time is shortened. Not limited. For example, an operation effect of operating the movable body 32 at an arbitrary timing during the fluctuation display or a fluctuation stop, a light emission effect in which a light emitting body such as a decorative LED is made to emit light in a specific mode (for example, a rainbow is made to emit light), or a movable body 32. Depending on the execution frequency and execution mode of the vibration effect that vibrates the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, and the like, it may be suggested that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and the relief time is close.

Further, in the feature unit 108IW and each modification shown above, an effect control command (for example, an effect control command instructing recovery from a power failure or an effect control command instructing initialization) transmitted when the power is turned on is transmitted. , When the effect cannot be received normally on the production control board 12 side (for example, when a command is missed or a command is garbled), it is usually based on a command for specifying a game state or a command for specifying a fluctuation pattern. Although the effect of It may be possible). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from having expectations due to an erroneous relief suggestion effect.

Further, in the feature unit 108IW and each modification shown above, the relief time reduction number 1 designation command and the relief time reduction number 2 designation command (in this example, transmission is performed each time the variation display is executed) to specify the number of fluctuations up to the relief time reduction. If the message is not received normally, the relief suggestion effect may not be executed. In this case, the relief suggestion effect may not be executed only during the fluctuation display in which the relief time reduction number 1 specified command or the relief time reduction number 2 specified command could not be received normally, or the relief may be performed until the next big hit occurs. The suggestion effect may not be executed. In addition, for example, when reception is not performed normally, the relief suggestion effect is executed in an effect mode or execution ratio that suggests that the number of remaining fluctuations that shortens the relief time is large (that is, the relief time is not close to the time reduction). You may. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from having expectations due to an erroneous relief suggestion effect.

Further, in the feature portion 108IW and each modification shown above, a case where the application is applied to a gaming machine that controls a jackpot game based on a variation display result is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in a gaming machine configured to be able to execute a character game that controls a big hit game based on a game ball winning (V prize) in a specific area (V winning area) in the character during a small hit game. The configuration for controlling the feature portion 108IW shown above and the time saving state via the relief time saving shown in each modification may be applied.

Further, in the feature portion 108IW and each modification shown above, the case where the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is fixed at 800 times is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the value set in the relief time reduction counter may be switched to "800" or "900" depending on whether the RAM clear processing is executed or the jackpot occurs, or the value set in the relief time reduction counter at random may be set. It may be switched to "800" or "900".

In the feature portion 108IW and each modification shown above, the case where the time saving flag C is set each time the relief time saving occurs is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the time saving flag (fourth numerical value) set in the second relief time saving that has been transferred again may be different from the time saving flag (third numerical value) set in the first relief time saving.

In addition, in the feature portion 108IW and each modification shown above, the case where the time saving state after the big hit and the relief time saving have different effects (variation patterns) is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the time saving state after the big hit and the relief time saving may have the same effect (variation pattern). Specifically, even if the same notification (notification shown in FIG. 14-39 (K), notification suggesting future big hit acquisition, etc.) is performed as the end of the time reduction state after the big hit and the start of the relief time reduction. good.

In addition, in the feature portion 108IW and each modification shown above, the case where the effect (variation pattern) is different between the time reduction state of the time reduction and the relief time reduction is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the same effect (fluctuation pattern) may be used for the time saving state where the time saving is off and the relief time saving. Specifically, even if the same notification (notification shown in FIG. 14-39 (K), notification suggesting future jackpot acquisition, etc.) is performed as the end of the time reduction state that is out of the time reduction and the start of the relief time reduction. good.

As described above, the features 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1A) to (means 8A).

(Means 1A) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-17). Based on the execution of step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control computer 100, the part in which step 100IWS537 is executed in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-19) and the variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a portion of the game control computer 100 for executing step 100 IWS71), and the state control means are updated by the update means. By setting the numerical information to a specific value corresponding to the special number of times the variable display is executed, it is possible to control the game to a special state when the special condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-13). The part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the computer 100 for game control, the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17), the updating means is the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on whether the variable display of the above is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, step 100 IWS 71 in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Steps to be executed), a predetermined suggestion effect execution means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-49) capable of executing a predetermined suggestion effect (for example, a notice effect) when the variable display is being executed, a step in the effect control CPU 120. 108 IWS 811 is executed) and a special notification effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-52 (C1) and (C2)) for notifying that the control of the special state is started based on the establishment of the special condition. Special notification that can execute (such as changing the background image, blacking out at the start of fluctuation as shown in FIG. 14-53 (B), blacking out at the end of fluctuation as shown in FIG. 14-54 (C), etc.) Production execution means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-23) The effect control CPU 120 further includes (a portion where the step 100 IWS638 is executed), and the predetermined suggestion effect execution means has a common ratio of executing the predetermined suggestion effect in the period before the special condition is satisfied (for example, FIG. 14). As shown in −44, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A. See Figure 14-50). According to such a configuration, the player can be surprised by suddenly executing the special notification effect, and the interest can be improved.

(Means 2A) In the means 1A, the special notification effect executing means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is started, and the special notification effect is the special notification effect in the display means. This is an embodiment in which it is difficult to visually recognize the effect display displayed before the start (for example, blackout is performed at the start of the fluctuation as shown in FIG. 14-53 (B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest.

(Means 3A) In the means 1A, an effect variable display executing means capable of executing a variable display of the effect identification information (for example, a decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. The special notification effect executing means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied ends, and the special notification effect is an embodiment in which the identification information for the effect is difficult to see (for example). , Black out at the end of the fluctuation as shown in FIG. 14-54 (C)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest.

(Means 4A) In the means 1A, the special notification effect executing means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display after the variable display for which the special condition is satisfied is executed, and the special notification effect is displayed. In this mode, the background display in the means is changed to the background display corresponding to the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-52 (C1), the background image (orange) is displayed when the next variable display is executed. NS). According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest. In addition, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated.

(Means 5A) In any one of means 1A to 4A, an explanatory effect executing means capable of executing an explanatory effect relating to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition is provided (for example, FIGS. 14-52 (C1), (C2). ), At the timing shown in FIGS. 14-53 (D) and 14-54 (D), the telop display 100IW103 as shown in FIGS. 14-37 (A) and 14-37 (B) will be described). According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 6A) In any of means 1A to means 5A, a variable display pattern determining means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns) shows a variation pattern shown in FIGS. 14-48. The variable display pattern determining means is provided with a variable display pattern (for example, a variable display pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)) that can be determined when the special condition is satisfied and even before the special condition is satisfied. )), The special notification effect executing means can execute the special notification effect after the non-specific display result (for example, the out-of-order symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the special condition is controlled by the establishment of the special condition, and it is possible to clearly notify the player of the change in the gaming state. It is possible to improve the interest when is established.

(Means 7A) In any of the means 1A to the means 6A, the variable display executing means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is a step) capable of executing the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition. A portion for executing S112) and a hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage number buffer and a second hold storage number) that can store information related to variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. A buffer), a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information updated by the update means and hold information stored by the hold storage means even when the power supply is stopped, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied. An initialization means capable of executing an initialization process for initializing the storage contents of the backup storage means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S8) and backup storage when the power supply is started. A recovery means capable of executing a recovery process for recovering the numerical information updated by the update means and the hold information stored in the hold storage means based on the stored contents of the means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S6). Part) and. According to such a configuration, a power failure occurs in a situation where the hold storage corresponding to the variable display of the special number of times is stored before the power supply is stopped while optimizing the control by the initialization process. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player when the game is played.

(Means 8A) In any of the means 1A to the means 6A, a state storage means capable of storing special state information (for example, the states of the time saving flags A to C) capable of identifying that the special state is controlled, and a special state storage means. Execution count storage means that can store execution count information (for example, the value of the time reduction counter) that can specify the number of times the variable display is executed in the state, and special state information and execution count information even if the power supply is stopped. A backup storage means that can hold numerical information (for example, RAM 102) and an initialization means that can execute an initialization process that initializes the stored contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, game control). A portion of the computer 100 for executing step S8), and the initialization means holds special state information, execution count information, and numerical information by the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In the initialization process, the special state information and the execution count information are initialized, but the numerical information is not initialized (for example, the states of the time reduction flags A to C and the value of the time reduction counter are initialized. On the other hand, the value of the relief time reduction counter is not initialized (that is, the value before the power failure is set). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the numerical information from being intentionally initialized, and it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player.

Further, the features 108IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1B) to (means 5B).

(Means 1B) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-17). Based on the execution of step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control microcomputer 100, the portion in which step 100IWS537 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-19) and the variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the portion where step 100 IWS71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100), the predetermined variable display pattern, and the predetermined variable display pattern are more variable than the predetermined variable display pattern. Variable display that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern having a long display period (for example, variable pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and variable pattern PA2-3 (super reach β)). A pattern determining means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 14-14) is provided, and the state control means variably displays the numerical information updated by the updating means. It is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by setting a specific value corresponding to the special number of times of execution (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the step in the game control microcomputer 100. 100IWS74, a part for executing step 100IWS75, as shown in FIG. 14-17, a part for executing step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is executed with variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the portion where step 100IWS71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100), and the numerical information is variable. The display pattern determining means can determine the specific variable display pattern regardless of whether the display result of the variable display is the specific display result or not (for example, FIG. 14-7 (for example, FIG. 14-7). A) , (B), the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) can be determined in both the case of a big hit and the case of a miss). When the display result of the variable display is the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is higher than that of the predetermined variable display pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-7 (A), the variable pattern PA2- 2 (super reach α) and fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) are more likely to be determined in the case of a big hit than fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation)), before the special conditions are satisfied. In the predetermined period, when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is lower than that in the period before the predetermined period (for example, FIG. 14-8 (F)). , (G), the rate of determining the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is low immediately before the relief time is shortened). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the specific display result is not derived and displayed even though the variable display by the specific variable display pattern is executed in a predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 2B) The means 1B includes a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a countdown effect, an effect effect, a telop display waiting for a customer) related to the establishment of a special condition, and the suggestion effect execution means is provided. The rate of executing the suggestion effect is higher in the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied than in the period before the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-31, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect control CPU 120 to perform step 108 IWS807. A portion for executing ~ S809; a portion for the effect control CPU 120 to execute 105IWS251). According to such a configuration, the player can be expected to establish the special condition, and the interest can be improved. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage for the player due to the player ending the game immediately before the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 3B) In means 1B or means 2B, an explanatory effect regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, a telop display 100IW103 is used as shown in FIGS. 14-37 (A) and 14-37 (B)). (For example, as shown in FIGS. 14-31, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 108IWS803 to S804) is provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 4B) Execution of a notice effect (for example, a timer effect) capable of executing a notice effect (for example, a timer effect) for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed in any of the means 1B to the means 3B. The notice effect executing means can execute the notice effect in both the case where the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result and the case where the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result. Is higher in the case where the specific display result is obtained than in the case where the specific display result is not obtained, and the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied (for example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less). (For example, as shown in FIGS. 14-31), the rate of executing the advance notice effect when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result is lower than that of the period before the predetermined period. , The portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108 IWS802A. See FIGS. 14-32 (A) and 14-32 (B). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the specific display result is not derived and displayed even though the notice effect is executed in the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 5B) Execution of a notice effect (for example, a timer effect) capable of executing a notice effect (for example, a timer effect) for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed in any of the means 1B to the means 4B. The notice effect executing means is provided with means, and the specific mode (for example, the effect mode "red") is defined in both the case where the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and the case where the display result is not the specific display result. The notice effect can be executed depending on the mode (for example, the effect mode "blue"), and when the display result of the variable display is the specific display result, the ratio of executing the notice effect in the specific mode is higher than that of the predetermined mode. When the variable display display result is not the specific display result in the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied (for example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less) is less than the period before the predetermined period. In addition, the ratio of executing the advance notice effect is low depending on the specific mode (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-31, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A. See FIGS. 14-32 (C) and 14-32 (D)). .. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the specific display result is not derived and displayed even though the advance notice effect is executed in the specific mode in the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied.

Further, the features 108IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1C) to (means 8C).

(Means 1C) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-17). Based on the execution of step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control microcomputer 100, the portion in which step 100IWS537 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-19) and the variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the portion where step 100 IWS71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100) and the special variable display pattern (for example, the variation pattern PA3-1 (for example, the variation pattern PA3-1)) can update the numerical information. Variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including (inrush out)) (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variable pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 14-14). The state control means can control the state when the special condition is satisfied by setting the numerical information updated by the update means to a specific value corresponding to the special number of times the variable display is executed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a portion for executing step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 14-17, step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100. The updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, in FIG. 14-13). As shown, the variable display pattern determining means in the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step 100 IWS71) can determine the special variable display pattern when the special condition is satisfied, and before the special condition is satisfied. In, the special variable display pattern is not determined (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-14, the portion where steps 108IWS1701A and S1701B are executed in the game control microcomputer 100), and the special variable is not determined. When the variable display by the display pattern is executed, the specific notification effect executing means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-31) capable of executing the specific notification effect for notifying that the special state is controlled is used for game control. A portion of the microcomputer 100 that executes step 108 IWS806B. (See FIGS. 14-38 (G), (H)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the special condition is controlled by the establishment of the special condition, and it is possible to improve the interest when the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 2C) In the means 1C, the specific notification effect executing means executes the specific notification effect when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is executed and the non-specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. When the variable display that is possible and the special condition is satisfied is executed and the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, the specific display result is executed after the effect of the same mode as the specific notification effect is executed. Is executed by the special notification effect executing means (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31, step 108 IWS806C in the game control microcomputer 100). 41 (see G') and (H')). According to such a configuration, after the player once recognizes the establishment of the special condition, it is notified that the player is controlled in an advantageous state, so that the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved. Can be done.

(Means 3C) In means 1C or means 2C, when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is executed and the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is not executed before the special condition is satisfied. A predetermined notification effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined notification effect (for example, full rotation effect) for notifying that the specific display result is derived and displayed depending on the mode is provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and special feeling, and it is possible to improve the interest.

(Means 4C) In the means 1C or the means 2C, when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is executed and the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, the mode common to that before the special condition is satisfied. A notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, even when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0, the value varies as in the case where the value is not 0. It is provided with a pattern PB2-2 (super reach α) and a fluctuation pattern PB2-3 (realized by being determined by super reach β)). According to such a configuration, the variable display pattern can be shared between when the special condition is satisfied and before it is satisfied, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 5C) In any of means 1C to means 4C, the display period (for example, 20 seconds) of the variable display display result when the special condition is satisfied is the display result of the variable display before the special condition is satisfied. The special condition is satisfied for longer than the display period (for example, 0.5 seconds) (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-15, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100 IWS1135. See FIG. 14-36). In the display period of the display result of the variable display at the time of the operation, the notification effect execution means (for example, FIG. 14-33) capable of executing the notification effect (for example, the mode transition effect) for notifying that the control of the special state is started is shown. As shown, the effect control CPU 120 includes a portion that executes step 100 IWS847). According to such a configuration, it is possible to secure a period for executing the notification effect in the normal state, clarify the effect when switching the game state, and improve the interest.

(Means 6C) At the start of the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied in any of the means 1C to the means 5C, a specific signal (for example, a fluctuation stop signal) corresponding to the start of the display period. Is output, and after the specific signal is output, a signal output means for outputting a special signal (for example, four jackpot signals) corresponding to the control of the special state is provided (see, for example, FIG. 14-18). According to such a configuration, when a specific signal and a special signal are output at the same time, it is possible to avoid an external signal omission.

(Means 7C) In the means 6C, the signal output means performs a special process (for example, the next fluctuation postponement process shown in FIGS. 14-45) executed after the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied has elapsed. ) Is started, a special signal is output. According to such a configuration, when a specific signal and a special signal are output at the same time, it is possible to avoid an external signal omission.

(Means 8C) In any of means 1C to means 6C, a first passage area (for example, a first start winning opening) provided at a position where a game medium passing through a specific route (for example, a left-handed route) can pass. ), A second passage area (for example, a second start winning opening) provided at a position where a game medium passing through a special route (for example, a right-handed route) can pass, and a second as a variable display of identification information. Variable display execution means (for example, game control) capable of executing variable display of the first identification information based on the satisfaction of one start condition and variable display of the second identification information based on the satisfaction of the second start condition (for example, game control). A part where the microcomputer 100 executes step S112) and a special output that can specify that the game medium should be launched toward the special route (for example, in a gaming state in which the player is expected to make a right-handed strike). It is provided with a special output means capable of executing an output of a test signal or an external output signal indicating that the computer is present, and a notification that the player is in a state of right-handed striking. Is satisfied based on the passage of, the second start condition is satisfied based on the passage of the game medium through the second passage region, and the special output means is the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied. The special output can be executed at the start of the special processing (for example, the next fluctuation postponement processing shown in FIGS. 14-45) that is executed after the display period of. According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a special output that can specify that the game medium should be launched toward the special route at an appropriate timing.

Further, the features 108IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1D) to (means 5D).

(Means 1D) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-17). Based on the execution of step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control microcomputer 100, the portion in which step 100IWS537 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-19) and the variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step 100 IWS71) and a variable display pattern for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns. A display pattern determining means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 14-48) is provided, and the state control means is variable in the numerical information updated by the updating means. By setting a specific value corresponding to the special number of times of display execution, it is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, in the game control microcomputer 100. Step 100IWS74, a part for executing step 100IWS75, as shown in FIG. 14-17, a part for executing step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is executed by variable display of the first identification information. Numerical information is updated depending on whether the second identification information is variably displayed or the second identification information is variably displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the portion where step 100 IWS71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100). The variable display pattern determining means determines a variable display pattern (for example, variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)) that can be determined even before the special condition is satisfied when the special condition is satisfied, and the special condition is satisfied. After the non-specific display result (for example, the out-of-order symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display to be performed, a special notification effect for notifying that the control of the special state is started (for example, a background image corresponding to the relief time reduction (for example) Orange) display) can be executed A special notification effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 100 IWS638) is further provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the change in the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest when the special condition is satisfied. In addition, the variable display pattern can be standardized when the special condition is satisfied and before it is satisfied, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 2D) In the means 1D, a variable display executing means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112). A hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage buffer or a second hold storage buffer) that can store information related to variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not met, and hold storage. The look-ahead notice execution means is provided with a look-ahead notice execution means capable of executing a look-ahead notice effect (for example, a chance eye effect or a hold change effect) that targets a variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the means. Of the variable displays corresponding to the hold information stored before the special condition is satisfied, it is possible to execute a look-ahead advance notice effect that targets the variable display when the special condition is satisfied, while the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is satisfied. The execution of the look-ahead notice effect for which the variable display after the display is the target of the notice is restricted (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-27, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108 IWS702). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complicating the control process and avoid inconsistency in the production contents.

(Means 3D) In the means 1D or the means 2D, the special notification effect executing means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display after the variable display for which the special condition is satisfied is executed, and the special notification effect can be executed. Is an embodiment in which the background display in the display means is changed to the background display corresponding to the special state (see, for example, FIG. 14-52 (C1)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest, and it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated.

(Means 4D) In any of means 1D to means 3D, a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a countdown effect, an effect effect, a telop display waiting for a customer, etc.) related to the establishment of a special condition is provided. , The suggestion effect execution means restricts the execution of the suggestion effect in a predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied. According to such a configuration, since the special notification effect is suddenly executed, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest.

(Means 5D) An explanatory effect executing means (for example, FIGS. 14-52 (C1), (C2)) capable of executing an explanatory effect relating to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition in any of the means 1D to the means 4D. At the timings shown in FIGS. 14-53 (D) and 14-54 (D), the telop display 100IW103 as shown in FIGS. 14-37 (A) and 14-37 (B) will be described). According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

Further, the features 108IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1E) to (means 4E).

(Means 1E-1) An advantageous advantageous state (for example,) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. As shown in FIG. 14-17, which is a game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. , Step 100IWS166 in the game control computer 100, a part for executing step 100IWS173, and a part for executing step 100IWS537 in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-19) and variable display are executed. From the updating means (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the portion where step 100IWS71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100), the predetermined variable display pattern, and the predetermined variable display pattern, which can update the numerical information based on the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a variable display pattern determining means) for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a shortened variable display pattern (for example, variable pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortened variation)) in which the variable display period is shortened. The game control microcomputer 100 includes a portion that executes the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 14-14), and the state control means is based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. After being controlled to an advantageous state, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-19, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100 IWS537), and the numerical information updated by the updating means is By setting a specific value corresponding to the special number of times of execution of the variable display, it is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the game control microcomputer. The portion for executing step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in 100, the portion for executing step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17), the updating means is a variable display of the first identification information. (For example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, step 100 IWS71 in the game control computer 100 is actually performed. As for the variable display pattern determining means, the display result of the variable display is less in the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied than in the special state controlled after being controlled in the advantageous state. A portion for executing step 108 IWS 1714 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 14-14, in a high proportion of determining the shortened variable display pattern when a specific display result is obtained. See FIGS. 14-7 (C) and 14-8 (E)). According to such a configuration, when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a specific number, the ratio of the variable display being executed by the shortened variable display pattern increases, and the period until the next advantageous state is controlled. Will be shortened, so it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

(Means 1E-2) An advantageous advantageous state (for example,) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. As shown in FIG. 14-17, which is a game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. , Step 100IWS166 in the game control computer 100, a part for executing step 100IWS173, and a part for executing step 100IWS537 in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-19) and variable display are executed. An update means capable of updating numerical information based on (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a portion where step 100 IWS 71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100) and a specific variable display pattern corresponding to execution of reach effect. Variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including the variable pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the variable pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) (for example, for game control). The state control means is provided with a part) in which the microcomputer 100 executes the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 14-14, and the state control means is in an advantageous state based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 14-19, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100 IWS537), and the numerical information updated by the updating means is variably displayed. It is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by setting a specific value corresponding to the special number of times of execution (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the step in the game control microcomputer 100. 100IWS74, a part for executing step 100IWS75, as shown in FIG. 14-17, a part for executing step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is executed with variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, step 100 IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed. The variable display pattern determining means does not specify the display result of the variable display in the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied than in the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. A portion for executing step 108 IWS 1714 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 14-14, at a low rate of determining the specific variable display pattern when the display result is obtained. See FIGS. 14-7 (C) and 14-8 (E)). According to such a configuration, when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a specific number, the ratio of the variable display display result by the specific variable display pattern to the non-specific display result becomes low, which reduces the interest. It can be suppressed.

(Means 2E) In the means 1E, a background display means capable of displaying different background displays in the display means depending on the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state and the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 14-23, a portion for executing steps 100 IWS634 and S638 in the effect control CPU 120) is provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the difference in the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest.

(Means 3E) In the means 1E or the means 2E, the variable display executing means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112) capable of executing the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition. And a hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage buffer or a second hold storage buffer) that can store information related to variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not met. , A look-ahead notice execution means capable of executing a look-ahead notice effect (for example, a chance eye effect or a hold change effect) that targets a variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means, and executes the look-ahead notice. The means is a special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state and a special state that is controlled when a special condition is satisfied. The ratio of whether or not to execute the effect is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-27, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108 IWS703. See FIGS. 14-28 (A) and 14-28 (B)). According to such a configuration, the execution frequency and the type of the look-ahead advance notice effect are determined between the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state and the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied. It can be different and can improve the interest.

(Means 4E) In any of the means 1E to the means 3E, the variable display executing means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is a step) capable of executing the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition. (Part where S112 is executed) and a hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage buffer or a second hold storage) that can store information related to variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. A buffer) and a look-ahead notice execution means capable of executing a look-ahead notice effect (for example, a chance eye effect or a hold change effect) for a variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means. The look-ahead notice execution means can execute a look-ahead notice effect that targets the variable display when the special condition is satisfied among the variable displays corresponding to the hold information stored before the special condition is satisfied. The execution of the look-ahead notice effect for which the variable display after the variable display for which the special condition is satisfied is subject to advance notice is restricted (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-27, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108 IWS702). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complicating the control process and avoid inconsistency in the production contents.

Further, the features 108IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1a) to (means 10a).

(Means 1a) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-17). Based on the execution of step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control computer 100, the part in which step 100IWS537 is executed in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-19) and the variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a portion of the game control computer 100 for executing step 100 IWS71), and the state control means are updated by the update means. When the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, it is possible to control the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, step 100 IWS74 in the game control microcomputer 100, The part that executes step 100IWS75, the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17), the updating means is the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed. It is characterized in that the numerical information is updated depending on whether the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the portion where step 100IWS71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100). do. According to such a configuration, the relief of the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, even if the game state changes and the variable display of any identification information is executed, the numerical information is continuously updated, so that the player can be easily rescued and the motivation for the game is increased. Can be done.

In this example, the case where the initial value is set in the relief time reduction counter when a big hit occurs is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, multiple types of jackpots (big hits that are not given time reduction, jackpots with a small number of game balls acquired, jackpots with the second special symbol, etc.) are provided, and the initial value of the relief time reduction counter is not set for some jackpots. It may be configured as follows.

In this example, the case where the first special symbol is mainly changed in the normal state is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the number of reserved memories may be increased so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate in the normal state.

(Means 2a) In the means 1a, the special condition is satisfied based on the fact that a predetermined display result (for example, an outlier symbol) different from the specific display result is continuously derived and displayed a special number of times as the display result of the variable display (means 2a). For example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS63, step 100IWS71, step 100IWS74, and step 100IWS75, and as shown in FIG. 14-17, the game control microcomputer. It may be configured to execute step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in 100). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game because the display result, which is disadvantageous to the player, is relieved when the display result is continuously derived and displayed.

(Means 3a) In the means 1a or the means 2a, the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display is executed even in a state different from the normal state (for example, a probabilistic state, a time saving state) (for example, FIG. 14). As shown in -17, it may be configured to execute step 100 IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, the relief of the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, the numerical information is updated fairly, and even after being controlled to the special state, it can be controlled to the special state again, so that it can be controlled to the special state until it is substantially controlled to the advantageous state. As a result, the investment of the player can be suppressed and the disadvantage to the player can be prevented.

In this example, the case where the relief time reduction counter is updated based on the low probability low base (normal state), the high probability high base (probability variation state), and the low probability high base (time reduction state) is shown. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, the relief time reduction counter is updated in all four states of low probability low base (normal state), high probability high base (probability change state), low probability high base (time reduction state), and high probability low base (latent probability change). It may be configured as follows. In this case, it can be applied to a gaming machine that executes a lottery for falling to a normal state in a probabilistic state.

In this example, the case where the second special symbol is preferentially digested is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, a variable winning ball device 6B is provided at the first starting winning opening, a high probability low base (small hit RUSH) in which small hits occur frequently is provided, and the game balls are digested in the order of winning, the first special symbol and the second special. The symbols may be configured to fluctuate at the same time.

In this example, the case where the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to provide only the first special symbol.

(Means 4a) In any of means 1a to 3a, the updating means sets numerical information as an initial value when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-16, a game control microcomputer. A part for executing step 100IWS135 in 100, a part for executing step 100IWS144, and a part for executing step 100IWS167 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17) may be configured. According to such a configuration, when the player is controlled in an advantageous state, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and it is not necessary to rescue the player, so that it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming higher than necessary.

(Means 5a) In the means 4a, a predetermined condition is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-16, a portion for executing step 100 IWS 135 in the game control microcomputer 100). It may have been done. According to such a configuration, when the player is controlled in an advantageous state, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and it is not necessary to rescue the player, so that it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming higher than necessary.

(Means 6a) In the means 4a, the state control means can control the special state when a special display result (for example, a time saving deviation) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state (for example, FIG. 14). As shown in -17, the portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step 100 IWS166), the predetermined condition is that the special display result is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-17, the game is played. It may be configured to execute step 100 IWS167 in the control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, when it is controlled to a special state, it becomes an advantageous situation for the player, and it is not necessary to rescue the player, so that it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming higher than necessary.

(Means 7a) In the means 4a, the predetermined condition is that the variable display is executed a special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-16, the portion where the step 100 IWS 144 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executed). It may be configured in. According to such a configuration, it is possible to substantially control the special state until the next advantageous state, so that the degree of relief of the player can be increased.

(Means 8a) The means 4a includes a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information to be updated by the update means even if the power supply is stopped when the power supply is stopped. , Set the numerical information held by the backup storage means to the initial value when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, execution of the initialization process) (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-11, a game control microcomputer. (Part of executing step 100IWS12 in 100), a predetermined condition is that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-11, a part of executing step 100IWS8 and step 100IWS12 in the game control microcomputer 100). ) May be configured. According to such a configuration, when the initialization is performed in the amusement park, if the numerical information up to the special number of times is retained, it may be too disadvantageous for the amusement park, so it is operated for the amusement park. Can be made easier.

(Means 9a) In any of means 1a to 8a, an effect control means corresponding to variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, a portion for executing steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120) is provided and is in a state. The control means can be controlled to a special state for a specific period equal to or greater than the special number of times based on the execution of the variable display of the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, in the game control microcomputer 100. Based on the part where step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 are executed, the part where step 100IWS172 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17), and the variable display of the special number of times is executed in the special state. It is possible to control the special state again for a specific period (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the portion where step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 14-17, the game. (Part of executing step 100IWS172 in the control microcomputer 100), the effect control means executes different effects in the first specific period and the second specific period (for example, the modification of FIGS. 14-47). It may be configured as shown in Example 4). According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled in the second specific period, the situation is not controlled to the advantageous state for a long period of time, so measures such as shortening the execution time of the variable display should be taken. By changing the production mode, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

(Means 10a) In any of means 1a to 8a, an effect control means corresponding to variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, a portion that executes steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120) is provided and is in a state. The control means can be controlled to a special state for a specific period equal to or greater than the special number of times based on the execution of the variable display of the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, in the game control microcomputer 100. Based on the part where step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 are executed, the part where step 100IWS172 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17), and the variable display of the special number of times is executed in the special state. It is possible to control the special state again for a specific period (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the portion where step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 14-17, the game. (Part of executing step 100IWS172 in the control microcomputer 100), the effect control means executes a common effect in the first specific period and the second specific period (for example, FIG. 14-47). It may be configured as shown in the modified example 2 and the modified example 3). According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled in the second specific period, the advantageous state is not controlled for a long period of time. Therefore, by intentionally performing the same effect, the advantageous state is obtained for a long period of time. It is possible to prevent the player from being unnecessarily aware of the uncontrolled situation, and it is possible to prevent the player from being less interested in the game.

Further, in the present feature portion 108IW and each modification, the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1b-1), (means 1b-2) to (means 5b) are disclosed.

(Means 1b-1) An advantageous advantageous state (for example,) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A gaming area that is a game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state) and can divide the game medium into a first path (for example, a left-handed path) and a second path (for example, a right-handed path). Step 100 IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control computer 100, as shown in FIG. 14-17, for state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. The part to be executed, as shown in FIG. 14-19, the part to execute step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the updating means (for example, the part where the numerical information can be updated based on the execution of the variable display). As shown in FIG. 14-13, a game required to execute a plurality of types of processes including a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step 100 IWS71), variable display control, and advantageous state control. A process execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a portion for executing step S25 in the game control computer 100) that updates a data value indicating a progress state and executes a process corresponding to the data value. In addition, the state control means can control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13). In addition, a portion for executing step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and a portion for executing step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17), the updating means is Numerical information is updated depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the game control microcomputer 100). The process execution means executes the first process related to the variable display when the data value is the first numerical value (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the step 100 in the game control microcomputer 100). The part where S110 to S113 are executed), the data value is the first When the second numerical value is different from the numerical value, the second process relating to the advantageous state is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the portion where steps S114 to S117 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100), and the data value is the first. When the numerical value and the third numerical value are different from the second numerical value, the state control means executes a third process for controlling the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-43, the game control. (Part of executing step 100 IWS114 in the microcomputer 100), in the normal state, the game medium is launched to the first path to play the game, and in the special state, the game medium is fired to the second path to play the game. The third process is being executed, the game medium is provided with a launch promotion notification means (see FIGS. 14-46) for executing a launch promotion notification to the effect that the game medium should be launched to the second path. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, by performing the launch promotion notification to the second path before being controlled to the special state, it is possible to execute an effect related to the launch promotion notification early when the special state is controlled.

(Means 1b-2) An advantageous advantageous state (for example,) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. As shown in FIG. 14-17, which is a game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. , The part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-19) and the variable display is executed. Update means (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part where step 100 IWS 71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100), variable display control, and advantageous state control are provided. A process execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, for game control) that updates a data value indicating a game progress state required to execute a plurality of types of processes including the data value and executes a process corresponding to the data value. The state control means is provided with (a portion for executing step S25 in the microcomputer 100), and the state control means is put into a special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times. It is controllable (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a portion for executing step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 14-17, a step in the game control microcomputer 100. 100IWS172, the part where step 100IWS173 is executed), the updating means updates the numerical information between the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, FIG. As shown in 14-13, the process execution means executes the first process related to the variable display when the data value is the first numerical value (for example, the portion that executes the step 100 IWS 67 in the game control microcomputer 100) (for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, the part in which steps S110 to S113 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100), and when the data value is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value, the second process relating to the advantageous state is executed (for example, FIG. As shown in 5, game control microcompute (Part of executing steps S114 to S117) in the data 100), when the data value is a third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the state control means controls the special state based on the establishment of the special condition. Notification that the three processes are executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-43, the portion where the step 100 IWS 114 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100) is executed, and the special state is controlled during the execution of the third process. It is characterized in that it is provided with an effect executing means (see FIGS. 14-46) for executing the effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, by performing the launch promotion notification to the second path before being controlled to the special state, it is possible to execute an effect related to the launch promotion notification early when the special state is controlled.

In this example, the case where the processing related to the big hit is prioritized is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to give priority to the process related to the variable display and the process related to the relief time reduction.

In this example, the case of right-handed notification in the next fluctuation postponement processing, which is the third processing, is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to execute only the mode transition effect suggesting the transition to the time saving state without performing the right-handed notification.

(Means 2b) In the means 1b-1 and the means 1b-2, the processing executing means executes the second processing after the first processing when the specific display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied (means 2b). For example, as shown in FIG. 14-16, when step 100IWS133 in the game control microcomputer 100 is Y, step 100IWS140 may be executed and step 100IWS114 may not be executed). According to such a configuration, since the control of the advantageous state is prioritized, the result is not disadvantageous to the player, and the deterioration of the interest of the game can be suppressed.

(Means 3b) In means 1b-1, means 1b-2 or means 2b, the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, for game control. The process executing means changes the special information from the first information to the second information when the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value (for example, FIG. 14). As shown in -17, the part that executes step 100 IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100) changes the special information from the second information to the first information when the state control means controls the special state (for example, FIG. As shown in 14-16, the part that executes step 100 IWS 145 in the game control microcomputer 100) executes different processing when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information (for example, FIG. As shown in 14-14, it may be configured to execute step 100 IWS 1714 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, the process of shifting to the special state can be suitably executed by managing the special information.

(Means 4b) Means 3b includes variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern for variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a portion for executing step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) and is variable. The display pattern determining means determines a variable display pattern that differs depending on whether the special information is the first information or the second information (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-14, step 100 IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100. The part that executes) may be configured. According to such a configuration, the effect can be suitably executed when the variable display of a special number of times is executed.

(Means 5b) Means 3b includes variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern for variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a portion for executing step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) and is variable. The display pattern determining means determines a variable display pattern in which the confirmation time of the display result differs depending on whether the special information is the first information or the second information (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-15, for game control. It may be configured to execute step 100IWS1128 and step 100IWS1130 in the microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, the effect can be suitably executed when the variable display of a special number of times is executed.

Further, the features 108IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1c) to (means 6c).

(Means 1c) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 that executes step S25) and a variable display, which is a game machine that can be controlled to a state) and can control the game. (For example, as shown in FIG. 7, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing steps S170 to S172, as shown in FIG. 14-31, step 108 IWS811 in the effect control CPU 120. The game control means can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-17). In addition, step 100IWS166 in the game control computer 100, a part for executing step 100IWS173, and a part for executing step 100IWS537 in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-19) and variable display are executed. Based on this, the updating means that can update the numerical information (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part that executes step 100 IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the state controlled by the state control means The state control means includes a state information control means for controlling the identifiable state information, and the state control means is put into a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the derivation display of the specific display result as the display result of the variable display. It is controllable (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-12, the part where step 100IWS64 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100), and the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. It is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the portion where step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 14-17. (Part of executing step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173) in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means includes a case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and a case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed. Numerical information The information is updated (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the portion where step 100 IWS71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state information control means sets the state information as the first numerical value in the normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13). For example, as shown in FIGS. 14-16, the part that executes step 100IWS145 and step 100IWS149 in the game control microcomputer 100, that is, the time saving flags A and C are not set, and the corresponding data is "0". ), The state information is set to the second numerical value when the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display and then controlled to the special state after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, in FIG. 14-19). As shown, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100, that is, the time saving flag A is set, and the data corresponding to the time saving flag A is “1”), based on the fact that the special condition is satisfied. When controlled to a special state, the state information is set to a third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-17, a portion for executing step 100 IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, That is, the time saving flag C is set, the data corresponding to the time saving flag C is "1"), the game control means can transmit specific information to the effect control means, and the state information is displayed when it is in a special state. It is possible to transmit specific information according to the case of the second numerical value and the case of the third numerical value (for example, the part shown in FIG. 14-10 and the microcomputer for game control as shown in FIG. 14-19). A portion of 100 that executes step 100IWS540, and a portion of 100 that executes step 100IWS174 of the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, since different gaming states can be suitably identified, control becomes easy, and if specific information is also changed at that time, the effect can be preferably executed when the effect control means executes different effects.

In this example, the case where the time saving state A designation command and the time saving state C designation command are transmitted as specific information is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the background specification command and the fluctuation pattern command are configured to be transmitted in a mode that can be identified as being in the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, or the time saving state via the relief time saving. May be good. In addition, for example, when a big hit occurs, a big hit start designation command (fanfare designation command) or a jackpot end designation command (ending designation command) is transmitted in different modes depending on the game state, and depending on which command is received. It may be configured so that the fanfare period and the ending period change.

(Means 2c) In the means 1c, the state information control means transfers the state information to the first numerical value, the second numerical value, and the second numerical value when the special condition is satisfied again after being controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition. It may be configured to have a fourth numerical value different from the third numerical value (for example, a portion for executing step 100 IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, since different gaming states can be suitably identified, control becomes easy, and if specific information is also changed at that time, the effect can be preferably executed when the effect control means executes different effects.

(Means 3c) In the means 1c or the means 2c, the effect control means controls the state to a special state based on the derivation and display of the specific display result, and the state control means satisfies the special condition. The effect may be different from that when the special state is controlled based on the above (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to execute steps 100 IWS634 and S638). According to such a configuration, the variable display in the special state controlled by the establishment of the special condition can be efficiently digested, so that it becomes possible to execute the production according to the situation and improve the interest of the game. be able to.

(Means 4c) In any of the means 1c to the means 3c, the effect control means controls the state control means to a special state based on the derivation and display of the specific display result, and the state control means is special. It is possible to execute a common effect when the condition is controlled based on the condition being satisfied (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a common background image in step 100IWS634 and step 100IWS638). It may be configured in. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to make the production in the controlled special state the same every time when the special condition is satisfied, which prevents an increase in development cost because a new production is not required. At the same time, the interest of the game can be improved because the player is not confused.

(Means 5c) In any of the means 1c to the means 4c, the state control means can control the special state when a special display result (for example, a time saving deviation) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state. Yes (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-17, the part that executes step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100), the effect control means is based on the fact that the state control means derives and displays the special display result. It is possible to execute different effects depending on whether the state control means is controlled to the special state or the state control means is controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is in step 100 IWS636). It may be configured to execute S638). According to such a configuration, the variable display in the special state controlled by the establishment of the special condition can be efficiently digested, so that it becomes possible to execute the production according to the situation and improve the interest of the game. be able to.

(Means 6c) In any of the means 1c to the means 4c, the state control means can control the special state when a special display result different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state, and the effect control means can control the effect. It is common when the state control means controls the special state based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed, and when the state control means controls the special state based on the satisfaction of the special condition. The effect may be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may display a common background image in step 100IWS636 and step 100IWS638). According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to make the production in the controlled special state the same every time when the special condition is satisfied, which prevents an increase in development cost because a new production is not required. At the same time, the interest of the game can be improved because the player is not confused.

Further, the features 108IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1d) to (means 4d).

(Means 1d) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state) and a game control means that can control the game (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a portion that executes step S25 in the effect control CPU 120) and a variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 7, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing steps S170 to S172, as shown in FIG. 14-31, step 108 IWS811 in the effect control CPU 120. The game control means can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-17). In addition, step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100, a portion for executing step 100IWS173, and a portion for executing step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-19) and variable display are executed. Based on this, when the numerical information can be updated (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part where step 100 IWS71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100) and the power supply is stopped. The state control means includes a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information regarding the number of times the variable display is executed, and the state control means is special because the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. When the condition is satisfied, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a portion in which step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 14-17. , The part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means depends on the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed. Numerical information is updated (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the portion where step 100 IWS71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100), and the game control means directs and controls predetermined information when the power supply is started. It can be transmitted to the means (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-11, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step 100 IWS11), and the effect control means supplies power based on the reception of predetermined information. Is characterized in that it is possible to execute a suggestion effect regarding the number of times the variable display is executed in a predetermined period after the start of the operation (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-22, a portion where step 100 IWS630 is executed in the effect control CPU 120). do. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, it is possible to give the player a motivation to play a game from the start of business of the game hall, and to increase the operating rate of the game machine.

In this example, the initial appearance is shown as a suggestion effect regarding the number of times the variable display is executed, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to execute a change in the background, an effect during fluctuation up to 100 rotations, and a suggestion effect by displaying on a demo screen or a menu screen.

When a command for specifying initialization (S9 in FIG. 14-12) is transmitted, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to recognize the number of times until the relief time is shortened as an initial value and execute the effect. ..

(Means 2d) In the means 1d, the game control means can transmit specific information that can identify the numerical information held by the backup storage means to the effect control means when the power supply is started (for example, FIG. As shown in 14-11, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute step 100 IWS11). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, it is possible to give the player a motivation to play a game from the start of business of the game hall, increase the operating rate of the game machine, and suppress the increase in the processing load.

In this example, a command that can specify the value of the relief time reduction counter is transmitted at the time of recovery, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, 1 to 99 rotations can be specified in 100 rotation units, 100 to 199 rotations can be specified, ... 500 to 599 rotations can be specified, and so on. If the value of the time reduction counter is 128 or more, it cannot be specified, but if it is 127 or less, a identifiable command may be transmitted.

(Means 3d) In means 1d or means 2d, the game control means can transmit specific information to the effect control means in connection with the execution of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-14). (Part of executing step 100 IWS1717 in the game control microcomputer 100), the effect control means can execute a special effect related to being controlled to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition based on specific information (a part that executes a special effect). For example, as shown in FIGS. 14-31), as specific information, it is possible to specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the number of special times is equal to or less than a predetermined value. Second specific information that can specify that the difference between the first specific information (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-9, the command for specifying the number of times of relief time 1) and the number of times the variable display is executed and the number of special times is larger than a predetermined value. And (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-9, a command for specifying the number of times of relief time 2) may be configured to include. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, by periodically suggesting a function to a player, it is possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly causing a loss and preferably realize processing related to specific information.

In this example, when the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the number of special times is larger than a predetermined value, the second specific information, the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, is transmitted. I can't be limited. For example, when the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the number of special times is larger than a predetermined value, the second specific information, the relief time reduction number 2 specified command, may not be transmitted.

(Means 4d) In any of the means 1d to the means 3d, the effect control means is controlled to a special state when a special condition is satisfied based on the execution of the first predetermined number of variable displays less than the special number of times. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect suggesting that (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-33, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 100 IWS847, FIGS. 14-39 (I) to 14-40 (M). )), It is possible to execute the suggestion effect every time the variable display of the second predetermined number of times less than the first predetermined number of times is executed before the variable display of the special number of times is executed (for example, in FIG. 14-31). As shown, the portion of the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 100 IWS804 may be configured as shown in FIGS. 14-37 (A) to 14-38 (F). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, by periodically suggesting a function to a player, the risk of unknowingly causing a loss can be reduced.

In this example, the case where the effect is executed based on the count value of the relief time reduction counter is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to count the number of fluctuations and execute the effect after resetting the relief time reduction counter.

Further, the features 108IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in (means 1e-1) and (means 1e-2) shown below.

(Means 1e-1) An advantageous advantageous state (for example,) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state) and a game control means capable of controlling the game (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a portion that executes step S25 in the effect control CPU 120). The effect control means for controlling the effect corresponding to the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the portion of the effect control CPU 120 that executes steps S170 to S172, and as shown in FIGS. 14-31, the effect control CPU 120. Step 108 (a portion for executing IWS811), and the game control means can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state (for example, FIG. 14-17). As shown, step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100, a part for executing step 100IWS173, and as shown in FIG. 14-19, a part for executing step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the variable display are executed. When the power supply is stopped, and the updating means (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part that executes step 100 IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can update the numerical information based on the above. In addition, a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information regarding the number of times the variable display is executed, and backup storage including information regarding the number of times the predetermined display result is continuously derived and displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The state control means includes an initialization means capable of initializing the stored contents of the means (for example, a portion for executing step S8 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-14), and the state control means is an update means. When the special condition is satisfied, the numerical information updated by the player becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, so that the special state can be controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, in the game control microcomputer 100. The part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75, the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17), the updating means is actually a variable display of the first identification information. Numerical information is updated depending on whether it is executed or when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the portion where step 100 IWS 71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100). , When the effect control means is controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of the special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after the storage contents of the backup storage means are initialized. When the specific display result is derived and displayed after the stored contents of the backup storage means are initialized, and then the state control means controls the special state based on the establishment of the special condition, and when the special state is controlled in. It is characterized in that different effects are executed (for example, the portion shown in the modification 2 and the modification 3 of FIGS. 14-47). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, since it is possible to grasp that the stored contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, factors such as guessing the set value are increased, and the fun of the game can be improved.

(Means 1e-2) An advantageous advantageous state (for example,) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state) and a game control means capable of controlling the game (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a portion that executes step S25 in the effect control CPU 120). The effect control means for controlling the effect corresponding to the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the portion of the effect control CPU 120 that executes steps S170 to S172, and as shown in FIGS. 14-31, the effect control CPU 120. Step 108 (a portion for executing IWS811), and the game control means can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state (for example, FIG. 14-17). As shown, step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100, a part for executing step 100IWS173, and as shown in FIG. 14-19, a part for executing step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the variable display are executed. When the power supply is stopped, and the updating means (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part that executes step 100 IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can update the numerical information based on the above. In addition, a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information regarding the number of times the variable display is executed, and backup storage including information regarding the number of times the predetermined display result is continuously derived and displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The state control means includes an initialization means capable of initializing the stored contents of the means (for example, a portion for executing step S8 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-14), and the state control means is an update means. When the special condition is satisfied, the numerical information updated by the player becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, so that the special state can be controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, in the game control microcomputer 100. The part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75, the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17), the updating means is actually a variable display of the first identification information. Numerical information is updated depending on whether it is executed or when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the portion where step 100 IWS 71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100). , When the effect control means is controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of the special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after the storage contents of the backup storage means are initialized. It differs between when the specific display result is derived and displayed after the stored contents of the backup storage means are initialized and then controlled to the special state by the state control means based on the establishment of the special condition, and after being controlled to the special state in. It is characterized in that the effect is executed (for example, the portion shown in the modification 2 and the modification 3 of FIGS. 14-47). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, since it is possible to grasp that the stored contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, factors such as guessing the set value are increased, and the fun of the game can be improved.

In this example, the case where only the fluctuation pattern table B is used after the RAM is cleared is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to be used with a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables as in the case of after a big hit.

The configuration of the gaming machine shown in the following (means 1f) to (means 15h) may be applied to the feature unit 108IW and each modification.

(Means 1f) A gaming machine capable of executing variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and controlling to an advantageous advantageous state based on the derivation display of the specific display result, which is usually The state control means includes a state control means capable of controlling a special state in which variable display is more easily executed than a state, and an update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of variable display. The state control means is a variable display. It is possible to control to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of, and the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes the special number of times the variable display is executed. It is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by becoming the corresponding specific value, and the updating means executes the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. Numerical information is updated depending on the case, and there are a plurality of types of advantageous states including a specific advantageous state and a special advantageous state, and the advantageous state is controlled depending on which of the plurality of types is controlled. The advantage of the special state controlled after is different, and the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the special advantageous state is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the specific advantageous state. , The advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the specific advantageous state. According to such a configuration, the degree of relief of the player can be increased.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 1f in the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, the special advantageous state is the probability variation jackpot, the specific advantage state is the normal jackpot, and the time reduction state after the probability variation time reduction is the normal jackpot. The advantage may be higher than the time saving state of, and the time saving state of the relief time saving may be configured to have a higher advantage than the time saving state after the normal big hit.

(Means 2f) In the means 1f, the advantageous state is obtained when the first identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display and when the second identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display. The ratio of being controlled to the special state of the special advantage after being controlled is different, and when the control is performed in the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information, and when the variable display of the second identification information is triggered, the advantageous state is set. The number of times the variable display is executed for satisfying the special condition is the same as when it is controlled. According to such a configuration, the first identification information is variable while enhancing the interest by exhibiting different playability between the case where the first identification information is variablely displayed and the case where the second identification information is variablely displayed. Since the special number of times is common between the case of displaying and the case of performing variable display of the second identification information, it is possible to suppress an excessive increase in gambling.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 2f to the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, the ratio of the special advantage in the time saving state after the big hit (the time saving continues until the next big hit) is set to the first special symbol. And the 2nd special symbol are different, and 800 times, which is a condition to be controlled in a short relief time depending on whether the jackpot is controlled based on the 1st special symbol or the jackpot based on the 2nd special symbol. It suffices to configure so that the number of fluctuations of is common.

(Means 3f) In means 1f or means 2f, a disadvantage setting value in which the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state is the first probability, and an advantage setting in which the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state is higher than the first probability. A setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values including a value is provided, and a setting of a disadvantage setting value has a special condition rather than a setting of an advantage setting value. The advantage of the special state, which is easy to hold and is controlled when the special condition is satisfied, is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. According to such a configuration, even when the disadvantage setting value is set, the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. By being higher than the advantage of the state, the player can be rescued more effectively.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 3f to the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different). It is possible to set the set value of, and execute the setting confirmation process and the setting change process when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, so that the current set value can be confirmed and the set value can be changed. For example, the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". And, when it is set to an unfavorable setting (for example, "1"), the number of fluctuations which is a condition for controlling the relief time is smaller than when it is set to an advantageous setting value (for example, "6"). However, the advantage in the relief time reduction may be configured to be higher than the advantage in the time reduction state after the big hit. It should be noted that the one set to the disadvantageous setting (for example, "1") has a higher relief time reduction arrival rate than the one set to the advantageous setting value (for example, "6"), and the relief time reduction is always shortened. Since the number of times is 800 times (substantially until the next big hit), the advantage may be higher than the time saving state via the big hit (for example, the time saving number is 100 times after the normal big hit).

(Means 4f) In any of means 1f to means 3f, a setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of set values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state is provided, and the set value is controlled in an advantageous state. Which of the multiple types of special states will be controlled later is the same regardless of which setting value is set, and the special state advantage that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied. Is common when any setting value is set. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improvement of gambling due to the set value, and it is possible to realize sound playability.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 4f to the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different). It is possible to set the set value of, and execute the setting confirmation process and the setting change process when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, so that the current set value can be confirmed and the set value can be changed. For example, the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". Then, which of the multiple types of time saving states is controlled after the big hit is made common when any setting value is set, and the advantage in the relief time saving is also set when any setting value is set. May be configured to be common.

(Means 5f) In any of the means 1f to the means 4f, when the first identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display, and when the second identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display. The ratio of which of the multiple types is controlled to the advantageous state is different, and it corresponds to the case where the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. Then, when the special condition is satisfied, the advantage of the special state controlled after the special condition is satisfied is the same. According to such a configuration, while exhibiting different playability between the case where the first identification information is variably displayed and the case where the second identification information is variably displayed, it is controlled when a special condition is satisfied. Since the advantage of the special state is common regardless of which set value is set, it is possible to obtain an appropriate degree of relief while suppressing the improvement of gambling.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 5f in the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, when a big hit is generated by the first special symbol and when a big hit is generated by the second special symbol. The ratios controlled for the normal jackpot and the probabilistic jackpot are different, and the relief time is shortened depending on whether the relief time is controlled based on the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It may be configured so that the advantages of are common.

(Means 6f) In any of means 1f to means 5f, a variable display pattern is obtained from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than that of the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determining means for determining is provided, and the variable display pattern determining means has a variable display in a special state controlled when a special condition is satisfied than in a special state controlled after being controlled in an advantageous state. When the display result of is a non-specific display result, the ratio of determining the shortened variable display pattern is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this feature part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of means 6f is based on, for example, the configuration which uses the variation pattern table E of FIG. 14-8 (E).

(Means 7f) In any one of means 1f to means 6f, a variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern corresponding to execution of a reach effect is provided, and a variable display pattern is provided. The determining means is when the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is a non-specific display result in the variable display display result in the special state controlled after being controlled in the advantageous state than in the special state controlled after being controlled in the advantageous state. The ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is low. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this feature part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of means 7f is based on, for example, the configuration which uses the variation pattern table E of FIG. 14-8 (E).

(Means 8f) In any of means 1f to means 7f, the updating means can update specific numerical information different from the numerical information based on the variable display being executed in the special state, and the state controlling means can update the specific numerical information. It is possible to control the special state by setting the special information, and it is possible to end the special state by canceling the setting of the special information. In the special state, the specific numerical information becomes a predetermined value corresponding to a predetermined number of times. Based on this, a backup storage means capable of holding numerical information and specific numerical information updated by the updating means even if the special state is terminated and the power supply is stopped, and setting information of the special information, and a predetermined condition are satisfied. When the backup storage means is provided with an initialization means capable of initializing the stored contents of the backup storage means, the initialization means initializes the setting information of special information and the specific numerical information when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Do not initialize numerical information. According to such a configuration, the degree of relief of the player can be increased even when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

In the feature unit 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 8f initializes the time saving flags A to C and the value of the time saving number counter in the initialization process shown in FIG. 14-11, for example. The value of the relief time reduction counter may be configured so as not to be initialized.

(Means 1g) A gaming machine capable of executing variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and controlling to an advantageous advantageous state based on the derivation display of the specific display result, which is usually used. A state control means that can control a special state in which variable display is easier to execute than a state, an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display, and a start condition are satisfied as well as a start condition. Variable display execution means that can execute variable display based on the above, hold storage means that can store information about variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and power supply is stopped. When the information is set, the backup storage means that can hold the numerical information and the hold information, the initialization means that can initialize the stored contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the power supply are started. The state control means is provided with a recovery means capable of executing recovery control for recovering the numerical information updated by the update means and the hold information stored in the hold storage means based on the stored contents of the backup storage means. , The numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times of execution of the variable display, so that it can be controlled to a special state when the special condition is satisfied, and after the recovery control is executed. , It is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied based on the execution of the variable display corresponding to the recovered pending information, and the updating means is the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the second. Numerical information is updated when variable display of identification information is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages of the player while optimizing the control by initialization.

In order to apply the game machine of the means 1g in the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, the relief time reduction counter and the hold memory are reset when the initialization process is executed, while the power failure is restored. The relief time reduction counter and the hold memory are restored, and when the fluctuation display corresponding to the hold memory at the time of restoration becomes the 800th fluctuation and the condition for controlling the relief time reduction is satisfied, the relief time reduction can be controlled. Just do it.

(Means 2g) In the means 1g, the advantageous state is obtained when the first identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display and when the second identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display. The ratio of being controlled to the special state of the special advantage after being controlled is different, and when the control is performed in the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information, and when the variable display of the second identification information is triggered, the advantageous state is set. The number of times the variable display is executed for satisfying the special condition is the same as when it is controlled. According to such a configuration, the first identification information is variable while enhancing the interest by exhibiting different playability between the case where the first identification information is variablely displayed and the case where the second identification information is variablely displayed. Since the special number of times is common between the case of displaying and the case of performing variable display of the second identification information, it is possible to suppress an excessive increase in gambling.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 2g in this feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, the ratio of the special advantage in the time saving state after the big hit (the time saving continues until the next big hit) is set to the first special symbol. And the second special symbol are different, and when the jackpot is controlled based on the first special symbol and when the jackpot is controlled based on the second special symbol, the fluctuation that is the condition for controlling the relief time is shortened. It may be configured so that the number of times is common.

(Means 3g) In the means 1g or the means 2g, the disadvantage setting value in which the probability of being controlled in the advantageous state is the first probability and the advantage setting in which the probability of being controlled in the advantageous state is higher than the first probability. A setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values including a value is provided, and a setting of a disadvantage setting value has a special condition rather than a setting of an advantage setting value. The advantage of the special state, which is easy to hold and is controlled when the special condition is satisfied, is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. According to such a configuration, even when the disadvantage setting value is set, the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. By being higher than the advantage of the state, the player can be rescued more effectively.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 3g in the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different). It is possible to set the setting value of, and execute the setting confirmation process and the setting change process when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, so that the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". Then, when the setting is disadvantageous (for example, "1"), the number of fluctuations until the relief time is reduced and the relief time is shortened, as compared with the case where the setting value is advantageous (for example, "6"). The advantage of the above may be set to be higher than the advantage of the time saving state after the big hit. It should be noted that the setting of an unfavorable setting (for example, "1") has a higher probability of being out of order than the setting of an advantageous setting value (for example, "6"), so that the relief time is likely to be shortened. Since the relief time is always 800 times (substantially until the next big hit), it is more advantageous than the time saving state via the big hit (for example, after the normal big hit, the time reduction is 100 times). May be good.

(Means 4b) In any of means 1g to means 3g, a setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state is provided, and the means is controlled in an advantageous state. Which of the multiple types of special states will be controlled later is the same regardless of which setting value is set, and the special state advantage that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied. Is common when any setting value is set. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improvement of gambling due to the set value, and it is possible to realize sound playability.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 4g in the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different). It is possible to set the set value of, and execute the setting confirmation process and the setting change process when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, so that the current set value can be confirmed and the set value can be changed. For example, the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". Then, which of the multiple types of time saving states is controlled after the big hit is made common when any setting value is set, and the advantage in the relief time saving is also set when any setting value is set. May be configured to be common.

(Means 5g) In any of the means 1g to the means 4g, when the first identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display and when the second identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display. The ratio of which of the multiple types is controlled to the advantageous state is different, and it corresponds to the case where the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. Then, when the special condition is satisfied, the advantage of the special state controlled after the special condition is satisfied is the same. According to such a configuration, while exhibiting different playability between the case where the first identification information is variably displayed and the case where the second identification information is variably displayed, it is controlled when a special condition is satisfied. Since the advantage of the special state is common regardless of which set value is set, it is possible to obtain an appropriate degree of relief while suppressing the improvement of gambling.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 5g in this feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, when a big hit is generated by the first special symbol and when a big hit is generated by the second special symbol. The ratios controlled for the normal jackpot and the probabilistic jackpot are different, and the relief time is shortened depending on whether the relief time is controlled based on the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It suffices to configure so that the advantages of are common.

(Means 6g) In any of the means 1g to the means 5g, a variable display pattern is obtained from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than that of the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determining means for determining is provided, and the variable display pattern determining means has a variable display in a special state controlled when a special condition is satisfied, rather than a special state controlled after being controlled in an advantageous state. When the display result of is a non-specific display result, the ratio of determining the shortened variable display pattern is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this feature part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of means 6g is based on, for example, the configuration which uses the variation pattern table E of FIG. 14-8 (E).

(Means 7g) In any one of the means 1g to the means 6g, a variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern corresponding to the execution of the reach effect is provided, and the variable display pattern is provided. The determination means is that the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is a non-specific display result when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result than the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. The ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is low. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this feature part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of means 7g is based on, for example, the configuration which uses the variation pattern table E of FIG. 14-8 (E).

(Means 8g) In any of the means 1g to the means 7g, the updating means can update specific numerical information different from the numerical information based on the variable display being executed in the special state, and the state controlling means can update the specific numerical information. It is possible to control the special state by setting the special information, and it is possible to end the special state by canceling the setting of the special information. In the special state, the specific numerical information becomes a predetermined value corresponding to a predetermined number of times. Based on this, a backup storage means capable of holding numerical information and specific numerical information updated by the updating means even if the special state is terminated and the power supply is stopped, and setting information of the special information, and a predetermined condition are satisfied. When the backup storage means is provided with an initialization means capable of initializing the stored contents of the backup storage means, the initialization means initializes the setting information of special information and the specific numerical information when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Do not initialize numerical information. According to such a configuration, the degree of relief of the player can be increased even when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

In the feature unit 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 8g initializes the time saving flags A to C and the value of the time saving number counter in the initialization process shown in FIG. 14-11, for example. The value of the relief time reduction counter may be configured so as not to be initialized.

(Means 1h) A gaming machine capable of executing variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and controlling to an advantageous advantageous state based on the derivation display of the specific display result, which is usually The state control means includes a state control means capable of controlling a special state in which variable display is more easily executed than a state, and an update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of variable display. The state control means is an update means. The numerical information updated by is a specific value corresponding to the special number of times of execution of the variable display, so that the special state can be controlled when the special condition is satisfied, and the updating means is the variable of the first identification information. Numerical information is updated depending on whether the display is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and the suggestion effect execution means capable of executing the suggestion effect related to the establishment of the special condition is further provided, and the suggestion effect is provided. Depending on the number of times the variable display is executed, the execution means differs in the ratio of which of the plurality of effect modes the suggestion effect is executed, and the effect mode of the suggestion effect suggests a period until the special condition is satisfied. It is a mode to do. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the production mode of the suggestion effect, and to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 1h in the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, whether or not to execute a countdown effect in an aspect suggesting the number of fluctuations which is a condition to be controlled in the relief time reduction. The ratio may be changed according to the count value of the relief time reduction counter. Further, the gaming machine of the means 1h can be realized by, for example, using the table shown in FIGS. 14-25 to determine whether or not to execute the telop display while waiting for customers and the mode of production.

(Means 2h) In the means 1h, the effect mode of the suggestion effect is a mode in which the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied can be specified. According to such a configuration, the player can be clearly notified of the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied.

It should be noted that, in the feature unit 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 2h is based on, for example, executing a countdown effect in a mode of suggesting the number of fluctuations which is a condition controlled to shorten the relief time.

(Means 3h) In the means 1h or the means 2h, the suggestion effect is an effect of displaying a specific image, and the specific image is displayed in a plurality of modes in which at least one of a color and a size is different, and is displayed in any of the modes. The period until the suggested special conditions are met differs depending on whether or not it is done. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the aspect of the specific image.

In addition, in this feature unit 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of means 3h is configured to determine whether or not to execute the telop display while waiting for a customer and the mode of production by using, for example, the table shown in FIG. 14-25. Originally. Further, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 3h, for example, the color and size of the numbers to be counted down in the image of the countdown effect may be configured to be different according to the count value of the relief time reduction counter.

(Means 4h) In any of the means 1h to the means 3h, the variable display executing means capable of executing the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition, and the start condition are satisfied but the start condition is A hold storage means that can store information related to variable display as hold information when it is not established, and a predetermined image that can display a predetermined image when the hold storage is not executed and the hold storage means does not store the variable display. The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect when the predetermined image is displayed, and the predetermined image is displayed according to the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied. When displayed, the rate at which the suggestion effect is executed is different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to whether or not the suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In the feature unit 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 4h is based on, for example, using the table shown in FIGS. 14-25 to determine whether or not to execute the telop display while waiting for a customer.

(Means 5h) In any of the means 1h to the means 4h, the variable display executing means capable of executing the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition, and the start condition are satisfied but the start condition is satisfied. A hold storage means that can store information related to variable display as hold information when it is not established, and a predetermined image that can display a predetermined image when the hold storage is not executed and the hold storage means does not store the variable display. The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect when the predetermined image is displayed, and the predetermined image is displayed according to the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied. When displayed, the ratio of executing the suggestion effect differs depending on the predetermined mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the presence or absence of the mode of suggestive effect, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In the feature unit 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 5h is based on, for example, using the table shown in FIGS. 14-25 to determine the effect mode of the telop display while waiting for customers.

(Means 6h) In any of the means 1h to the means 5h, the variable display executing means capable of executing the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition, and the start condition are satisfied but the start condition is A hold storage means that can store information related to variable display as hold information when it is not established, and a predetermined image that can display a predetermined image when the hold storage is not executed and the hold storage means does not store the variable display. The suggestion effect executing means includes at least one of the detection that the operation means is operated and the detection that the game medium has passed through the predetermined area when the predetermined image is displayed. Suggestive effects can be performed based on what has been done. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a suggestion effect to the player who actually plays the game, and it is possible to promote the operation of the game machine.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 6h in the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, when the state shifts to the demo state, the gaming ball is operated by the operation of the ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 or at the starting port. When it is detected, it may be configured to execute a telop display suggesting the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened.

(Means 7h) In any of the means 1h to the means 6h, a setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state is provided, and the suggestion effect executing means is provided. The ratio of executing the suggestion effect differs depending on which set value is set. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to whether or not the suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine by suggesting the set value.

In addition, in this feature part 108IW and each modification, means 7h is based on the structure which determines whether or not the telop display while waiting for a customer is executed by using the table shown in FIG. 14-25.

(Means 8h) In any of the means 1h to the means 7h, a setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state is provided, and the suggestion effect executing means is provided. Depending on which set value is set, the ratio of executing the suggestion effect differs depending on the specific mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the mode of the suggestion effect, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine by suggesting the set value.

In addition, in this feature part 108IW and each modification, means 8h is based on the structure which determines whether or not the telop display is executed while waiting for a customer, and the effect mode, using the table shown in FIG. 14-25.

(Means 9h) In any of the means 1h to the means 6h, a setting means capable of setting any set value from a plurality of set values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state, and a set value set. The setting suggestion effect execution means that can execute the suggestion suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect execution means are provided, and the ratio of executing the setting suggestion effect differs depending on which setting value is set, and the suggestion is made. The effect execution means has a common ratio of executing the suggestion effect regardless of which set value is set. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the presence or absence of execution of the suggestion effect, and it is possible to suppress the complexity of control.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 9h to the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different). It is possible to set the set value of, and execute the setting confirmation process and the setting change process when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, so that the current set value can be confirmed and the set value can be changed. For example, the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". Then, while it is possible to execute an effect suggesting a set value (for example, an effect in which the execution ratio differs depending on the set value), the telop display waiting for a customer is executed regardless of which set value is set. It may be configured so that the ratio is common.

(Means 10h) In any of the means 1h to the means 6h and the means 9h, a setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state is set. The setting suggestion effect executing means that can execute the setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value is provided, and the setting suggestion effect execution means performs the setting suggestion effect according to a specific mode according to which setting value is set. The ratio of execution is different, and the ratio of executing the suggestion effect is the same regardless of which set value is set for the suggestion effect execution means. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the mode of the suggestion effect, and it is possible to suppress the complication of control.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 10h to the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different). It is possible to set the set value of, and execute the setting confirmation process and the setting change process when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, so that the current set value can be confirmed and the set value can be changed. For example, the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". Then, while it is possible to execute an effect suggesting a set value (for example, an effect in which the execution ratio differs depending on the set value), no matter which set value is set, the customer is waiting in the red effect mode. It suffices to configure so that the execution ratio of the telop display of is common.

(Means 11h) In any of the means 1h to the means 10h, the suggestion effect executing means supplies power depending on whether the initialization process is executed when the power supply is started and the recovery process is executed. The rate at which the suggestion effect is executed in a specific period after the start is different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to whether or not the suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 11c in the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, the execution ratio of the telop display and the countdown effect waiting for customers differs between after the initialization process and after the power failure is restored. It may be configured as follows.

(Means 12h) In any one of means 1h to 11h, a variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a special variable display pattern is provided, and the variable display pattern determining means has special conditions. When the special variable display pattern is satisfied, the special variable display pattern can be determined, and before the special condition is satisfied, the special variable display pattern is not determined, and when the variable display by the special variable display pattern is executed, the special state is set. Further provided is a specific notification effect execution means capable of executing a specific notification effect for notifying the fact that it is controlled. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the special condition is controlled by the establishment of the special condition, and it is possible to clearly notify the player of the change in the gaming state. Can be improved.

In the feature portion 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 12h is based on, for example, a configuration using the relief time saving variation deviation pattern table shown in FIG. 14-8 (I).

(Means 13h) In any of the means 1h to the means 12h, a variable display pattern is determined from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a specific variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determining means is provided, and the variable display pattern determining means can determine a specific variable display pattern regardless of whether the variable display display result is a specific display result or not. Yes, when the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is higher than that of the predetermined variable display pattern, and the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied is the predetermined period. When the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is lower than that of the previous period. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In the feature unit 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 13h is based on, for example, a configuration using the variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 14-8 (F) and 14-8 (G).

(Means 14h) In any one of the means 1h to the means 13h, a notice effect executing means capable of executing a notice effect for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed is provided, and the notice effect is provided. The execution means can execute the advance notice effect in both the case where the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result and the case where the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result, and the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. In the case, the ratio of executing the advance notice effect is higher than in the case where the specific display result is not obtained, and the variable display is displayed in the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied than in the period before the predetermined period. When the result is not a specific display result, the ratio of executing the advance notice effect is low. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this feature part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of means 14h is based on the structure which determines whether or not the advance notice effect is executed, for example, by using the table shown in FIG. 14-32.

(Means 15h) In any of the means 1h to the means 14h, a notice effect executing means capable of executing a notice effect for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed is provided, and the notice effect is provided. The execution means can execute the advance notice effect according to the specific mode and the predetermined mode regardless of whether the display result of the variable display is the specific display result or not, and the variable display is displayed. When the result is a specific display result, the ratio of executing the advance notice effect in the specific mode is higher than that in the predetermined mode, and the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied is more variable than the period before the predetermined period. When the display result of the display does not become the specific display result, the ratio of executing the advance notice effect according to the specific mode is low. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In the feature unit 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 15h is based on, for example, using the table shown in FIGS. 14-32 to determine whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect mode.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9… Game effect lamp 10… General winning opening 11… Main board 12… Production control board 13… Voice control board 14… Lamp control board 15… Relay board 20… Ordinary symbol display 21… Gate switch 22A, 22B… Starting port Switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123… Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and controlling to an advantageous advantageous state when a specific display result is derived and displayed.
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
As the vibration effect in which the operating means vibrates, a vibration effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect and a special vibration effect, and a vibration effect executing means.
A light emitting effect executing means capable of executing a light emitting effect that causes the operating means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect, and a light emitting effect executing means.
It is equipped with a specific effect execution means that can execute a specific effect according to the progress of the game.
When the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed.
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed.
The vibration effect executing means can execute the special vibration effect in association with the execution of the specific effect.
The vibration mode differs between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect.
Moreover,
A state control means that can control a special state in which variable display is easier to execute than the normal state,
It is equipped with an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display.
The state control means can control the special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times.
The updating means is a gaming machine characterized in that numerical information is updated depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed.

Images